JP2019013357A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To prevent a player's false recognition by clarifying discrimination between both of a case of stopping double symbols when the player wants to stop and a case of stopping the double symbols when the player wants not to stop.SOLUTION: When a lottery turns out a prescribed lottery result, a game machine is configured to be able to stop double symbols on the basis of a right first stop and Meoshi (a well-aimed stop-switch depression) of the double symbols ("an upper target" and "a lower target"), and to sometimes notify of an operation mode of stop switches capable of stopping the double symbols. In a case where a lottery turns out the prescribed lottery result during a special game and the game machine notifies of the stop-switch operation mode capable of stopping the double symbols and if the double symbols are stopped, the game machine outputs a performance (an emphasis image) of emphasizing the stop of the double symbols. In a case where the lottery turns out a prescribed lottery result during the special game but the game machine does not notify of the stop-switch operation mode capable of stopping the double symbols, even if the double symbols have been stopped on the basis of the operation of the player, the game machine does not output a performance (an emphasis image) of emphasizing the stop of the double symbols.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 46

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that outputs an effect related to the pressing of symbols.

  In the conventional technology, for example, during a BB game, when a combination that can stop the symbol combination of “White 7”-“White 7”-“White 7” is drawn and the winning combination is won, Aim! Is known (see, for example, paragraphs “0382” to “0383” of Patent Document 1).

JP 2012-016386 A

However, "Aim for" White 7 "! In the game, when the winning combination of “White 7” does not stop in the game, “White 7” does not stop in the display window at the time of the first stop. When stopped, there is a problem that the player cannot have a sense of expectation.
Further, a predetermined operation mode (push order) for stopping “White 7” is determined in advance, but the player does not want to stop “White 7” and the player presses the stop switch in the predetermined operation mode. When “White 7” stops due to the operation, there is a possibility that the player may misunderstand.
The problem to be solved by the present invention includes a case where a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is stopped when it is stopped, and a case where it is stopped when a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is not desired to be stopped. Therefore, it is necessary to clarify the distinction between the two and reduce the possibility of misidentifying the player.

The present invention solves the above-mentioned problems by the following solution means (the configuration of the corresponding embodiment is shown in parentheses). The invention according to the initial claim of the present application corresponds to the initial invention 6 among the initial inventions 1 to 8 described later.
The present invention
The gaming state controlled by the main control means (main control board 50) includes a first gaming state (for example, main gaming state 0) and a second gaming state (for example, a main gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. State 3)
A lottery means (61) for drawing a role is provided,
In the special game (1BBA game, main game state 11, mission bonus), the role lottery means performs a lottery so that a predetermined lottery result (winning of winning numbers “48” to “55”) may be obtained,
When a predetermined lottery result is obtained by the winning lottery means, a specific symbol (“BAR”) corresponding to the predetermined lottery result is selected based on the operation mode of the stop switch (first stop on the right side and the double symbols). Or a combination of specific symbols ("BAR" aligned, one or more double symbols) can be stopped,
When it becomes a predetermined lottery result during a special game, it has a case of notifying information about an operation mode of a stop switch that can stop a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols corresponding to the predetermined lottery result,
Information regarding the operation mode of the stop switch that becomes a predetermined lottery result during a special game and that can stop a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols corresponding to the predetermined lottery result, and a specific symbol corresponding to the predetermined lottery result or When a specific symbol combination stops, a specific effect that emphasizes that a specific symbol or a specific symbol combination has stopped is output,
A specific lot corresponding to the predetermined lottery result in the case where the information regarding the operation mode of the stop switch which becomes the predetermined lottery result during the special game and the specific symbol corresponding to the predetermined lottery result or the combination of the specific symbol can be stopped is not notified. When a specific symbol or a specific symbol combination corresponding to a predetermined lottery result is stopped by operating the stop switch so that the symbol or a specific symbol combination stops, the specific symbol or the specific symbol combination It is controlled to not output a specific effect that emphasizes the fact that has stopped.

  According to the present invention, a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is stopped only when a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is stopped in a game informing the user of information about the operation mode of a stop switch that can stop a specific symbol or a specific symbol combination. A specific effect that emphasizes the design or combination of specific symbols is output, so that the player can indicate whether or not the stoppage is advantageous to the player. It is possible to reduce the risk of being lost.

It is a block diagram showing an outline of control of a slot machine which is an example of a gaming machine in the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of a reel. It is a figure which shows an image display apparatus, a display window, an effective line, etc. It is a figure (1) which shows the kind of combination, the combination of a symbol, the number of payout, etc. FIG. It is a figure (2) which shows the kind of combination, the combination of a symbol, the number of payout, etc. FIG. It is a figure (3) which shows the kind of combination, the combination of a symbol, the number of payout, etc. FIG. It is a figure (4) which shows the kind of combination, the combination of a symbol, the number of payout, etc. FIG. It is a figure (5) which shows the kind of combination, the combination of a symbol, the number of payout, etc. FIG. It is a figure (6) which shows the kind of combination, the combination of a symbol, the number of payout, etc. FIG. It is a figure (7) which shows the kind of combination, the combination of a symbol, the number of payout, etc. FIG. It is a figure (1) which shows the content etc. of the winning combination contained in the winning number, the condition apparatus corresponding to a winning number, and a condition apparatus. It is a figure (2) which shows the contents etc. of the winning combination contained in the winning number, the condition apparatus corresponding to the winning number, and the condition apparatus. It is a figure (3) which shows the contents etc. of the winning combination contained in the winning number, the condition apparatus corresponding to the winning number, and the condition apparatus. It is a figure (4) which shows the contents etc. of the winning combination contained in the winning number, the condition apparatus corresponding to the winning number, and the condition apparatus. It is a figure (5) which shows the content etc. of the winning combination contained in the winning number, the condition apparatus corresponding to a winning number, and a condition apparatus. It is a figure (6) which shows the content etc. of the winning combination contained in the winning number, the condition apparatus corresponding to a winning number, and a condition apparatus. It is a figure (7) which shows the content etc. of the winning combination contained in the winning number, the condition apparatus corresponding to a winning number, and a condition apparatus. It is a figure (1) which shows a non-RT (normal) number table. It is a figure (2) which shows a non-RT (normal) number table. It is a figure (1) which shows the numerical table of RT1. It is a figure (2) which shows the numerical table of RT1. It is a figure (1) which shows the numerical table of RT2 (under preparation). It is FIG. (2) which shows the numerical table of RT2 (under preparation). It is a figure (1) which shows the numerical table of RT3. It is a figure (2) which shows the numerical table of RT3. It is FIG. (1) which shows the numerical table of RT4 (inside). It is a figure (2) which shows the numerical table of RT4 (inside). It is a figure (1) which shows the numerical table in SB operation | movement. It is a figure (2) which shows the numerical table in SB operation | movement. It is a figure (1) which shows the numerical table in 1BBA operation | movement. It is a figure (2) which shows the numerical table in 1BBA operation | movement. It is a figure (1) which shows the numerical table in 1BBB-1BBD operation | movement. It is a figure (2) which shows the numerical table in 1BBB-1BBD operation | movement. It is a figure which shows RT transition. It is a figure which shows the transition of a main game state. It is a figure (1) which shows change conditions of a main game state, change of section classification number, etc. It is a figure (2) which shows change conditions of a main game state, change of section classification number, etc. It is a figure (3) which shows change conditions of a main game state, change of section classification number, etc. It is a figure (4) which shows change conditions of a main game state, change of section classification number, etc. It is a figure (1) which shows the content of RWM. It is a figure (2) which shows the content of RWM. It is a figure (1) which shows the first half part (level up) of a mission bonus. It is a figure (2) which shows the first half part (level up) of a mission bonus. It is a figure which shows the latter half part production of a mission bonus. It is a figure which shows the example of an image (1) in SR. It is a figure which shows the example of an image (2) in SR. It is a figure which shows the example of an image (3) in SR. It is a figure which shows the example of an image (4) in SR. It is a figure which shows the example of an image (5) in SR. It is a figure which shows the example of an image (6) in SR. It is a flowchart which shows a main process (M_MAIN). It is a flowchart which shows a game start set (MS_GAME_SET). It is a figure which shows BB acquisition number table (TBL_BB_PAY). (A) is a figure which shows the timer table at the time of BB operation | movement start, and the timer table at the time of completion | finish of BB operation | movement, (B) is a figure which shows the standby (wait) time for every BB. It is a flowchart which shows BB timer management (BB_TIME_CTL). It is a figure which shows the BB timer management table and the timer table for every kind of BB. It is a flowchart which shows an advantageous area setting (M_ADV_SET). It is a flowchart which shows control at the time of start (M_START_CTL). It is a figure which shows the branch table at the time of the special game start according to the main game state, and the branch table at the time of the special game completion according to the main game state. It is a flowchart which shows a game completion | finish check process (M_GAME_CHK). It is a flowchart which shows game end control (GAME_END_CTL). It is a flowchart which shows BB operation | movement management (M_BB_CTL). It is a flowchart which shows an interrupt process (I_INTR). It is a flowchart which shows a timer management (I_TIME_CNT). It is a figure which shows the address arrangement | positioning and reference address of the timer value of 2nd Embodiment (AC). It is a flowchart which shows the timer arrangement (example 1) in the address arrangement | positioning and reference | standard address of 2nd Embodiment A. It is a flowchart which shows the timer arrangement (example 2) in the address arrangement | positioning of 2nd Embodiment A, and a reference address. It is a flowchart which shows the timer arrangement | positioning in the address arrangement | positioning of 2nd Embodiment B, and a reference address. It is a flowchart which shows the timer arrangement (example 1) in the address arrangement | positioning of 2nd Embodiment C, and a reference address. It is a flowchart which shows the timer arrangement (example 2) in the address arrangement | positioning of 2nd Embodiment C, and a reference address. It is a figure which shows the production group number table in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the production group table in 3rd Embodiment. In 3rd Embodiment, it is a flowchart which shows an effect group number set.

In the present specification, the meanings of terms are as follows.
“RT” means that the type (number) of condition devices (objects, replays, small roles) and the winning probabilities that are the lottery targets are in a special lottery state. By shifting from one RT to another, it means that the winning probability of at least one condition device (for example, replay) to be a lottery varies. Therefore, the winning probability for each type of replay in one RT is a value specific to that RT, and the winning probability for each type of replay is the same between one RT and the other RT. Absent. However, the combined value of the winning probability of replay may be the same in one RT and the other RT.

In the present embodiment, the RT first includes non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, RT4, 1BBA operation, and 1BBB to 1BBD operation (FIG. 34 described later).
“Non-RT” does not mean that it is not included in the concept of RT, but is equivalent to “RT0”. Therefore, in this specification, “RT” includes non-RT.
In the present embodiment, the non-inside is non-RT, RT1, RT2, or RT3, and the inside is RT4. The type (number) of replays to be selected for lottery and the winning probability differ between non-inside and inside.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, 1BBA operation | movement and 1BBB-1BBD operation | movement are provided as a special game. In the present embodiment, neither the 1BBA operation nor the 1BBB-1BBD operation is performed for replay lottery. Therefore, strictly speaking, it is not included in RT. Note that at least one replay lottery may be performed during the 1BBA operation and the 1BBB-1BBD operation. In this case, the 1BBA operation and the 1BBB-1BBD operation can also be said to be one RT.
Note that the term “actual operation” means that it means that the prize is won and that it means that a special game related to the bonus is being played.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, it is a concept different from RT and includes a main gaming state in which the transition is controlled by the main control board 50 as in the case of RT. As will be described in detail later, the main game state of the present embodiment includes main game states 0 and 1 to 13 as shown in FIG. However, the main game state 4 is treated as a missing number in this embodiment. Although the actual machine has the main game state 4, in the following embodiments, the main game state 4 will be omitted (deleted) for the sake of simplicity.

  RT and the main game state have a case where it is linked and a case where it is not linked. For example, when the condition for satisfying the RT transition and the main game state transition is satisfied, the RT transition is performed and the main game state is also transitioned. On the other hand, when the RT transition condition is satisfied but the main gaming state transition condition is not satisfied, the main gaming state remains unchanged and only the RT transitions. On the other hand, when the transition condition of the main gaming state is satisfied but the transition condition of RT is not satisfied, only the main gaming state transitions without changing the RT.

In the present embodiment, a lottery of “winning number” is first executed by the role lottery means 61 described later. Therefore, the role lottery means 61 is also referred to as “winning number lottery (decision, selection) means”.
The winning number of the present embodiment includes a winning number “0” that is not won and winning numbers “1” to “86” that are any of the winnings. When the winning number is determined, a “condition device number” corresponding to the winning number is generated.
The “condition device number” includes a “material condition device number” and a “winning and replay condition device number”.
When the condition device number is generated, the condition device corresponding to the condition device number is activated, so that the combination of symbols corresponding to the activated condition device can be stopped and displayed on the active line.

The “object condition device number” is a condition device number corresponding to any special character (object), and in the present embodiment, “0” to “5” are provided as “object condition device numbers”. .
The accessory condition device number “0” is an accessory condition device number corresponding to the non-winning of the special role (object), and the accessory condition device numbers “1” to “5” are any special roles ( This is the equipment condition device number corresponding to the winning of the equipment.
Here, as the “special role (act)”, 1BB (first-type accessory continuous operation device; first-type big bonus), 2BB (second-type accessory continuous operation device; second-type big bonus), Examples include RB (first-class special bonus; regular bonus), CB (second-class special bonus; challenge bonus), and SB (single bonus).

1BB (first type accessory continuous operation device) refers to a device that can continuously operate RB (first type special accessory).
Moreover, 2BB (2nd type accessory continuous operation apparatus) means the apparatus which can operate CB (2nd type special accessory) continuously.
Furthermore, SB (single bonus) is an accessory that executes an SB game consisting of one game. When the SB game (1 game) is finished, the game state before the SB game transition is restored. In the present embodiment, during the SB game, since at least one replay is drawn, it can be said that there is one RT.
Furthermore, 1BB and 2BB are special roles that can carry the winning information after the next game, and SB and CB are special roles that do not carry the winning information after the next game. The carry-on of winning information after the next game will be described later.
In this embodiment, 1BB and SB are provided as special roles. 1BB has four types (1BBA, 1BBB, 1BBC, and 1BBD) described later. In the present embodiment, CB and 2BB are not provided.

  During the operation of 1BB, the RB of the present embodiment ends when satisfying either the two small role winnings or the two games, and after that, on condition that the end condition of the 1BB operation is not satisfied. Activate RB again. In the present embodiment, the RBA is continuously operated during the operation of 1BBA, and the RBB is continuously operated during the operation of 1BBB to 1BBD. However, the RB is not limited to this, and the RB is “N” (“N” is “2” or more and “8” or less), or “M” (“M” is “2” or more “ 12 ”or less) as long as one of the number of games is satisfied.

Further, the “winning and replay condition device number” is a condition device number corresponding to a small role or replay that does not carry the winning information after the next game, and in this embodiment, “winning and replay condition device number” is “ 0 ”to“ 57 ”. The winning and replay condition device number “0” is a condition device number corresponding to the non-winning of the small role and replay, and the winning and replay condition device numbers “1” to “57” are any of the small role or replay. It is a condition device number corresponding to the winning.
Of the winning numbers “0” to “86” of the present embodiment described above, the winning numbers “0” to “57” correspond to the winning and replay condition device numbers “0” to “57”, and The winning condition condition device number is “0”.
On the other hand, winning numbers “58” to “86” are winning numbers corresponding to the accessory condition device numbers “1” to “5”. Here, the winning numbers “58” to “86” include a winning number corresponding to the single winning of the special role, and a winning number in which the special role and the small role or replay are won.

When winning information is won for a winning number (in this embodiment, winning numbers “58” to “85”) including one of the special roles (1BB) that can be carried over after the next game, the special role (1BB) ) The special combination winning information is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to) stops on the active line.
Here, a game that has not won a winning number including a special combination that can carry the winning information after the next game is referred to as “non-inside”. On the other hand, when the winning number including the special role (1BB) is won, but the combination of symbols corresponding to the selected special role is not yet stopped on the active line, that is, the winning information of the special role is carried over. The game is called “inside”. In this embodiment, the game won for the special combination (1BB) is included in “Non-Inside”, but the game won for the special combination (1BB) may be included in “Inside”.
Since the SB does not carry the winning information after the next game, it does not go inside when the SB is won.

  The “advantageous operation mode” of the stop switch means that a role with a large number of payouts (combination of symbols) in a game where the game result (combination of symbols stopped on the active line) has an advantage / disadvantage due to the operation mode of the stop switch. An operation mode for winning (stop display), or an operation mode for winning (stop display) a combination of symbols that shift to an advantageous RT (promotion) or do not shift (fall) to an unfavorable RT. The “advantageous operation mode” is also referred to as a correct operation mode.

The “operation mode” is a concept indicating the pressing order of the stop switches and / or the operation timing (timing of pressing the stop switch for stopping the target symbol on the effective line).
In the present embodiment, the “game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch” is a game in which a push order bell (small role A1 to A6 (small role A group)) is won, duplicate replay (replay A1 to A6). (Replay A group), Replay B1 to B6 (Replay B group), Replay C1 to C6 (Replay C group) correspond to the game at the time of winning.

Furthermore, at the time of pushing order bell winning, the bell (small role) that wins when the stop switch is operated in the correct pushing order is the high-order bell (the number of payouts of the double winning bell group (small role group) is In some cases, a combination of symbols such as the most small combinations is displayed as a bell (small combination) that is most advantageous to the player.
On the other hand, when the stop switch is operated in the incorrect answer pressing order when the pressing order bell is won, there are cases where the Anme Bell wins and cases where the combination is missed according to the operation timing of the stop switch. The stop appearance displayed when the role is missed is referred to as "spilled eye".

On the other hand, when replay overlap is won, different symbol combinations are displayed in a stopped state according to the pressing order of the stop switches, but no missing occurs when replay is won ("PB = 1" described later).
In this case, a combination of symbols advantageous to the player, for example, a combination of symbols that shifts to an RT with a higher replay winning probability, or a pressing order for stopping and displaying a combination of symbols that maintain an RT with a high replay winning probability is displayed as `` correct answer ''. This is referred to as “push order” or “promotion push order”.
On the other hand, a push order in which a combination of symbols transitioning from an RT that is advantageous to the player (for example, RT having a high replay winning probability) to an unfavorable RT (for example, RT having a low replay winning probability) is stopped and displayed is “incorrect This is referred to as “push order” or “fall (downgrade) push order”.

The “instruction function” means a function of displaying (notifying) the above-described “advantageous operation mode” to the player.
In other words, the “instruction function” refers to a device (control) that facilitates winning. On the other hand, when the “instruction function” is a device that facilitates the winning of a small role, in a narrow sense, the “instruction function” is a correct push for winning the correct answer push order (high eye bell) when winning the push order bell. It means displaying the order, and displaying the correct answer pressing order to win the advantageous replay (replay to shift to advantageous RT, or replay to maintain advantageous RT) at the time of replay overlap winning Not included.

However, in the following embodiments, “instruction function” refers to a function that displays “advantageous operation mode” to the player, and “operation of instruction function” indicates the correct push order when the push order bell is won. And the display of the correct pressing order for winning an advantageous replay at the time of replay overlap win.
Note that “display” indicates that the “instruction” content is shown to the player, and “notification” indicates that the instruction content is indicated to the player. Therefore, the “instruction function” is both a “display function” and a “notification function”.
Further, “instruction” is a concept having the meaning of “instruction”, but no penalty is imposed on the player just because the “instruction” is not followed. However, if the correct answer pressing order displayed by the operation of the instruction function is not followed, the high-order bell may not win when the pressing bell wins, or an unfavorable replay may win when the replay overlap wins.

In addition, “instruction function operation game” means a game having an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (conditional device having an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (small role A group, replay A group, replay B group, replay C group) ) Is a game that activates an instruction function (a game that informs a player of an advantageous operation mode). Therefore, the instruction function operation game is one game. The instruction function operation game may be referred to as a notification game.
Further, even in a game having an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch, when the instruction function is not activated, the game is not an instruction function operation game.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the replays E1 to E3 (replay group E), replays F1 to F3 (replay group F), and replays G1 to G2 (replay group G) are selected, the stop switch 42 is pressed in the right order. When it is the first stop and a double symbol (described later) is pressed, the two symbols (1 to 3 depending on the condition device) can be stopped. However, regardless of whether the two symbols are stopped or not, when one of these replays is won, one of the replays included in the selected condition device wins.

In the same manner as described above, when the small roles I1 to I3 (small role I group), small roles J1 to J3 (small role J group), and small roles K1 to K2 (small role K group) are selected, the stop switch 42 is pressed. When the order is the right first stop, and when a double symbol (described later) is pressed, the two symbols (1 to 3 depending on the condition device) can be stopped. However, regardless of whether the two symbols are stopped or not, at the time of winning these small combinations, any of the seven small combinations included in the selected condition device wins.
In this way, it is possible to stop two consecutive symbols by a specific pressing order (first right) and pressing, but if there is no difference in the winning combination itself (replay or payout number is the same), a specific pressing Notifying the order and notifying that a specific symbol (double symbol) is pressed does not correspond to “operation of the instruction function”. These notifications are notifications of the operation information of the stop switch 42 performed in the production.

In the present embodiment, the “game section” includes a “normal section”, a “standby section”, and an “advantage section”.
First, the “normal section” is a signal related to an instruction function, specifically a push order instruction number or a winning and replay condition device number (information that can determine the correct push order) described later is a peripheral board (for example, sub-control). It is a game section that is prohibited from being transmitted to the board) and does not affect the performance related to the instruction function at all (the instruction function is not activated). In other words, the normal section is a game section in which the instruction function cannot be operated and a game section in which an advantageous operation mode cannot be displayed (notified). However, in addition to the lottery of the winning number, it is possible to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous section (lottery etc.).
In the normal section, since the instruction function must not be activated, it is not possible to display (inform) the push order instruction information on a predetermined display device (such as LED) electrically connected to the main control board, Since a signal related to the instruction function is not transmitted to the peripheral board, it is also impossible to display (notify) an advantageous operation mode by a lamp, a speaker, an image display device, or the like that is electrically connected to a sub-control board described later.

Note that the “normal section” in the present embodiment is a game section in which it is possible to determine whether to shift to an advantageous section (lottery, etc.). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a first normal section (an advantageous section lottery available section) in which it is possible to determine whether to shift to an advantageous section (lottery etc.) and whether to shift to an advantageous section ( It is also possible to provide a second normal section in which a lottery or the like cannot be performed (an advantageous section lottery disabled period).
For example, when the transition condition to the second normal section is satisfied in the first normal section (for example, when a predetermined winning number is won), transition to the second normal section may be mentioned. Alternatively, after the special role (for example, 1BB) operation is finished (after the special game is finished), it is possible to move to the second normal section uniformly or under a predetermined condition.
In addition, the transition from the second normal section to the first normal section is performed by digesting a predetermined number of games, winning a predetermined winning number, displaying a predetermined symbol combination, staying in a predetermined RT (for example, staying in a plurality of RTs) The condition is that the transition to RT having the highest ratio is made.

In addition, the “advantageous section” is a gaming section having a performance related to the instruction function (the instruction function may be activated). Specifically, when the instruction function is activated, the instruction content is displayed on the main control board. Only when displaying (notifying) the push order instruction information so that the (advantageous operation mode) can be identified, signals related to the instruction function (for example, information on the push order that enables the advantageous operation mode to be grasped, and winnings) And a replay condition device number) indicates a game section that can be transmitted to the sub-control board. In other words, the advantageous section is a gaming section in which the instruction function can be activated (the instruction function may be activated), and an advantageous operation mode can be displayed (informing) (a display (informing) may be performed). It is. A game in an advantageous section may be referred to as a notification-enabled game. On the other hand, a game in the normal section or a game in the standby section may be referred to as a non-notifiable game.
However, the sub-control board cannot output an instruction content that the main control board performs or an effect contrary to the received signal related to the instruction function.

In the advantageous section of the present embodiment, the maximum payout number (“10” in the present embodiment) corresponding to the specified number (“3”) in the game (when the accessory is not activated) in which the instruction function operation game can be executed. ) In the game selected as a condition device (small role A group) having an advantageous operation mode capable of acquiring a), to indicate the operation mode of the stop switch for winning the winning combination (small role 01) related to the maximum payout number (specifically In order to do so, it is necessary to perform at least one game of notifying the pressing order with a predetermined display device (LED or the like) electrically connected to the main control board. When the instruction function is activated so that the combination (small combination 01) relating to the maximum payout number can be acquired, the “maximum instruction has been generated” is completed.
On the other hand, when it shifts to the advantageous section based on the winning of the special role, it is not always necessary to execute the instruction function operation game. For example, it is possible to end the advantageous section together with the end of the special game related to the special role (without executing the instruction function operation game once).
In addition, after the transition to the advantageous section based on the winning of the small role or replay, when a predetermined special role (1BBA to 1BBD in this embodiment) is won without executing the instruction function operation game, or the predetermined When the special game related to the special role (1BBA game to 1BBD game in this embodiment) is executed, the instruction function operation game is not necessarily executed. For example, it is possible to end the advantageous section without executing the instruction function operation game once with the end of the special game related to the predetermined special role.

In addition, during an advantageous section, in a game won for a role having an advantageous operation mode, the instruction function may always be activated to display the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
On the other hand, even if the game is won in a role having an advantageous operation mode during the advantageous section, the instruction function may not be activated.

Furthermore, the “standby section” refers to a gaming section when it has not yet shifted to the advantageous section after it has been decided to shift to the advantageous section. The waiting section may or may not be provided. That is, the normal zone may be shifted to the advantageous zone, the normal zone may be shifted to the standby zone, and the standby zone may be further transferred to the advantageous zone. It should be noted that the transition from the advantageous section to the standby section is not possible, and the transition is always made to the normal section after the advantageous section ends. The waiting section can be transferred only when it is decided to move to the advantageous section based on the winning of the winning number including the special role that can be carried over after the next game, and corresponds to the special role. A game with a combination of symbols must be finished. Of course, the game may end before the game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination is displayed. In addition, according to the type of the winning number that includes the special role that can be carried over after the next game, the winning information is transferred to the waiting section in advance (when the winning number is won, whether to move to the waiting section, etc.) It is also possible to determine in advance that the process will unconditionally shift to the standby section without making the above determination.
In the standby section, the instruction function cannot be operated on the main control board, and a signal related to the instruction function cannot be transmitted to the sub-control board. When the instruction function is operated on the main control board and a signal related to the instruction function is transmitted to the sub-control board, the condition is that it is in an advantageous section.

The advantageous section of the present embodiment includes a case where one instruction function operation game is executed and a case where a predetermined number of instruction function operation games (also referred to as AT and ART) are executed.
In the advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game is executed a predetermined number of times, the instruction function is basically operated when a role having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is won.
The advantageous section ending condition does not determine the number of games described above. For example, when an end (puncture) lottery is performed at a predetermined timing and the lottery is won, the advantageous section is terminated, Alternatively, the advantageous section may be terminated when the ART termination condition is satisfied.

Alternatively, only by shifting to the advantageous section, the execution condition of the instruction function operation game is not satisfied, and whether or not the instruction function operation game is executed is determined by lottery or the like on the condition that it is in the advantageous section, When it is decided to execute the instruction function operation game, the instruction function operation game is executed until a predetermined end condition is satisfied.
Further, during the advantageous section, it may be determined (lottery or the like) whether or not to add (add) the (remaining) number of games in the advantageous section.
In addition, the upper limit number of games is determined in the advantageous section, and when the upper limit number of games is reached, even if the remaining number of games in the advantageous section is reached, the advantageous section is always terminated at that point (limiter ), Shift to normal section.

  In addition, when the upper limit number of games is reached, even if the winning combination (small role A group) having an advantageous operation mode that can acquire the maximum payout number (“10”) has not been won once or won. However, even if the combination of the maximum payout number (small part 01) has never instructed the operating mode of the stop switch to win, the advantageous section is always ended at that time (limiter operation), and the normal section Migrate to

The AT is a game section in which the instruction function is always activated or the instruction function is activated more frequently when a combination having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is won.
The relationship between the advantageous interval and the AT can be arbitrarily set. However, it is always necessary to be in the advantageous section during AT. For example, “advantageous section = AT” may be set. In this case, the AT is continued throughout the advantageous section.
Further, non-AT and AT may be repeated (at least one AT is executed) during the advantageous section. In the present embodiment, there are a case where there is an advantageous section and AT, and a case where there is an advantageous section and non-AT.

In this embodiment, as a general rule, since AT is executed in a state (RT1) in which the winning probability of replay is high, it is ART.
However, as will be described in detail later, when SB wins during ART, the game shifts to non-RT. When transitioning to non-RT, the user stays in non-RT unless a winning number including 1BB is won. Here, the winning probability of replay in the non-RT of the present embodiment is about “1 / 7.3” (FIG. 19). Therefore, when AT is executed during non-RT, it is not strictly ART.
However, in the present specification, not only RT1 but also non-RT execution of AT is referred to as ART. That is, in the present specification, the term “ART” does not necessarily mean that the winning probability of replay is high.
As described above, ART is executed by RT1 in principle, and the winning probability of replay at RT1 is about 65%, which is set to a high probability.

  Furthermore, the advantageous zone is the chance zone (CZ), and when the AT execution condition is satisfied during the advantageous zone (CZ), the AT is executed, but when the AT execution condition is not satisfied, the AT is executed. It is also possible to end the advantageous section without any problem. However, as described above, when the player moves to the advantageous section, the instruction function is activated when the winning combination (small role A group) having an advantageous operation mode capable of acquiring the maximum payout number is won at least once. is necessary. However, if you have not won the small role A group at a predetermined number of games (for example, 1500 games), which is the upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous section, the advantageous section without operating the instruction function even once May be terminated. Further, when the special combination (1BBA to 1BBD) is won, or when a special game based on the special combination is executed, the advantageous section may be ended without operating the instruction function once.

The pull-in rate (PB) is the probability that a desired symbol to be stopped on the active line can be stopped on the active line from the moment when the stop switch is operated until the reel stops (maximum number of moving frames). Show.
If the stop switch is not operated at an appropriate reel position (at an operation timing at which the target symbol can be stopped on the active line within the range of the maximum number of moving frames), the target symbol is stopped on the active line (until the effective line is reached). Inability to pull in is referred to as “PB (pull-in rate) ≠ 1”.
On the other hand, regardless of the position of the reel at the moment when the stop switch is operated (regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch), the target symbol can always be stopped (drawn) on the effective line. = 1 ".

“PB = 1” has a case where all the reels are so in the role and a case where only the specific (partial) reels are.
In the present embodiment, the maximum number of moving frames is set to “4”, and when the target symbol is arranged at an interval of 5 symbols or less, “PB = 1” is obtained, exceeding 5 symbols (6 symbols or more). When arranged at intervals, “PB ≠ 1”. In particular, the number of symbols of the reel of this embodiment is set to “20”, and if four symbols are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols, the symbol is “PB = 1”.

In the case where the game progresses as “N−1” game, “N” game, “N + 1” game,... (“N” is an integer of 2 or more), the current game is “N” game. When it is an eye, the game of the “N” game is referred to as “current game”. Further, the game of the “N-1” game is referred to as “previous game”.
On the other hand, the game of the “N + 1” game is referred to as “next game”.

Further, the “game medium” is a medal in the present embodiment, but electronic information (electronic medal, electronic data) is used as the game medium in the case of, for example, an encapsulated (ECO) game machine. “Electronic information” means, for example, when money (banknotes) is inserted into a lending machine, it is converted into electronic information corresponding to the money, and part or all of the electronic information is played on a gaming machine. It can be stored in a gaming machine as a gaming medium for performing the game.
Further, in the case where the game medium is electronic information, “medal payout” means crediting (adding) to the game medium storage device provided in the gaming machine. Therefore, in the present invention, “medal payout” does not mean that the medals are actually paid out from the hopper, but the game medium storage device (for example, the storage number display LED 76 of the embodiment) A process of crediting (adding) electronic information corresponding to the payout is also included.

In the MPU (one-chip microprocessor) of the present embodiment, A, B, C, D, E, H, and L registers (seven registers) can be used at the time of calculation.
Furthermore, an F (flag) register is provided as one of the registers (A register, H register, etc.) used in this embodiment. The F register is composed of D0 to D7 bits, like the other registers. A carry flag is assigned to the D0 bit, and a zero flag is assigned to the D6 bit.

The “carry flag” executes arithmetic processing (for example, addition processing, subtraction processing, logical product operation processing, logical sum operation processing, exclusive logical sum, etc.). When it occurs, it becomes “1”. On the other hand, when the arithmetic processing is executed and no overflow or carry occurs according to the arithmetic result, “0” is set.
The “zero flag” is set to “1” when the calculation process is executed and the calculation result is “0”. On the other hand, when the calculation process is executed and the calculation result does not become “0”, it becomes “0”.

In the present specification, a numerical value with “B” at the end (in particular, 8 bits) means a binary number. Similarly, a numerical value with “H” at the end means a hexadecimal number. Specifically, for example, a numerical value indicating “16” in decimal number is expressed as “00010000 (B)” in binary number and “10 (H)” in hexadecimal number. In addition, a numerical value indicating a decimal number is expressed as “16 (D)” as necessary. However, since it is clear that the conditional device number is a decimal number, “(D)” is not described.
When it is clear whether the number is binary, decimal, or hexadecimal, the end symbols of “B”, “D”, and “H” may be omitted, respectively.

In the present invention, “having at least A” means to include both the case of having A and B (other than A) and the case of having only A (no other than A). is there.
Further, in the present invention, for example, “the lottery result including the winning of the special role” means a lottery result that is a double winning of the special role and the small role or replay, and a lottery result that is a single winning of the special role (only the special role) This means that the lottery result won in the above, in other words, the lottery result that has no prize other than the special role).

Furthermore, “a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols” means either one symbol, a pair of symbols defined as “symbol”, or a combination of symbols composed of a plurality of symbols. is there.
For example, in FIG. 2, the fourth “BAR” symbol on the left reel 31 is an example of a “specific symbol”. On the other hand, “BAR”-“BAR”-“BAR” (so-called “BAR” assortment) is an example of “specific symbol combination”.
Also, for example, “No. 13” and “No. 14” may be regarded as a pair of symbols (double symbols) and defined as “specific symbols”, or a plurality of symbols (“lower” It may be defined as “combination of symbols” (or “symbol group”) by regarding “tage” as one symbol and “upper tag” as one symbol.
In addition, for example, “upper / lower target” − “upper / lower target” − “upper / lower target” (double symbol set) is an example of “specific symbol combination”.
In the present invention, when a symbol stopped on an effective line is referred to as a “specific symbol (or a combination of specific symbols)”, a symbol that has not stopped on the effective line but appears in the display window is identified as “specific”. And "design (or a combination of specific symbols)". Therefore, “a specific symbol (or a specific symbol combination) has stopped (or (stopped) display)” does not necessarily mean that a specific symbol (or a specific symbol combination) is located on the active line. It doesn't mean that.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of a slot machine 10 which is an example of a gaming machine in the present embodiment.
A main control board 50 and a sub control board 80 are provided as typical control boards provided in the slot machine 10.
The main control board 50 includes an input port 51 and an output port 52, and includes an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and the like (not necessarily including only those illustrated in FIG. 1).

In FIG. 1, a main control board 50 and peripheral devices for game progress including operation switches such as a bet switch 40 are electrically connected via an input port 51 or an output port 52. The input port 51 is a connection unit to which signals such as operation switches are input, and the output port 52 is a connection unit that transmits signals to peripheral devices such as the motor 32.
In FIG. 1, the peripheral device for input is indicated by an arrow from the peripheral device to the main control board 50, and the peripheral device for output is indicated by an arrow from the main control board 50 to the peripheral device. It is shown (the same applies to the sub-control board 80).

The RWM 53 is a storage medium that can store (update) various data (variables) based on the progress of the game.
The ROM 54 is a storage medium that stores programs necessary for the progress of the game, various data (for example, a data table), and the like.

The main CPU 55 refers to a CPU provided on the main control board 50, and executes a program necessary for the progress of the game, calculates, and the like. Execute paying out.
The main CPU 55 incorporates a register. In particular, in the present embodiment, a plurality (for example, an A register to an L register, a transmission register, and the like) are provided.

An MPU including an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and a register is mounted on the main control board 50. Note that the RWM 53 and the ROM 54 may be provided outside the MPU inside the MPU.
An MPU including an RWM 83, a ROM 84, and a sub CPU 85 is mounted on a sub control board 80 described later. Note that the RWM 83 and the ROM 84 may be provided outside the one installed in the MPU.

In FIG. 1, medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 are sent into the medal selector.
As shown in FIG. 1, the medal selector includes a passage sensor 43 a, a blocker 45, and a closing sensor 44 (but not limited to these), and is electrically connected to the main control board 50.
When a medal is inserted from the medal slot 43, the passage sensor 43a first detects the medal.

  Further, a blocker 45 is provided on the downstream side of the passage sensor 43a. The blocker 45 is for permitting / disallowing the insertion of medals, and forms a medal passage for returning the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 from the payout slot when the insertion of medals is not permitted. To do. On the other hand, when the insertion of medals is permitted, a medal passage for guiding medals inserted from the medal insertion port 43 to the hopper 35 is formed.

  Here, the blocker 45 is in a state where the insertion of medals is not permitted during the game (from the start of the rotation of the reels 31 until all the reels 31 are stopped and the payout corresponding to the winning combination is completed at the time of winning the winning combination). To do. That is, the blocker 45 permits the insertion of medals at least when a game is not being performed.

  A closing sensor (optical sensor) 44 is provided further downstream of the blocker 45. In this embodiment, the insertion sensor 44 is composed of a pair of insertion sensors arranged at a predetermined distance, and is detected by the other insertion sensor after a predetermined time has elapsed since the medal is detected by one insertion sensor. It is configured. Then, based on the timing when the pair of insertion sensors 44 are turned on / off, it is determined whether or not a correct medal has been inserted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 50 includes a bet switch 40 (40a or 40b), a start switch 41, a (left, middle, right) stop switch 42, and operation switches operated by the player. The settlement switch 46 is electrically connected.
The bet switch 40 is a switch operated by the player when betting the stored medals for the current game. In the present embodiment, a 1-bet switch 40a for inserting one medal and a 3-bet switch 40b for inserting three (maximum number or specified number) medals are provided.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a bet switch for two bets may be provided.

  In addition, the specified number of this embodiment is set to 3 when the accessory is not activated and 2 when the accessory is activated, but two medals when the 1-bet switch 40a is operated (pressed) twice. Can be inserted, and three medals can be inserted when operated (pressed) three times. Further, during operation of the accessory, if the 3-bet switch 40b is operated, it is possible to insert two medals (a prescribed number) at a time.

The start switch 41 is a switch operated by the player when starting the reels 31 (all of left, middle and right).
Furthermore, three stop switches 42 are provided corresponding to the three (left, middle, and right) reels 31 and are operated by the player when the corresponding reels 31 are stopped.
Further, the settlement switch 46 is a switch operated by the player when paying out (pays out) a medal that has been bet and / or stored (credited) in the slot machine 10.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a display substrate 75 is electrically connected to the main control substrate 50. In practice, a relay board is provided between the main control board 50 and the display board 75, and the main control board 50 and the relay board, and the relay board and the display board 75 are connected. In FIG. 1, the illustration of the relay board is omitted. Thus, the main control board 50 and the display board 75 may be directly connected by a harness or the like, but another board may be interposed therebetween.
Furthermore, the control boards are not limited to being directly connected by a harness or the like, but may be connected via another separate board (such as a relay board). For example, one or more other boards (such as relay boards) may be interposed between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80.

The display board 75 is equipped with a storage number display LED 76, an advantageous section display LED 77, and an acquisition number display LED 78.
The storage number display LED 76 is an LED for displaying the number of medals stored in the slot machine 10 and is composed of upper digits and lower digits. That is, the storage number display LED 76 displays two digits.
Here, “digit” means a display unit (display), and in the present embodiment, it is composed of a seven segment display (seven segment display unit, so-called 7-segment).

The acquired number display LED 78 is an LED for displaying the number of payouts (the number of players acquired) when winning a winning combination, and is composed of an upper digit and a lower digit. Therefore, the acquisition number display LED 78 displays two digits, like the storage number display LED 76.
The acquired number display LED 78 may be controlled to be turned off when there are no medals to be paid out. Alternatively, the upper digit may be turned off and only the lower digit may be displayed as “0”.

The acquisition number display LED 78 normally displays the acquisition number, but functions as an LED that displays the content (type) of the error when an error occurs.
Furthermore, the acquisition number display LED 78 functions as an LED for displaying the pressing order instruction information in the instruction function operation game. Therefore, the acquisition number display LED 78 in the present embodiment is an LED that also serves to display the acquisition number, error contents, and push order instruction information. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is needless to say that a dedicated LED or the like for displaying push order instruction information may be provided.
Note that an advantageous push order notification is also executed by the image display device 23 connected to the sub-control board 80.
The advantageous section display LED 77 is an LED that is turned on during the advantageous section and is turned off during the non-favorable section (normal section and standby section), and is an LED for informing the player that the section is the advantageous section. .
Although not shown in FIG. 1, the upper digit and / or lower digit of the storage number display LED 76 or the acquired number display LED 78 is a 7-segment display with dots (DP; decimal point), and the storage number display LED 76 It is also possible to use the lower digit or the acquired number display LED 78 as the advantageous interval display LED 77.

  Although the description will be given later, each digit is dynamically turned on every interrupt process. For example, in one interrupt process, only one digit can be turned on and the other digits are turned off. In the next interrupt process, only one other digit can be turned on, and the remaining digits are turned off.

In FIG. 1, a motor 32 and the like of a symbol display device are electrically connected to a main control board 50.
The symbol display device includes reels 31 (three in this embodiment) for displaying symbols, motors 32 for driving the reels 31, and a reel sensor 33 for detecting the position of the reels 31.

  The motor 32 is for rotating the reels 31, is connected to the center of rotation of each reel 31, and is controlled by a reel control means 65 described later. Here, the reel 31 includes a left reel 31, a middle reel 31, and a right reel 31, and a stop switch 42 that is operated when the left reel 31 is stopped is the left stop switch 42, and when the middle reel 31 is stopped. The stop switch 42 to be operated is the middle stop switch 42, and the stop switch 42 to be operated when stopping the right reel 31 is the right stop switch 42.

The reel 31 is ring-shaped, and a reel tape on which a plurality of types of symbols (designs constituting a combination of symbols corresponding to the combination) is attached is attached to the outer peripheral surface thereof. The specific arrangement of symbols on the reel 31 will be described later.
Each reel 31 is provided with one (or two or more) index. The index is provided in a convex shape on, for example, the peripheral side surface of the reel 31 and is used when detecting whether the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position, whether it has rotated one time, or the like. Each index is detected by the reel sensor 33. The signal of the reel sensor 33 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. When the index detects (cuts) the reel sensor 33, the input signal is input to the main control board 50, and it is detected that the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position.

  Further, a symbol on the reference position at the moment when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31 is stored in the ROM 54 in advance. Thereby, the symbol on the reference position at the moment when the index is detected can be detected.

  In addition, a medal payout device is electrically connected to the main control board 50. The medal payout device includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper motor 36 that is driven when paying out medals of the hopper 35 from a payout port, and a payout for detecting medals paid out from the hopper motor 36. A sensor 37 is provided.

The medals that are maintained and received from the medal slot 43 are formed so as to be accommodated in the hopper 35 through a predetermined passage (also referred to as “chute part”).
In the present embodiment, the payout sensor (optical sensor) 37 is composed of a pair of payout sensors arranged at a predetermined distance, and after a predetermined time has passed since a medal is detected by one payout sensor 37, the other payout sensor is provided. The sensor 37 is configured to be detected. Then, based on the timing at which the pair of payout sensors 37 are turned on / off, it is determined whether or not the medals have been paid out correctly.

For example, when the signals of the pair of payout sensors 37 are both off despite the hopper motor 36 being driven, it is determined that no medal has been paid out, and a hopper error (no medal) is detected. Is done.
On the other hand, when at least one of the signals of the payout sensor 37 remains on, it is detected that a medal jam has occurred.

Furthermore, an external signal (outer end signal) to the external concentrated terminal board 100 is output from a part of the output port 52.
Here, the “external signal” is a signal to be output to the outside of the slot machine 10 (the hall computer 200, a data counter installed in the hall, etc.) via the external concentration terminal board 100. In the present embodiment, as an external signal, a signal related to ART (advantageous section) and special games, a signal indicating that an error has occurred in the slot machine 10 or that the power has been turned off (power is turned on), a slot machine, etc. 10 signals indicating opening of the front door, a medal bet signal, a medal payout signal, and the like are provided.

In FIG. 1, the sub-control board 80 controls the selection and output of effects (information) during the game and during the game standby.
Here, the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 are electrically connected, and the main control board 50 (control command transmission means 71 described later) is unidirectionally connected to the sub control board 80 by parallel communication. Information necessary for production output (control command) is transmitted.
The main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 are not limited to being electrically connected, and may be connected using optical communication means. Furthermore, both the electrical connection and the optical communication connection are not limited to parallel communication, but may be serial communication, and serial communication and parallel communication may be used in combination.

Similar to the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, and the like.
An effect peripheral device such as the following effect lamp 21 as shown in FIG. 1 is electrically connected to the sub control board 80 via an input port 81 or an output port 82. However, the peripheral device for production is not limited to these.
The RWM 83 is a storage medium capable of temporarily storing data and the like captured when the sub CPU 85 controls the production.
The ROM 84 is a storage medium that stores programs such as a lottery for production, various data, and the like as production data.

  The effect lamp 21 is made of an LED, for example, and lights up in a predetermined pattern when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The effect lamp 21 is arranged on the inner peripheral side of each reel 31, and the back lamp and reel 31 for illuminating from behind the symbols displayed on the reel 31 (three symbols that are continuously visible from the display window 17). Fluorescent lamps that illuminate the symbols on the reel 31 from above, and a frame lamp that is disposed on the front face of the slot machine 10 and blinks when winning a winning combination.

The speaker 22 outputs a predetermined sound when a predetermined condition is satisfied in order to perform various effects during the game.
Furthermore, the image display device 23 is composed of a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a dot display, etc., and various effect images during the game (correct answer pressing order, effects corresponding to the lottery result of the condition device), It displays game information (such as the number of games played and the number of games acquired during the operation of an accessory or in an advantageous zone).

  Further, the chance button 24 is used to develop an effect to the next stage by outputting an image prompting the player to operate during the effect. When the operation of the chance button 24 is urged, a signal can be output from the sub-control board 80 to the chance button 24 in order to light an LED provided in or around the chance button 24. In order for the sub control board 80 to detect that the chance button 24 has been operated, a signal indicating that the chance button 24 has been operated can be input to the sub control board 80.

Subsequently, the combination of the present embodiment, the combination of symbols, and the like will be described.
FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a symbol arrangement of the reels 31 in the present embodiment. In FIG. 2, symbol numbers are also shown. For example, in the left reel 31, the symbol of symbol number 0 is “bell”.
As shown in FIG. 2, in this embodiment, each reel 31 is equally divided into 20 frames, and a predetermined symbol is displayed on each frame.
In this embodiment, in all the reels 31, the symbol “No. Then, when both “upper” and “lower” symbols are stopped in the display window 17 described later, this means that the “double symbol” is stopped. In the following description, “double symbol” refers to a symbol composed of “upper target” and “lower target”.
On the other hand, when only one of the symbols “lower” and “upper” stops in the display window 17, it does not mean that the two symbols have stopped.

3 shows an image display device 23 provided on the front surface of the slot machine 10, a display window (transparent window) 17, the positional relationship between each reel 31, and an effective line (a display line for displaying a combination of symbols). ).
In the image display device 23 of the present embodiment, a liquid crystal display is not formed in a region corresponding to the display window 17 or is formed from a transmissive liquid crystal display, so that a reel 31 disposed behind the display window 17 is provided. It is formed so that it can be seen through.
In this embodiment, three reels 31 (left reel 31, middle reel 31, and right reel 31) are provided in parallel in the horizontal direction in this embodiment. Further, each reel 31 is arranged so that three symbols that are continuous in the vertical direction can be seen from the display window 17. Therefore, the display window 17 of the slot machine 10 is arranged so that a total of nine symbols (frames) can be seen.

  Moreover, in FIG. 3, the designation of the symbol position in this specification is illustrated. In the present specification, for each reel 31, the symbol positions at the time of stopping visible from the display window 17 are referred to as “upper stage”, “middle stage”, and “lower stage” in order from the top. ”,“ Middle left ”, and“ lower left ”.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 3, effective lines are set for the nine symbols visible from the display window 17.
Here, the “effective line” is a symbol combination line (display line) that is a symbol arrangement line when the reel 31 is stopped, and forms a symbol combination, and a symbol corresponding to one of the roles. When the combination stops at that line, it is the line that wins the role. In the present embodiment, the effective line is set to be different for a specified number of 3 (when a game is played with 3 bets) and for a specified number of 2 (when a game is played with 2 bets).
The effective line when the specified number is 3 is a so-called straight line with a downward slope. The effective line when the specified number is two is a so-called V-shaped line. The other symbol combination lines are all invalid lines.

Further, in FIG. 3, an additional arrangement display area 23 a is used as an area for displaying five numbers (an additional number (not an actually added numerical value)) during an advance rush (SR) described later. In other cases, the effect image is displayed.
In the present embodiment, the entire area outside the display window 17 in the image display area is formed from a liquid crystal display, and an arbitrary image can be displayed at an arbitrary position.
In addition, as described above, if the area of the display window 17 is also formed from a transmissive liquid crystal display, when the reel 31 is stopped, an effect image can be displayed over the symbols on the reel 31.

4 to 10 are diagrams showing types of combinations (combinations corresponding to winning numbers lottered by the combination lottery means 61 described later), symbol combinations, payout numbers, and the like in the present embodiment.
The roles of the present embodiment are roughly classified into special roles, replays (replaying roles), and small roles.
A combination of symbols corresponding to each combination and the number of payouts at the time of winning are determined. When all the reels 31 are stopped, when the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the combinations stops on the active line (the combination wins, the same applies hereinafter), the number of medals corresponding to the combination is paid out.
However, the number of payouts at the time of winning a special role is set to 0. In replay, medals are automatically inserted (replay).
It should be noted that the term “combination” includes a case of referring to one type of combination and a case of indicating a plurality of types of combination (duplicate combination). For example, “Replay K” to be described later consists of one type of combination (Replay 13), but “Small combination A1” includes four types of combinations of small combinations 01 to 04.

4 to 10, “3 sheets” displayed as the number of payouts indicates the number of payouts when the specified number is 3, and “2 sheets” indicates when the specified number is 2 The number of payouts is shown. In addition, “three (1)” indicates when an accessory is not operating, and “three (2)” indicates when an SB is operating (in SB game). Further, “2 sheets (3)” indicates an RBA operation time (1 BBA operation is in progress), and “2 sheets (4)” indicates an RBB operation time (1 BBB to 1 BBD operation is in progress).
For example, a replay 01 with a role number “006” indicates that the specified number 3 (1) and (2) is a replay, and the specified number 2 (3) and 3 (4) “−” , Indicates that the lottery will not be drawn.

In FIG. 4, combination numbers “001” to “005” correspond to special combinations (combinations). In the present embodiment, four types of 1BB (1BBA to 1BBD) and one type of SB are provided as special roles.
The special role is a role to shift from the normal game to the special game.
When any 1BB wins, there is no payout of medals in the current game, but the next game shifts to a 1BB game corresponding to a special game.
During a 1BB game (when an accessory is activated), it is an advantageous game for the player that can expect to win medals more than when the accessory is not activated because the payout rate is set to exceed “1”. .
Similarly, when the SB wins, the medal is not paid out in the current game, but in the next game (1 game), the SB game corresponding to the special game is executed (operation of the accessory).
In this embodiment, when 1BBA is operated, RBA is continuously operated, and when 1BBB to 1BBD is operated, RBB is continuously operated.

In addition, the replay (re-playing combination) is a combination that allows a re-play to be performed while maintaining the number of medals inserted in this game (automatic betting of medals). For example, if the replay is won when the specified number of games is “3” this time and the specified number of games is “2” next time, the number of medals inserted in the current game is not maintained and the next time “2”, which is the prescribed number of games, may be automatically bet.
As shown in FIGS. 4 to 6, the replay of the present embodiment includes replays 01 to 14 (port numbers “006” to “065”).
The replay 09 having the role number “046” is used as a “BAR” replay in this embodiment. Specifically, when “Replay (No. 5)” — “BAR (No. 4)” — “Replay (No. 2)” stops at the effective line “Upper left” — “Middle middle” — “Lower right” The “BAR” alignment stops at the symbol combination line “left middle”-“middle middle”-“right middle” which is not a line.

In the replay, a combination of symbols in which the symbol of the right reel 31 is “lower target” (for example, replay 05 of the role number “012”) is a double symbol (“ “Upper” and “Lower” in the lower right are combinations of symbols that can be stopped in the display window 17.
Furthermore, in the replay, a combination of symbols in which the symbol of the middle reel 31 is “upper” (for example, replay 07 of the role number “026”) is a double symbol (in the middle middle) when the middle reel 31 stops. “Upper” and “Lower” in the middle and lower rows are combinations of symbols that can be stopped in the display window 17.

Furthermore, among the replays, a combination of symbols in which the symbol of the left reel 31 is “replay” (for example, replay 08 of the role number “044”), when the left reel 31 stops, A combination of symbols that can be stopped in the display window 17 by stopping in the upper left row is a double symbol (“upper” in the middle left and “lower” in the lower left).
Furthermore, for example, the replay 11 with the role number “057” is a combination of symbols that can stop two consecutive symbols in the upper left and middle left, the middle upper and middle middle, and the upper right and middle right.

The replay includes a replay in which RT shifts and a replay in which RT does not shift when a combination of symbols corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed on the active line. The former may be referred to as RT transition replay (or simply “transition replay”).
As will be described later in detail, as shown in FIG. 34, the replays 03 and 04, the replays 09 and 12, and the replay 14 have a function as a replay for transferring RT.
For example, when the replay 03 or 04 is stopped and displayed in RT1, the next game shifts to RT3.

As shown in FIGS. 7 to 10, the small combination includes small combinations 01 to 17 (portions “066” to “146”).
When winning the small combination A group (described later), if the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct pressing order, the small combination 01 wins. The small combination 01 is a small combination having the largest number of payouts among the small combinations provided in the present embodiment.
The number of payouts for the small combinations 02 to 09 is set to 3, the small combinations 10 to 16 are set to 7, and the small combination 17 (only during RBB) is set to 10.
The small roles 02 to 09 are small roles that can be awarded when the pressing order is incorrect when the small role A group is won.
The small combinations 10 to 15 have a role as a rare small combination (for example, an advantageous section or an AT lottery is executed at the time of winning).
Furthermore, the small combination 16 is a small combination that can be stopped only during the RBA, and the small combination 17 is a small combination that can be stopped only during the RBB.

Similar to the above-described replay in which the double symbol can be stopped, the small symbol has a small role in which the double symbol can be stopped.
In particular, in the present embodiment, the winning numbers including the small roles 11 to 16 are drawn during the RBA operation. "48") or right first stop (winning numbers "48" to "55", which will be described later), when the stop switch 42 is operated, one or more double symbols can be stopped.
For example, when the lower part 12 of the role number “101”, “Red Tail”-“Red 7”-“Cherry (No. 15)” stops at the active line “Upper left” — “Middle lower” — “Upper right” The two symbols stop in the middle right and bottom right.

In addition, “lower tag”-“lower tag”-“cherry (No. 15)”, which is the small role 14 of the role number “132”, has stopped at the active line “upper left” — “middle lower” — “upper right”. At that time, the double symbols stop at the middle middle and lower middle, and the double symbols also stop at the middle right and lower right.
Furthermore, “upper”, “bell (No. 12)” — “upper”, which is the small part 16 of the part number “142”, stops at the active line “upper left” — “middle lower” — “upper right”. In such a case, the double symbols stop at the upper left and middle middle, the double symbols stop at the middle upper and middle middle, and the double symbols stop at the upper right and right middle.

In each of the above-mentioned combinations, if the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination does not stop on the active line in the game selected for the combination, a combination that is carried over after the next game and a combination that is not carried over are determined. .
The combination carried over is 1BB (1BBA to 1BBD) in this embodiment. When 1BB is won, in the game until 1BB wins, the winning information of 1BB is controlled to be carried over after the next game.

  On the other hand, winning of 1BB is carried over, while SB, small role and replay other than 1BB are not carried over. In the lottery of the condition device, when SB, small role or replay is won, the winning combination is effective only in the current game, and the winning is not carried over after the next game. That is, in the game won for these winning combinations, the reel 31 is controlled to stop so that a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination can be won, but at the end of the game regardless of whether or not the winning combination is won. The right to the elected role will cease.

  When the game is started, the player inserts medals stored in advance by operating the bet switch 40 (storage bet), or cleans and inserts medals from the medal insertion slot 43 (manual bet). When the start switch 41 is operated in a state where a prescribed number of medals corresponding to RT (the gaming state relating to the winning probability of replay) are bet, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. When receiving this signal, the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65 to be described later) performs lottery of the winning numbers by the role lottery means 61 and controls the driving of all the motors 32 so that all the motors 32 are controlled. The reel 31 is controlled to rotate. As the reel 31 is rotated by the motor 32 in this way, the symbols on the reel 31 are moved and displayed in the vertical direction in the display window 17 at a predetermined speed.

  Then, the player presses the stop switch 42 to stop the rotation of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 (for example, the left reel 31 corresponding to the left stop switch 42). When the stop switch 42 is operated, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. When receiving this signal, the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65 described later) controls the drive of the motor 32 corresponding to the stop switch 42 and corresponds to the lottery result of the winning lottery means 61. Thus, the stop control of the reel 31 related to the motor 32 is performed.

  Then, the game result of the current game is displayed by the combination of symbols when all the reels 31 are stopped. Furthermore, when the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations stops on the active line (when the winning combination of the winning combination), a medal corresponding to the winning combination is paid out.

Next, a specific configuration of the main control board 50 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 1, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the following role lottery means 61 and the like. The following means in the present embodiment are exemplifications and are not limited to the means shown in the present embodiment.

  The role lottery means 61 performs lottery (decision, selection) of winning numbers. When the winning number is determined, the winning and replay condition device number and the accessory condition device number are determined based on the winning number, and the winning and replay condition device and the accessory that can be operated in the game. The condition device will be determined. Therefore, the role lottery means 61 is also referred to as a condition device number determination (lottery or selection) means, a winning combination determination (lottery or selection) means, and the like.

  The role lottery means 61 includes, for example, a lottery random number generation means (hardware random number, etc.), a random number extraction means for extracting a random number generated by the random number generation means, and a random value extracted by the random number extraction means. A winning number determining means for determining a winning number;

  The random number generation means generates random numbers in a predetermined area (for example, “0” to “65535” in decimal numbers). The random number is, for example, a random number for which a counter that performs 1 count at 200 n (nano) sec continues to count as a cycle in a range of “0” to “65535”. While the slot machine 10 is powered on, the random number Keep counting.

  The random number extraction means extracts the random number generated by the random number generation means at a predetermined time, in the present embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on) by the player. The judging means collates the random number value extracted by the random number extracting means with a lottery table to be described later, thereby determining a winning number corresponding to the area to which the random value belongs. For example, if the extracted random number value belongs to the area of the winning number “1”, the winning number in the game is determined to be “1”. When the winning number is “1”, the winning and replay condition device number in the game is “1” (replay A1), and the accessory condition device number is “0”.

FIGS. 11 to 17 are diagrams showing the winning numbers drawn by the winning lottery means 61, the condition device numbers corresponding to the winning numbers, the contents of the winning combinations included in the condition device numbers, and the like.
In FIG. 11 to FIG. 17, winning numbers “0” to “86” are serial numbers including all winnings of special roles, small roles, and replays.
“Number 1” is a winning and replay condition device number (condition device number not including a special combination).
Furthermore, “number 2” is an accessory condition apparatus number including a special combination.

As described above, among the winning numbers “0” to “86”, the winning numbers “0” to “57” are winning numbers that do not include special roles, and the winning numbers “58” to “86” This is a winning number including a special role. Thereby, it is determined whether the winning number determined by the winning lottery means 61 is less than “58”, thereby simplifying the determination (generation) processing of the winning and replay condition device number and the accessory condition device number. Can do.
Specifically, when the winning number is less than “58”, the determined winning number can be stored in a predetermined address (“F044 (H)” described later) of the RWM as a winning and replay condition device number. It becomes.
On the other hand, if the winning number is not less than “58”, a control process for generating an accessory condition device number and winning and replay condition device numbers from the determined winning number is executed. For example, a specific table for generating an accessory condition device number and a winning and replay condition device number from the winning number is provided. Then, based on the winning number and the specific table, it is possible to generate an accessory condition device number and a winning and replay condition device number, and the generated accessory condition device number is set to a predetermined address of the RWM (“F045 (H ) ") And the generated winning and replay condition device number can be stored in a predetermined address (" F044 (H) "described later) of the RWM.
In addition, in the situation where any one of “1” to “4” is stored in the address (F045 (H)) for storing the accessory condition device number (the so-called special role (1BB) inside), the winning number When one of “58” to “86” is won, the accessory condition device number generated based on the winning number is not overwritten on the address (F045 (H)) for storing the accessory condition device number. To control.

  The “production group (GRP) number” is set in association with the winning and replay condition device number, and is a number transmitted to the sub-control board 80. The sub control board 80 determines an effect based on the effect group number received from the main control board 50. For example, the production group numbers of the winning numbers “1 (Replay A1)” to “6 (Replay A6)” are all “1”. When the sub control board 80 receives the effect group number “1”, the sub control board 80 can output the effect corresponding to the winning of the replay.

Here, during non-ART (game in which the correct answer pressing order is not notified), the main control board 50 transmits the determined effect group number to the sub control board 80 to the sub control board 80, but step S62 in FIG. The push order instruction number determined in (1) is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80. On the sub-control board 80 side, during non-ART, the effect is determined based on the received effect group number. Therefore, for example, when the production group number “17” is received, an effect indicating that one of the bells (or any small role) has been won (for example, in the color production, the yellow production corresponding to the bell or , A white effect corresponding to one of the combinations) can be output, but an effect related to the correct answer pressing order cannot be output. Further, since the push order instruction number is not transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80, the information transmission path between the sub control board 80 or the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 is illegal Since an electronic device is attached and the correct answer pressing order cannot be obtained in an unauthorized manner, it is possible to prevent goto action.
On the other hand, during ART (game for notifying the correct pressing order), the main control board 50 transmits a pressing order instruction number and an effect group number to the sub control board 80. Thereby, the sub control board 80 can output the effect regarding the correct pressing order separately from the operation of the instruction function by the main control board 50 in addition to the effect of the winning combination.

In FIG. 11 to FIG. 17, RTs to be drawn are indicated by “◯”. For example, in the replay A1 with the winning number “1”, it means that the lottery is drawn at RT1 and RT4.
Further, “setting difference” being “present” means that the winning probability of the winning number may vary depending on the set value. On the other hand, when the “setting difference” is “none”, it indicates that the winning probability of the winning number is the same for all setting values.
As described above, when the lottery of the advantageous section (transition lottery from the normal section to the advantageous section) is performed in association with the winning number, it must be performed when the winning number having no setting difference is determined. . Accordingly, the winning numbers that can execute the lottery of the advantageous section are limited to those having a “setting difference” of “none”.
Further, “advantageous section lottery” indicates whether or not the advantageous section lottery is executed, and “impossible” means that the advantageous section lottery cannot be executed due to a setting difference. “No” means that the winning number does not have a set difference, but the lottery of the advantageous section is not executed. Furthermore, “do” means that the lottery of the advantageous section is executed.

Furthermore, “instruction function lottery” indicates whether or not a lottery concerning AT is executed during an advantageous section.
Also, the “Remarks” column shows the winning combination, RT transition, etc. according to the pressing order.
In FIG. 11 to FIG. 17, the winning numbers for winning the replay are the winning numbers “1” to “31”, and the winning numbers for winning the small role are the winning numbers “32” to “57”. In addition, the winning numbers for winning special roles (single winning special roles or overlapping special roles and small roles or replays) are winning numbers “58” to “86”.
In this embodiment, the special role winning corresponds to winning of 1BB or SB, and corresponds to winning numbers “58” to “86” and numbers 2 “1” to “5”.

  Here, when the number 2 is “1”, it indicates that the winning special role is 1BBA, and when it is “2”, it indicates that the winning special role is 1BBB. Similarly, when the number 2 is “3”, the winning special role is 1BBC, when it is “4”, the winning special role is 1BBD, and when it is “5”. Indicates that the winning special role is SB.

For example, when the winning number is “1”, the winning and replay condition device number is “1” (winning of replay A1), and the accessory condition device number is “0”.
On the other hand, for example, when the winning number is “58”, the winning and replay condition device number is “0”, and the accessory condition device number is “1” (single winning of 1 BBA).

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, there is a case where 1BB and a small combination or replay are won simultaneously, for example, a winning number “62” is a double winning combination of 1BBA and a small role D1, and the winning and replay condition device number is “ 42 ”and the accessory condition device number is“ 1 ”.
When 1BB and a small combination or replay are won, the winning of the small combination or replay is given priority in this game (the priority can be arbitrarily set). In addition, since the winning of the small role or replay is valid only in the current game, the winning is not carried over to the next game, but the winning information of 1BB is carried over to the next game unless winning.
In particular, in the present embodiment, the symbols of the small combination and the replay are arranged so that both the small combination and the replay are “PB = 1”. For this reason, in a game in which a special combination and a small combination or replay are won, the selected small combination or replay wins preferentially, and the selected special combination does not win. In addition, when a special role is elected alone, the special role won in the game can be won by winning the symbol related to the selected special role.

Here, before explaining the condition device for each winning number, the symbol arrangement (FIG. 2) in this embodiment will be explained.
As shown in FIG. 2, in all the reels 31, four “replays” are arranged at intervals of five symbols. As a result, the “replay” of all the reels 31 has the “PB = 1” arrangement.
Similarly, in all the reels 31, four "bells" are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols. As a result, the “bells” of all the reels 31 have the “PB = 1” arrangement.
In the left reel 31, four “watermelons” are arranged at intervals of five symbols. Thereby, the “watermelon” of the left reel 31 is in the “PB = 1” arrangement.

Furthermore, in all the reels 31, “red 7”, “upper”, “white 7”, and “BAR” are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols. Therefore, “PB = 1” in the four symbols combined. That is, regardless of the timing at which the stop switch 42 is operated, any one of “red 7”, “upper”, “white 7”, or “BAR” can be stopped on the active line.
Further, in the left reel 31, “lower tag”, “blank”, and “cherry” are added in a “PB = 1” arrangement.
Further, in the middle reel 31, “lower tag” and “cherry” are added in a “PB = 1” arrangement.
Furthermore, in the middle reel 31, “blank” and “watermelon” are “PB = 1” in total.

Hereinafter, the winning number and its condition device will be described with reference to FIG.
The winning number “0” is a winning number that is a non-winning (so-called “losing”) of the combination.
Replays A1 to A6 with winning numbers “1” to “6” (hereinafter collectively referred to as “replay A group”) are drawn at RT1 and RT4, and at least one of replay 01 or replay 02 and replay 03 , And replay 04 including replay 04. Replay 01 or Replay 02 wins in any one of the correct answer pressing orders, and Replay 03 or Replay 04 wins in the incorrect answer pressing order.
In FIG. 11 to FIG. 17, the pushing order “123” means the pushing order “left middle right”. Similarly, the pressing order “132” indicates the pressing order “left / right / middle”, the pressing order “213” indicates the pressing order “middle / left / right”, the pressing order “231” indicates the pressing order “middle / right / left”, and the pressing order. “312” indicates a pressing order “right middle left”, and “312” indicates a pressing order “right middle left”.

In the case of replay overlap winning, there is no concept of high / low for medal payout because the replay (replaying gamer) wins in any pushing order. However, for example, when the replay A1 is won at RT1, the replay 01 wins in the pressing order 123 and RT1 is maintained. On the other hand, except for the pushing order 123, the replay 03 or the replay 04 wins and shifts from RT1 to RT3 (RT which is more disadvantageous to the player than RT1).
Further, the replay A group is also drawn in RT4 (inside), but when the replay A group is won in RT4, no RT transition occurs even if any replay is stopped.

Replays B1 to B6 with winning numbers “7” to “12” (hereinafter collectively referred to as “replay B group”) are drawn at RT3, and at least one of replay 01 or replay 02 and replay 14 are selected. It is a duplicate win of replay including. In the correct push order, Replay 01 or 02 wins and RT3 is maintained. On the other hand, the replay 14 wins in the incorrect answer pressing order and shifts from RT3 to non-RT.
Replays C1 to C6 with winning numbers “13” to “18” (hereinafter collectively referred to as “replay C group”) are drawn at RT3, and at least one of replay 01 and replay 02, replay 09, or replay 12 is selected. It is a duplicate winning replay including one. In the correct push order, Replay 09 or Replay 12 wins and moves from RT3 to RT1 (promotes to advantageous RT). On the other hand, the replay 01 or 02 wins in the incorrect pressing order, and RT3 is maintained.

  Each of the replays E1 to E3, F1 to F3, and G1 to G2 is a condition device in which one or more double symbols can appear according to the pressing order and operation timing (eye pressing) of the stop switch 42. . Replay D is a condition device in which a double symbol does not appear, but when the effect that targets the double symbol is output, the effect is output including when the replay D is won. Therefore, when an effect that targets a double symbol is output, if the replay D is won in the game, the double symbol does not stop, and the other replays E1 to E3, F1 to F3, and G1 to G2 are won. When it is, it is a conditional device that can stop one or more double symbols.

  At the time of replay D winning, if the pressing order is left or middle first stop, replay 01 or 02 is awarded. On the other hand, when the first right stop is performed, the replay 05 wins when the double symbols are pressed. Here, the replay 05 with the symbol “lower tag” on the right reel 31 is not won, and the replay 05 with “upper tag” is won. If the “upper” is stopped at the lower right when the right reel 31 is stopped, the double symbol does not stop. Specifically, in the replay 05, the role numbers “012”, “014”, and “016” are not stopped, and the role numbers “011”, “013”, and “015” are stopped.

Similarly, when “BAR” is pressed at the right first stop, Replay 06 is won. The combination of symbols of replay 06 (role numbers “017” to “019”) is “bell”-“BAR / blank / watermelon”-“replay”, but when these stop at the active line, the display window 17 does not stop the “BAR” assortment. “BAR / blank / watermelon” means any one of “BAR”, “blank”, and “watermelon” (hereinafter the same).
Furthermore, when the first stop on the right does not push the double symbol or the “BAR” symbol, the replay 01 or 02 wins.

The replay E1 is a conditional device that can stop the double symbols only on the right reel 31.
At the time of replay E1 winning, if the pressing order is left or middle first stop, replay 01 or 02 is won (two symbols are not stopped). On the other hand, if the double symbol is pressed at the right first stop, only the right reel 31 can stop the dual symbol. Further, when the “BAR” symbol is pressed, the “BAR” alignment (on the ineffective line) is obtained.
First, when a double symbol is pressed at the right first stop, Replay 05 is won. The replay 05 to be stopped here is a replay 05 whose symbol on the effective line (lower right) of the right reel 31 is “lower target”. Therefore, the replay 05 with the role number “012”, “014” or “016” is stopped. In this case, since the symbol of the middle reel 31 is “replay”, even if the number 15 of the middle reel 31 is stopped at the active line, the number “14” “upper” stops at the middle and lower stages, and the number 13 The “lower tag” does not stop in the display window 17.

Furthermore, since the symbol of the effective line (upper left) of the left reel 31 is “lower tag / blank / cherry”, even if the “lower tag” of No. 13 is stopped at the upper left, the “upper tag” of No. 14 Does not stop in the display window 17. In the left reel 31, “bottom tag / blank / cherry” is “PB = 1” arranged in total, so that any of these symbols can always be stopped at the effective line.
Therefore, when the replay E1 is won, only the right reel 31 can stop the double symbols.
If the “lower tag” cannot be stopped at the lower right when the right reel 31 is stopped, the “bell” or “cherry” is stopped to stop the replay 01 or the replay 02 on the active line.

Next, when “PLAY” is selected in the order of the right first stop when replay E1 is selected, the replay 09 is stopped at the active line. When “replay” of symbol number 2 is stopped at the lower right when the right reel 31 is stopped, “BAR” of symbol number 3 is stopped in the middle right.
Next, when “BAR” of symbol number 4 is pushed to the middle middle stage when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the “BAR” is stopped. If “BAR” cannot be stopped here, “Replay” is stopped.

Furthermore, when the “replay” of symbol number 5 is pushed on the upper left when the left reel 31 is stopped, the “replay” is stopped. In this case, “BAR” of symbol number 4 stops in the middle left. When “Replay” of symbol number 5 cannot be stopped at the upper left stage, the other “Replay” is stopped at the upper left stage.
Accordingly, when “BAR” is pressed for all the reels 31, “Replay (No. 5)”-“BAR”-“Replay (No. 2)” is stopped on the active line, and the replay 09 of the role number “046” is stopped. Stops. At the same time, the “BAR” alignment stops at “left middle stage”-“middle middle stage”-“right middle stage” which are not valid lines.
On the other hand, even when “BAR” is not aligned with the middle stage line, the replay 09 stops at the active line.

As described above, when the replay E1 is won, the first right stop is performed, and when the double symbol is aimed, the two symbols are stopped when the right reel 31 is stopped. Also, when aiming at “BAR” instead of double symbols, “BAR” alignment stops at the middle line as described above.
In addition, in this embodiment, when winning the winning number where the double symbols can be stopped, when the two symbols stop (both when stopping at the upper and middle stages, or when stopping at the middle and lower stages) Then, the reel 31 is controlled to stop to bounce.
Here, in the normal stop control of the reel 31, a specific excitation is output to the motor 32 in order to stop the reel 31, and when the rotational speed is finally set to "0", the desired symbol is on the effective line. It stops so that it may be located. Specifically, the motor 32 is configured by a so-called stepping motor, and has a phase consisting of one phase, two phases, three phases, and four phases, and excitation output (four-phase excitation output) for all phases. By doing so, the desired symbol is stopped so as to be positioned on the effective line. In other words, the braking force is equal.

On the other hand, the “bound stop” can be realized by outputting predetermined excitation (one-phase excitation output or three-phase excitation output) to the motor 32 in order to stop the reel 31. For example, in the case of a one-phase excitation output, the desired symbol can be rotated in the reverse direction and stopped on the effective line after the desired symbol has passed a little on the effective line. This is because the excitation output is performed only in one phase, in other words, the braking force is concentrated at one point (not equal). The same applies to the case of three-phase excitation output, and can be realized by the fact that the braking force is concentrated at three points (not equal).
In this way, when the reel 31 is stopped, it seems that the symbol vibrates for a moment, which is called “bound stop”.

It should be noted that the braking force is stronger when the reel 31 is controlled to stop by the bound stop (for example, one-phase excitation or three-excitation) than the normal reel 31 stop control (for example, four-phase excitation). Therefore, for example, when the symbol number “14” of the middle reel 31 is stopped at the middle stage in the normal reel 31 stop control, the brake is applied from the step number “0” of the symbol number “14” (four-phase excitation) control. It is possible to stop at the number of steps “8” of the symbol number “14”.
On the other hand, when the symbol number “14” of the middle reel 31 is stopped at the middle stage in the stop control of the reel 31 by bound stop (for example, one-phase excitation or three excitation), the number of steps “4” of the symbol number “14” is stopped. By performing control (4 phase excitation) to apply the brake from the start, it is possible to stop with a bound at the step number “8” of the symbol number “14”. In other words, the brake application timing is controlled so that the bound stop (for example, one-phase excitation or three-excitation) is slower (different) than the normal reel 31 stop control (for example, four-phase excitation). This makes it possible to stop the target symbol.
Although the symbol number “14” of the middle reel 31 is taken as an example, the same applies to the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 as well as the middle reel 31. Furthermore, although “4” and “8” are exemplified as the number of steps for applying the brake, the present invention is not limited to this, and the design can be appropriately changed according to the performance of the stepping motor.

  If the second “replay” cannot be stopped at the active line when the right reel 31 is stopped when the replay E1 is won, “bell” or “cherry” is stopped at the lower right. When the middle reel 31 is stopped, “replay” is stopped at the middle stage, and when the left reel 31 is stopped, “bell” (when the stop pattern of the right reel 31 is “bell”) or “watermelon” (right reel 31). (When the stop symbol is “Cherry”). Thereby, Replay 01 or Replay 02 wins.

The replay E2 is a role in which only the middle reel 31 can stop double symbols.
When the replay E2 is won and the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of the left or middle first stop, the replay 01 or 02 is awarded.
On the other hand, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of the right first stop, only the middle reel 31 can stop the double symbols. At this time, Replay 07 is won.
First, since the double symbol is not stopped when the right reel 31 is stopped, when the double symbol is pressed, the “upper target” is stopped at the lower right stage. When the right stop switch 42 is operated at a position other than that, the “bell” or “cherry” is stopped (to win the replay 01 or 02). Accordingly, when the “upper target” cannot be stopped at the lower right stage at the time of the first right stop, the possibility of winning the replay 07 disappears, so that only the replay 01 or 02 can be won. As a result, even if the double symbols are pushed when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the two symbols are not stopped.

After the “upper target” is stopped at the lower right stage, when the middle upper stage 31 is pressed to stop the “upper target” when the middle reel 31 stops, the “upper target” is stopped. Thereby, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the double symbol is stopped. When “upper target” cannot be stopped, “red 7 / white 7 / BAR” is stopped. In the middle reel 31, “upper / red 7 / white 7 / BAR” has a total arrangement of “PB = 1”.
In addition, when the left reel 31 is stopped, if a double symbol is pressed, the “lower tag” is stopped at the upper left. Otherwise, “blank / cherry” is stopped. In the left reel 31, “lower tag / blank / cherry” has a total arrangement of “PB = 1”. As described above, the replay 07 is stopped on the active line.

  In addition, when “BAR” is pressed for all the reels 31 in the replay E2 winning, the reel stop control is the same as in the above-described replay E1 winning. That is, a replay 09 that allows the “BAR” to be aligned on the middle stage line is awarded. Also, even if “BAR” is not aligned with the middle line, Replay 09 is won.

The replay E3 is a role in which only the left reel 31 can stop double symbols.
When the replay E3 is won and the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of the left or middle first stop, the replay 01 or 02 is awarded.
On the other hand, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of the right first stop, only the left reel 31 can stop the double symbols. At this time, Replay 08 is won.
First, in the right reel 31 at the time of the first stop at the right, when a double symbol is pushed, the “upper tag” is stopped at the lower right stage. That is, the replay 08 of the role number “044” is stopped.
Next, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, “replay” is stopped at the middle middle stage regardless of whether or not the double symbol is pressed (PB = 1).

Next, when the left reel 31 is stopped, if a double symbol is pressed, “Replay” of symbol number 15 is stopped at the upper left. Thereby, when the left reel 31 is stopped, the double symbol is stopped. If the “replay” of symbol number 15 cannot be stopped when the left reel 31 is stopped, the other “replay” is stopped. As a result, the replay 08 stops on the active line.
In addition, when the replay E3 is won and the first right stop is made, if the two symbols are not pressed, the replay 01 or 02 is won by stopping the “bell” or “cherry” in the lower right.

  Further, when “BAR” is pressed for all the reels 31 at the time of first right stop at the time of replay E3 winning, the same reel stop control as that at the time of replay E1 winning is performed. That is, a replay 09 (role number “046”) that enables the “BAR” to be aligned on the middle stage line is awarded. Also, even if “BAR” is not aligned with the middle line, Replay 09 is won.

The replay F1 is a role that can stop two symbols when the middle and right reels 31 are stopped (two symbols can be stopped).
When the replay F1 is won and the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of the left or middle first stop, the replay 01 or 02 is awarded.
On the other hand, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of the right first stop, the left reel 31 does not stop the double symbols, and the middle and right reels 31 can stop the double symbols. In this case, the replay 07 is stopped.

  First, when the right reel 31 is stopped at the time of the first right stop and the double symbol is pressed, the “lower target” is stopped at the lower right. As a result, the double symbols stop when the right reel 31 stops. When “lower tag” cannot be stopped, only “replay 01 or 02” can be won by stopping “bell” or “cherry”. Therefore, after that, even when the middle reel 31 is stopped, even if the double symbols are pressed, the two symbols are not stopped.

If the double symbol is stopped when the right reel 31 is stopped, and the double symbol is pushed when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the “upper” is stopped at the middle middle stage. As a result, the double symbols stop when the middle reel 31 stops. At this time, “in rotation” − “upper target” − “lower target”, and the role numbers “027”, “035”, and “043” can be stopped.
Next, when the left reel 31 is stopped, when the double symbol is pressed, the “bottom tag” is stopped at the upper left (the role number “027”), and the double symbol is not stopped. If the double symbol is not pressed when the left reel 31 is stopped, the “blank / cherry” is stopped (the role number “035” or “043”). As described above, “bottom tag / blank / cherry” in the left reel 31 is “PB = 1” in total, so that any symbol can be stopped.

  As described above, when the double symbol is stopped at the time of the first right stop when the replay F1 is selected, the replay 07 that can stop the dual symbol on the middle and right reels 31 wins. On the other hand, when the double symbol cannot be stopped at the time of the first stop on the right, since the replay 01 or 02 wins, no two symbols are stopped.

  In addition, when “BAR” is pressed for all the reels 31 at the time of the first right stop at the time of replay F1 winning, the same reel stop control as that at the time of replay E1 winning is performed. That is, a replay 09 (role number “046”) that enables the “BAR” to be aligned on the middle stage line is awarded. In addition, even when “BAR” is not aligned with the middle stage line, Replay 09 (port number “047”) is won.

The replay F2 is a role in which two symbols can be stopped when the left and right reels 31 are stopped (two symbols can be stopped).
When the replay F2 is won and the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of the left or middle first stop, the replay 01 or 02 is awarded.
On the other hand, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of the first right stop, the middle reel 31 does not stop the double symbols, and the left and right reels 31 can stop the double symbols. In this case, the replay 08 is stopped.

  At the time of the first right stop at the time of replay F2 winning, if the double symbol is pressed when the right reel 31 is stopped, the “lower target” is stopped at the lower right stage. Thereby, when the right reel 31 is stopped, the double symbols are stopped. Further, when the double symbols are not pressed when the right reel 31 is stopped, only the replay 01 or 02 can be won by stopping the “bell” or “cherry” in the lower right stage. Accordingly, in this case, even if the double symbols are pushed up when the left reel 31 is stopped, the two symbols are not stopped.

Next, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the double symbols are not stopped. For example, when a double symbol is pressed when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the “replay” of symbol number 15 is stopped at the middle and middle stages. On the other hand, when the double symbol is not pressed, any “replay” is stopped.
Next, when the left reel 31 is stopped, the double symbols can be stopped (when the double symbols are stopped when the right reel 31 is stopped). When a double symbol is pressed when the left reel 31 is stopped, “Replay” of symbol number 15 is stopped at the upper left. Thereby, when the left reel 31 is stopped, the double symbol is stopped. On the other hand, if the double symbols are not pressed when the left reel 31 is stopped, any “replay” is stopped. As described above, the replay 08 with the role number “045” wins.

  In addition, when “BAR” is pressed for all the reels 31 at the time of the first right stop at the time of replay F2 winning, the reel stop control is the same as that at the time of replay E1 winning. That is, a replay 09 (role number “046”) that enables the “BAR” to be aligned on the middle stage line is awarded. In addition, even when “BAR” is not aligned with the middle stage line, Replay 09 (port number “047”) is won.

The replay F3 is a role in which the double symbols can be stopped when the left and middle reels 31 are stopped (two double symbols can be stopped).
When the replay F3 is won and the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of the left or middle first stop, the replay 01 or 02 is awarded.
On the other hand, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of the right first stop, the right reel 31 does not stop the double symbols, and the left and middle reels 31 can stop the double symbols. In this case, the replay 10 is stopped.

  At the time of the first right stop at the time of replay F3 winning, if the double symbol is pressed when the right reel 31 is stopped, the “upper” is stopped at the lower right stage. Thereby, when the right reel 31 is stopped, the double symbols are not stopped. Further, when the double symbols are not pressed when the right reel 31 is stopped, only the replay 01 or 02 can be won by stopping the “bell” or “cherry” in the lower right stage. Therefore, in this case, even if the left and middle reels 31 are stopped when the double symbols are pressed, the two symbols are not stopped.

In the case where the “upper tag” stops at the lower right when the right reel 31 is stopped, the double symbols can be stopped when the middle reel 31 is stopped. If a double symbol is pressed when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the “upper target” is stopped at the middle middle stage. On the other hand, when the double symbols are not pressed, “Red 7 / White 7 / BAR” is stopped. In the middle reel 31, “upper / red 7 / white 7 / BAR” has a total arrangement of “PB = 1”.
Next, when a double symbol is pressed when the left reel 31 is stopped, “replay” of symbol number 15 is stopped at the upper left. Thereby, when the left reel 31 is stopped, the double symbol is stopped. On the other hand, if the double symbols are not pressed when the left reel 31 is stopped, any “replay” is stopped.

  From the above, when the second symbol is pushed during the first right stop when winning Replay F3, the two symbols can be stopped for the left and middle reels 31 and the two symbols are stopped for the right reel 31. The replay 10 is stopped without making it. When the double symbol is not pressed at the right first stop (except when the “BAR” is pressed), the replay 01 or 02 is won and the double symbol is not stopped.

  In addition, when “BAR” is pressed for all the reels 31 at the time of the first right stop at the time of replay F3 winning, the reel stop control is the same as that at the time of the above-mentioned replay E1 winning. That is, a replay 09 (role number “046”) that enables the “BAR” to be aligned on the middle stage line is awarded. In addition, even when “BAR” is not aligned with the middle stage line, Replay 09 (port number “047”) is won.

The replay G1 is a role in which two symbols can be stopped when all the reels 31 are stopped (three symbols can be stopped).
When the replay G1 is won and the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of the left or middle first stop, the replay 01 or 02 is awarded.
On the other hand, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of the right first stop, the double symbols can be stopped for all the reels 31. In this case, the replay 10 is stopped.

  At the time of first right stop at the time of replay G1 winning, if the double symbol is pressed when the right reel 31 is stopped, the “lower target” is stopped at the lower right stage. Thereby, when the right reel 31 is stopped, the double symbols are stopped. Further, when the double symbols are not pressed when the right reel 31 is stopped, only the replay 01 or 02 can be won by stopping the “bell” or “cherry” in the lower right stage. Therefore, in this case, even if the left and middle reels 31 are stopped when the double symbols are pressed, the two symbols are not stopped.

When the double symbol stops when the right reel 31 stops, the double symbol can be stopped when the middle reel 31 stops. If a double symbol is pressed when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the “upper target” is stopped at the middle middle stage. On the other hand, when the double symbols are not pressed, “Red 7 / White 7 / BAR” is stopped. In the middle reel 31, “upper / red 7 / white 7 / BAR” has a total arrangement of “PB = 1”.
Next, when a double symbol is pressed when the left reel 31 is stopped, “replay” of symbol number 15 is stopped at the upper left. Thereby, when the left reel 31 is stopped, the double symbol is stopped. On the other hand, if the double symbols are not pressed when the left reel 31 is stopped, any “replay” is stopped.

  As described above, when a double symbol is pushed at the time of the first right stop when the replay G1 is won, the dual symbol can be stopped for all the reels 31, and the replay 01 wins in particular. When the two-symbol pattern is aligned, the replay 10 with the role number “055” wins. When the double symbol is not pressed at the right first stop (except when “BAR” is pressed), the replay 01 or 02 is won and the double symbol is not stopped.

  In addition, when “BAR” is pressed for all the reels 31 at the time of the first right stop at the time of replay G1 winning, the reel stop control is the same as that at the time of replay E1 winning. That is, a replay 09 (role number “046”) that enables the “BAR” to be aligned on the middle stage line is awarded. In addition, even when “BAR” is not aligned with the middle stage line, Replay 09 (port number “047”) is won.

The replay G2 is a role in which two symbols can be stopped when all the reels 31 are stopped (two symbols can be stopped three times).
When the replay G2 is won and the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of the left or middle first stop, the replay 01 or 02 is awarded.
On the other hand, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of the right first stop, the double symbols can be stopped for all the reels 31. In this case, the replay 10 or 11 is stopped.

Here, when the replay G1 is won, the two symbols stop for all the reels 31 in the middle and lower stages (the “upper target” stop in the middle stage and the “lower target” stop in the lower stage). On the other hand, when Replay G2 is selected, all the reels 31 can be stopped at the upper and middle stages (upper “upper” at the upper stage and “lower lower” at the middle stage), and can be stopped at the upper and middle stages. When it is not possible to stop the game, it is possible to stop the double symbols in the middle stage and the lower stage as in the case of winning the replay G1.
When the two consecutive symbols are stopped at the upper right stage and the right middle stage at the time of the first stop at the right, it means that the three consecutive symbols are confirmed (first confirmation). On the other hand, when the double symbol stops in the middle right and lower right during the first right stop, there may be three double symbols as in the replay G1 win, or as in the replay F1 win In some cases, two double symbols are arranged, or one double symbol is arranged as in the replay E1 winning.

  At the time of the first right stop at the time of replay G2 winning, if a double symbol is pressed when the right reel 31 is stopped, the “replay” of No. 12 is stopped at the lower right. As a result, when the right reel 31 is stopped, the double symbols stop at the upper right stage and the right middle stage. Further, when the double symbols are not pressed when the right reel 31 is stopped, only the replay 01 or 02 can be won by stopping the “bell” or “cherry” in the lower right stage. Therefore, in this case, even if the left and middle reels 31 are stopped when the double symbols are pressed, the two symbols are not stopped.

When the double symbol stops as described above when the right reel 31 stops, the double symbol can be stopped when the middle reel 31 stops. If a double symbol is pressed when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the “lower tag” is stopped at the middle middle stage. As a result, the double symbols stop in the middle upper stage and the middle middle stage. On the other hand, when the double symbols are not pressed, “cherry” is stopped. In the middle reel 31, the “lower tag / cherry” has a total arrangement of “PB = 1”.
Next, when a double symbol is pushed when the left reel 31 is stopped, the “upper tag” is stopped at the upper left stage. Thereby, when the left reel 31 is stopped, the double symbols are stopped at the upper left stage and the left middle stage. On the other hand, if the double symbols are not pressed when the left reel 31 is stopped, the “replay” is stopped.
As described above, when a double symbol is pushed at the time of the first right stop at the time of replay G2 winning, the two symbols can be stopped for all the reels 31 and the replay 11 with the role number “057” is awarded.

In addition, at the time of the first right stop at the time of replay G2 winning, the timing of pushing the double symbols is slightly late, and “lower tag” cannot be stopped at the middle right, but when it can be stopped at the lower right, Stop “Lower Tail” in the lower right. As a result, the double symbols stop at the middle right and bottom right.
In this case, the left and middle reels 31 can also be stopped at the middle and lower stages. After the right reel 31 stops as described above, when the left reel 31 stops, if the “replay” of No. 15 can be stopped at the upper left stage, the left reel 31 is stopped at that position. Further, when the “Replay” of No. 15 cannot be stopped, the other “Replay” is stopped. Thereby, the replay 10 with the role number “055” wins in the same manner as when the replay G1 is won.

  Furthermore, after the right reel 31 is stopped as described above, when the middle reel 31 stops, when the “upper tag” of No. 14 can be stopped in the middle middle stage, the middle reel 31 is stopped at that position. . Further, when the “upper target” of No. 14 cannot be stopped, “Red 7 / White 7 / BAR” is stopped. As a result, the stop type on the active line becomes “Replay” − “Upper / Red 7 / White 7 / BAR” − “Lower” and the Replay 10 wins.

In addition, when the replay G2 is won, the replay 01 or 02 is won when the second symbol is not pressed (except when the “BAR” is pressed).
When “BAR” is pressed for all the reels 31 in the first right stop at the time of replay G2 winning, the reel stop control is the same as that at the time of replay E1 winning. That is, a replay 09 (role number “046”) that enables the “BAR” to be aligned on the middle stage line is awarded. Also, even if “BAR” is not aligned with the middle line, Replay 09 is won.

Replay H is a winning combination of replays 01 and 02, and is positioned as a normal (normal) replay (normal replay A). When “bell”-“replay”-“bell”, which is replay 01, stops at the active line, “replay” is aligned with the middle line.
In addition, when “Watermelon”-“Replay”-“Cherry”, which is Replay 02, is stopped on the active line, “Replay” is displayed on the “Lower left”, “Middle and middle”, and “Upper right” lines that are not active. It will be aligned.

Replay I is a winning combination of replays 01, 02, and 05, and, like replay H, is positioned in normal replay (normal replay B). The replay 05 is used for control for increasing the replay overlap win, and does not stop when the replay I wins.
The replay J has a function as a “BAR” replay. At the left or middle first stop, the replay 12 is awarded.
On the other hand, at the time of the first stop on the right, Replay 09 is won. In particular, as in the above-described winning of replay E1, if “BAR” is pressed for all reels 31, “BAR” is aligned on the middle line. In addition, when the “BAR” is not aligned, the replay 09 wins, but in that case, the winning of the role number “047” (downward replay) is given priority.

  Replay K is a single winner of Replay 13. When “Rewater K” is selected, if “watermelon” is pushed upward, the “watermelon” is aligned with the upper line, and the replay 13 stops at the active line. For this reason, Replay K is also called watermelon play.

The small roles A1 to A6 (small role A group) are so-called six-selection push bell roles. When the correct answer is the pushing order, the small role 01 with the maximum payout number “10” wins, and when the wrong answer is pressed, the three winning combination wins.
It is also possible to set the winning combination to be missed (non-winning of the combination) at a certain rate when the pressing sequence is incorrect when the pressing sequence is won. On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the pressing order is incorrect, it is set so that “PB = 1” wins three small combinations.
Here, “small role A1” will be described as an example.
The correct answer pressing order at the time of winning the small role A1 is “123 (left middle right)”. Therefore, at the time of the first stop on the left, the small role 01 is won. The combination of symbols of the small role 01 is “bell”-“bell”-“bell”, and “bell” is arranged in “PB = 1” in all the reels 31, so that the small role 01 can always be won. it can.
Also, at the time of the first left stop, it is undecided whether the correct answer will be the push order or the incorrect answer, but when the left reel 31 stops, the “bell” is always stopped at the upper left.

On the other hand, in the middle or right first stop, since the incorrect answer in the pressing order is determined at this time, control is performed so that a small combination other than the small combination 01 is awarded. In the present embodiment, when winning the small role A group, the small role 01 is awarded when the correct answer is pressed, and the small roles 02 to 04 are awarded when the incorrect push order is resolved.
As shown in FIG. 14, at the time of the middle first stop ("2--" means that the middle first stop and the second and third stops may be either left or right), the small role. Win 03. Therefore, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the “bell” is stopped at the middle middle stage. Thereafter, when the left reel 31 is stopped, any one of “lower tag / upper tag / blank / cherry” is stopped at the upper left stage (“PB = 1” in the sum of “lower tag / blank / cherry”). Further, when the right reel 31 is stopped, “watermelon / upper target” is stopped (totally “PB = 1”). Thereby, the small role 03 wins a prize.

Next, at the time of the first stop on the right when winning the small role A1, the small role 04 is awarded. Therefore, at the time of the first right stop, the “bell” is stopped at the lower right stage. For the left reel 31, any one of “lower target / upper target / blank / cherry” is stopped at the upper left. Furthermore, “lower tag / cherry” is stopped for the middle reel 31 (“PB = 1” in total).
In addition, after the first stop on the left, when the second stop on the right (that is, when the pressing order is incorrect), the small role 02 is awarded. Accordingly, when the right reel 31 is stopped, the “upper tag / watermelon” is stopped at the lower right stage (the total is “PB = 1”). Further, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the “blank / watermelon” is stopped at the middle middle stage (“PB = 1” in total).

Further, when the small combination A2 is won, the correct push order (132) and the push order 123 are opposite to the small combination A1 winning. That is, in the case of the first stop correct answer and the second stop incorrect answer, the small role 02 is awarded. The middle first stop and the right first stop are the same as the small combination A1.
Furthermore, at the time of winning the small combination A3, when the correct answer (213) is given at the time of winning, the small role 01 is awarded. On the other hand, after the middle first stop, when the second right stop (when the push order is incorrect), the small role 03 is awarded. The small role 03 is because the symbol of the middle reel 31 is “bell”.
Further, at the time of the first stop on the left, the small role 02 is won, and at the time of the first right stop, the small role 04 is won.
When winning the small role A4, the push order 231 becomes the correct push order and the small role 01 is won, and the push order 213 becomes the incorrect push order and the small role 03 is won. At the time of the first stop on the left and the first stop on the right, it is the same as when the small role A3 is won.

In addition, when winning the small role A5, the small role 01 is awarded when the correct answer is in the push order (312), and after the first stop on the right, the small role 04 is awarded at the middle second stop (when the push order is incorrect). . Furthermore, the small role 02 is awarded at the first stop on the left, and the small role 03 is awarded at the middle first stop.
Further, when winning the small combination A6, the small combination 01 is won at the correct answer in the pushing order (321), and the small role 04 is won at the second stop at the left (when the wrong answer is pushed) after the first stop on the right. Furthermore, at the time of the left first stop and the middle first stop, it is the same as when the small role A5 is won.

Each of the small roles B1 and B2 is a winning combination of the small roles including the small role 01, and the winning combination is not different according to the pressing order as in the small role A group. 10). Therefore, the small roles B1 and B2 are also referred to as common ten-sheet bells A and B, respectively. For the small combination B1, the winning probability due to the setting difference does not vary, and for the small combination B2, the winning probability varies due to the setting difference.
The small role B1 and the small role B2 are roles for winning the small role 01 regardless of the pressing order (regardless of the pressing order). Therefore, when these winning roles are won, the image display device 23 is dummy. It is also possible to notify the pressing order (for example, an irregular pressing such as “213”).

  In addition, both the small role C1 and the small role C2 are duplicate winnings of the small role including the small role 02. Like the small role B1 and the small role B2, the winning combinations differ depending on the pressing order. There is always a small role 02 (3). Therefore, the small roles C1 and C2 are also referred to as common three-bells A and B, respectively. As shown in FIG. 7, there are four types of combinations of the small roles 02: “067” to “070”. Since the sum of these is “PB = 1”, the small combinations 02 are always included. Can be awarded.

The small role D1 and the small role D2 are small roles including the small role 10, and when “watermelon” is pressed for all the reels 31, “watermelon”-“watermelon”-“watermelon” stops on the active line, A winning combination of 10 will be awarded and 7 will be paid out. On the other hand, when the small combination 10 cannot be won, the small combination 08 or 09 is won and three pieces are paid out.
In the left reel 31, four "watermelons" are arranged at intervals of five symbols, so the "watermelon" can always be stopped at the upper left.
For the middle reel 31, when the “watermelon” can be stopped at the middle middle stage, the “watermelon” is stopped. On the other hand, when “watermelon” cannot be stopped, “blank” is stopped. The middle reel 31 has a “PB = 1” arrangement by adding “watermelon / blank”.

Furthermore, for the right reel 31, when the "watermelon" can be stopped at the lower right stage, the "watermelon" is stopped. On the other hand, when the “watermelon” cannot be stopped, the “upper” is stopped. In the right reel 31, “PB = 1” is arranged by adding “watermelon / upper target”. Thereby, "watermelon"-"watermelon / blank"-"watermelon / upper target" can be stopped on the effective line. Then, 7 coins are paid out when winning the small role 10 and 3 coins are paid out when winning the small role 08 or 09.
Since two types of watermelons are provided, the small role 05 is included in the watermelon B with the winning number “43” in the winning combination, but the small role 05 is not awarded.

Chance eyes A, chance eyes B, and chance eyes C of the winning numbers “44”, “45”, and “46” are roles for displaying the small role 05, the small role 06, and the small role 07, respectively. When these winning numbers are won, a lottery regarding the advantageous section and the instruction function (ART) is performed, so it is expressed as a “chance”, but in actuality, three small combinations win.
The small role 05 has a combination of two kinds of symbols (FIG. 7), but the total is “PB = 1”. The same applies to the small role 06. The combination of symbols of the small role 07 is “PB = 1” arrangement.

The small roles H, I1 to I3 (I group), J1 to J3 (J group), and K1 to K2 (K group) are the roles for pushing the double symbols when winning, respectively. , E group to G group.
In the above-described replays D and E to G, a lottery is performed when an accessory is not in operation. On the other hand, the small roles H, I group to K group are lotteries that are drawn only when the RBA is operating (1 BBA is operating).
Also, in the 1BBA game, during the mission bonus, if the conditions for notification are met when the winning number corresponding to the above-mentioned combination is won, the effect is to output the effect that the second symbol should be aimed at the right first stop. Have. In the 1BBA game, during Chronicle Bonus (hereinafter referred to as “C Bonus”), when winning the small role H and small role I1, when outputting the effect that the two consecutive symbols should be aimed at medium first stop Have
During the first stop during the winning of the small role H, the double symbols will not stop. On the other hand, three double symbols can be stopped during the middle first stop when winning the small role I1.

First, the small combination H is a combination that does not stop the double symbols. At the time of the left or middle first stop, the small part 11 (bell alignment) is stopped. As shown in FIG. 8, the combination of symbols of the small role 11 is “bell” − “blank / watermelon” − “red 7 / white 7 / BAR / bottom”, so the left reel 31 has “PB = 1”. ”, The middle and right reels 31 have a symbol“ PB = 1 ”in total, so that the small part 11 can always be stopped.
Further, “bell alignment” means that “bells” are aligned on the right-down line. For example, when "bell (upper left)"-"blank / watermelon (middle lower)"-"red 7 / white 7 / BAR / lower tag (upper right)" stops at the active line (V line), "Bell" alignment stops at "Stage"-"Medium middle"-"Lower right" (Right-down line.

Further, at the time of the first stop on the right, the small combination 12 is won when the double symbol is pressed, and the small combination 11 is won otherwise. As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the combination of symbols of the small role 12 is “lower tag / blank / cherry” − “red 7 / white 7 / BAR / upper tag” − “bell / cherry”. All reels 31 have “PB = 1” in the sum of the symbols, and the winning combination 12 can always be won. In particular, when the vicinity of the double symbol is pressed at the right first stop, the “bell” of No. 16 is stopped at the upper right and the “upper” is stopped at the lower right.
On the other hand, if the 16th “bell” cannot be stopped on the upper right when the first stop on the right, “Red 7 / White 7 / BAR / Lower Target” is stopped on the upper right and the small part 11 is awarded. Like that.

The small role I1 is a role that can stop the double symbols only on the right reel 31 at the time of the first stop at the right, and can stop three double symbols (a set of two symbols) at the middle first stop.
At the time of winning the small role I1, at the time of the first stop on the left, the small role 11 (bell alignment) is awarded.
In addition, when the second symbol is pressed at the right first stop, the “cherry” of No. 15 is stopped at the upper right. As a result, the double symbols stop at the middle right and the lower right. Further, when the 15th “cherry” cannot be stopped on the upper right side, “red 7 / white 7 / BAR / lower target” is stopped on the upper right side to stop the small part 11.

Next, after stopping the 15th “cherry” in the upper right stage in the first right stop, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, “red 7 / white 7 / BAR / upper” is stopped in the middle lower stage. In particular, when a double symbol is pressed, the double symbol is not stopped by stopping the “upper” in the middle and lower tiers.
When the left reel 31 is stopped, “lower tag / blank / cherry” is stopped. In particular, when a double symbol is pressed, the double symbol is not stopped by stopping the “lower tag” in the upper left.
From the above, at the time of the first right stop at the time of winning the small role I1, the small role 12 wins and only the right reel 31 can stop the double symbols.

Furthermore, when the first combination is stopped during the small role I1 winning, the double symbol alignment can be stopped. For this reason, the small part 15 or 16 is stopped.
At the time of the first middle stop, when the double symbol is pressed, the 12th “bell” is stopped in the middle lower row (the double symbol stop in the middle upper row and the middle middle row). In addition, the number 12 “bell” cannot be stopped in the middle and lower stages, but when the number 13 “lower target” can be stopped, the “lower target” is stopped (2 in the middle and middle stages). (Sequence stop). Furthermore, when neither the 12th “bell” or the 13th “lower tag” can be stopped, the “blank / watermelon” is stopped at the middle lower stage. After the “blank / watermelon” is stopped at the middle and lower tiers, the “bell” is stopped at the upper left when the left reel 31 is stopped, and “red 7 / white 7 / BAR / lower target” is displayed at the upper right when the right reel 31 is stopped. Is stopped. Thereby, the small role 11 wins.

On the other hand, in the case of stopping the 12th “bell” in the middle lower stage at the middle first stop, if the double symbol is pushed when the left reel 31 is stopped, the 14th “upper tag” is placed in the upper left stage. (2 symbols stop in the upper left and middle left). If the 14th “upper” cannot be stopped at the upper left, “Replay” is stopped at the upper left. In addition, when the 12th “bell” is stopped at the middle lower stage during the middle first stop, if the double symbol is pushed when the right reel 31 is stopped, the 14th “upper tag” is placed at the upper right stage. To stop (double symbol stops in the upper right and middle right). If the 14th “upper” cannot be stopped in the upper right, “watermelon” is stopped in the upper right.
From the above, when the 12th “bell” is stopped at the middle lower stage during the middle first stop, it becomes “upper / replay” − “bell (12th)” − “upper / watermelon”, and the upper and middle stages. In this case, a small role 16 that allows two consecutive symbols is awarded.

On the other hand, if the “lower tag” of No. 13 is stopped at the middle lower stage during the first middle stop, and if the two symbols are pressed when the left reel 31 is stopped, the “replay” of No. 15 is displayed at the upper left stage. Stop, otherwise stop “Replay” in the upper left. Further, when a double symbol is pushed when the right reel 31 is stopped, the “cherry” of No. 15 is stopped in the upper right, and other “cherries” are stopped in the upper right.
From the above, when stopping “No. 13” in the middle lower stage during the middle first stop, it becomes “Replay”-“Lower target”-“Cherry”, and it is possible to align two consecutive symbols in the middle stage and the lower stage. The small role 15 (the role number “139”) wins.

The small role I2 is a role that allows the double symbols to be stopped only on the middle reel 31 at the right first stop, and does not stop the double symbols at the left or middle first stop.
At the time of winning the small role I2, when the left or middle first stop, the small role 11 (bell alignment) is awarded in the same way as the first left stop at the time of winning the small role I1.
Also, when the second symbol is pressed at the right first stop, the 16th “bell” is stopped at the upper right to stop the small role 04. As a result, the “upper target” stops at the lower right stage, so that the double symbols do not stop when the right reel 31 stops. If the 16th “bell” cannot be stopped at the upper right when the right reel 31 is stopped, “Red 7 / White 7 / BAR / Lower” is stopped at the upper right to stop the small part 11 Let Then, after “Red 7 / White 7 / BAR / Lower Target” is stopped at the upper right, “Bell” is stopped at the upper left when the left reel 31 is stopped, and “Blank / Watermelon” is stopped when the middle reel 31 is stopped. Is stopped. Thereby, the small role 11 wins.

When the “bell” of No. 16 is stopped at the upper right when the right reel 31 is stopped, the “lower tag” is stopped at the lower middle when the double symbol is pressed when the middle reel 31 is stopped. Thereby, a double symbol stops in the middle middle stage and the middle lower stage. When the “lower tag” cannot be stopped at the middle lower stage, the “cherry” is stopped (the middle reel 31 is “lower tag / cherry” and “PB = 1” is arranged).
In addition, when the “bell” of No. 16 is stopped at the upper right when the right reel 31 is stopped, when the double symbol is pressed when the left reel 31 is stopped, “lower tag / blank / cherry” is selected. Stop at the upper left.
Therefore, when the 16th “bell” is stopped at the upper right when the right reel 31 is stopped, “lower tag / blank / cherry” − “lower tag / cherry” − “bell (# 16)” becomes small. The role 04 wins.

The small combination I3 is a combination that can stop the double symbols only on the left reel 31 at the time of the first right stop and does not stop the double symbols at the left or middle first stop.
At the time of winning the small role I3, when the left or middle first stop, the small role 11 (bell alignment) is awarded in the same way as the first left stop at the time of winning the small role I1.
Further, when the second symbol is pressed at the time of the first stop on the right, the 16th “bell” is stopped at the upper right to stop the small role 13. As a result, the “upper target” stops at the lower right stage, so that the double symbols do not stop when the right reel 31 stops. If the 16th “bell” cannot be stopped at the upper right when the right reel 31 is stopped, “Red 7 / White 7 / BAR / Lower” is stopped at the upper right to stop the small part 11 Let Then, after “Red 7 / White 7 / BAR / Lower Target” is stopped at the upper right, “Bell” is stopped at the upper left when the left reel 31 is stopped, and “Blank / Watermelon” is stopped when the middle reel 31 is stopped. Is stopped. Thereby, the small role 11 wins.

Next, when the 16th “bell” is stopped at the upper right when the right reel 31 is stopped, if the double symbol is pressed when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the “upper” is displayed at the lower middle. Stop. Thereby, even when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the double symbols are not stopped. When “upper” cannot be stopped in the middle and lower stages, “red 7 / white 7 / BAR” is stopped.
In addition, when the 16th “bell” is stopped at the upper right when the right reel 31 is stopped, when the second symbol is pressed when the left reel 31 is stopped, the 15th “replay” is displayed at the upper left. Stop. As a result, the double symbols stop in the middle left and bottom left. Further, when the “replay” of No. 15 cannot be stopped at the upper left, other “replays” are stopped.
Therefore, when the 16th “bell” is stopped at the upper right when the right reel 31 is stopped, “replay” − “upper / red 7 / white 7 / BAR” − “bell (16th)” Small role 13 wins.

The small role J1 is a role that makes it possible to stop the two symbols on the right and middle reels 31 at the right first stop, and not to stop the two symbols at the left or middle first stop.
At the time of winning the small role J1, when the left or middle first stop, as in the first left stop at the time of winning the small role I1, the small role 11 (bell alignment) is awarded.
Further, when the second symbol is pressed at the right first stop, the 15th “cherry” is stopped at the upper right to stop the small role 14. As a result, the double symbols stop at the middle right and the lower right. If the 15th “Cherry” cannot be stopped in the upper right when the right reel 31 is stopped, “Red 7 / White 7 / BAR / Lower” is stopped in the upper right to stop the small part 11 Let Then, after “Red 7 / White 7 / BAR / Lower Target” is stopped at the upper right, “Bell” is stopped at the upper left when the left reel 31 is stopped, and “Blank / Watermelon” is stopped when the middle reel 31 is stopped. Is stopped. Thereby, the small role 11 wins.

Next, when the “cherry” of No. 15 is stopped at the upper right when the right reel 31 is stopped, when the double symbol is pressed when the middle reel 31 is stopped, “lower target” is displayed at the lower middle. Stop. Thereby, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the double symbols are stopped in the middle middle stage and the middle lower stage. If you cannot stop “Lower Ligage” in the middle and lower tiers, stop “Cherry”.
In addition, when the 15th “cherry” is stopped at the upper right when the right reel 31 is stopped, when the second symbol is pressed when the left reel 31 is stopped, the 14th “lower target” is displayed at the upper left. Is stopped. Thereby, when the left reel 31 is stopped, the double symbols are not stopped. In addition, when the “lower tag” of No. 14 in the upper left stage cannot be stopped, “blank / cherry” is stopped.
Therefore, when the 15th “cherry” is stopped in the upper right when the right reel 31 is stopped, “lower tag / blank / cherry” − “lower tag / cherry” − “cherry (15th)” becomes small. Role 14 wins.

The small role J2 is a role that makes it possible to stop two symbols on the left and right reels 31 at the time of the first right stop, and does not stop the two symbols at the left or middle first stop.
At the time of winning the small role J2, when the left or middle first stop, the small role 11 (bell alignment) is awarded in the same way as the first left stop at the time of winning the small role I1.
In addition, when the second symbol is pressed at the time of the first stop on the right, the 15th “cherry” is stopped at the upper right to stop the small role 13. As a result, the double symbols stop at the middle right and the lower right. If the 15th “Cherry” cannot be stopped in the upper right when the right reel 31 is stopped, “Red 7 / White 7 / BAR / Lower” is stopped in the upper right to stop the small part 11 Let Then, after “Red 7 / White 7 / BAR / Lower Target” is stopped at the upper right, “Bell” is stopped at the upper left when the left reel 31 is stopped, and “Blank / Watermelon” is stopped when the middle reel 31 is stopped. Is stopped. Thereby, the small role 11 wins.

Next, when the “cherry” of No. 15 is stopped at the upper right when the right reel 31 is stopped, if the double symbol is pressed when the middle reel 31 is stopped, “upper” is displayed at the lower middle. Stop. Thereby, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the double symbols are not stopped. When “upper” cannot be stopped in the middle and lower stages, “red 7 / white 7 / BAR” is stopped.
In addition, when the 15th “cherry” is stopped at the upper right when the right reel 31 is stopped, and the second symbol is pressed when the left reel 31 is stopped, the 15th “replay” is displayed at the upper left. Stop. Thereby, when the left reel 31 is stopped, the double symbols are stopped at the left middle stage and the lower left stage. Further, when the “replay” of No. 15 cannot be stopped at the upper left, other “replays” are stopped.
Therefore, when the 15th “cherry” is stopped at the upper right when the right reel 31 is stopped, “Replay” − “Upper / Red 7 / White 7 / BAR” − “Cherry (No. 15)” Small role 13 wins.

The small role J3 is a role that makes it possible to stop two symbols on the left and middle reels 31 at the right first stop, and not to stop the two symbols at the left or middle first stop.
At the time of winning the small role J3, when the left or middle first stop, the small role 11 (bell alignment) is awarded in the same manner as the first left stop at the time of winning the small role I1.
In addition, when the second symbol is pressed at the time of the first stop on the right, the 16th “bell” is stopped at the upper right to stop the small role 15. As a result, the “upper target” stops at the lower right stage, so that the double symbols do not stop when the right reel 31 stops. If the 16th “bell” cannot be stopped at the upper right when the right reel 31 is stopped, “Red 7 / White 7 / BAR / Lower” is stopped at the upper right to stop the small part 11 Let Then, after “Red 7 / White 7 / BAR / Lower Target” is stopped at the upper right, “Bell” is stopped at the upper left when the left reel 31 is stopped, and “Blank / Watermelon” is stopped when the middle reel 31 is stopped. Is stopped. Thereby, the small role 11 wins.

Next, when the 16th “bell” is stopped at the upper right when the right reel 31 is stopped, if the double symbol is pressed when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the “lower tag” is displayed at the lower middle. Stop. Thereby, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the double symbols are stopped in the middle middle stage and the middle lower stage. If you cannot stop “Lower Ligage” in the middle and lower tiers, stop “Cherry”.
In addition, when the 16th “bell” is stopped at the upper right when the right reel 31 is stopped, when the second symbol is pressed when the left reel 31 is stopped, the 15th “replay” is displayed at the upper left. Stop. Thereby, when the left reel 31 is stopped, the double symbols are stopped at the left middle stage and the lower left stage. Further, when the “replay” of No. 15 cannot be stopped at the upper left, other “replays” are stopped.
Therefore, when the 16th “bell” is stopped at the upper right when the right reel 31 is stopped, “replay” − “lower tag / cherry” − “bell (16th)” is obtained, and the small role 15 wins. .

The small role K1 is a role in which the double symbols can be stopped on all the reels 31 when the right first stop is performed (double symbol alignment can be stopped), and the two symbols are not stopped when the left or middle first stop is performed.
At the time of winning the small role K1, when the left or middle first stop, the small role 11 (bell alignment) is awarded in the same manner as the first left stop at the time of winning the small role I1.
In addition, when the second symbol is pressed at the time of the first stop on the right, the 15th “cherry” is stopped at the upper right to stop the small role 15. As a result, the double symbols stop at the middle right and bottom right. If the 15th “Cherry” cannot be stopped in the upper right when the right reel 31 is stopped, “Red 7 / White 7 / BAR / Lower” is stopped in the upper right to stop the small part 11 Let Then, after “Red 7 / White 7 / BAR / Lower Target” is stopped at the upper right, “Bell” is stopped at the upper left when the left reel 31 is stopped, and “Blank / Watermelon” is stopped when the middle reel 31 is stopped. Is stopped. Thereby, the small role 11 wins.

Next, when the “cherry” of No. 15 is stopped at the upper right when the right reel 31 is stopped, when the double symbol is pressed when the middle reel 31 is stopped, “lower target” is displayed at the lower middle. Stop. Thereby, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the double symbols are stopped in the middle middle stage and the middle lower stage. If you cannot stop “Lower Ligage” in the middle and lower tiers, stop “Cherry”.
In addition, when the 15th “cherry” is stopped at the upper right when the right reel 31 is stopped, and the second symbol is pressed when the left reel 31 is stopped, the 15th “replay” is displayed at the upper left. Stop. Thereby, when the left reel 31 is stopped, the double symbols are stopped at the left middle stage and the lower left stage. Further, when the “replay” of No. 15 cannot be stopped at the upper left, other “replays” are stopped.
Therefore, if the “Cherry” of No. 15 is stopped at the upper right when the right reel 31 is stopped, “Replay”-“Lower Target / Cherry”-“Cherry (No. 15)” is set, and the two-line pattern alignment is stopped. Possible small role 15 wins.

The small role K2 is a role in which the double symbols can be stopped on all the reels 31 when the right first stop is performed (the double symbol alignment can be stopped), and the double symbols are not stopped at the left or middle first stop.
In particular, when the small role K1 is won, the double symbols can be stopped at the middle and lower tiers of each reel 31, but when the small role K2 is won, the double symbols can be stopped at the upper and middle tiers of each reel 31. . In the present embodiment, when the two symbols are stopped in the upper stage and the middle stage, the double symbol pattern is determined to be finalized.
At the time of winning the small role K2, at the first stop of the left or middle, the small role 11 (bell alignment) is awarded in the same manner as the first left stop at the time of winning the small role I1.

  Further, when the second symbol is pressed at the time of the first stop on the right, in order to stop the small part 16, the “upper tag” of No. 14 is stopped at the upper right. As a result, the double symbols stop at the upper right and the middle right. In the case where the upper “upper” cannot be stopped at the upper right when the right reel 31 is stopped, the “cherry” can be stopped when the “cherry” of the upper 15 can be stopped ( In this case, the small role 15 is stopped), and when the “Cherry” of the number 15 cannot be stopped, the small role 11 is stopped, so “Red 7 / White 7 / Lower Tag / BAR” Is stopped. Then, after “Red 7 / White 7 / Lower Tail / BAR” is stopped at the upper right, “Bell” is stopped at the upper left when the left reel 31 is stopped, and “Bell” is stopped at the middle lower when the middle reel 31 is stopped. Stop "Watermelon / Blank". Thereby, the small role 11 wins.

Next, when the upper reel in the upper right stage is stopped when the right reel 31 is stopped, when the double symbol is pushed when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the "12" Stop "Bell". Thereby, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the double symbols are stopped at the middle upper stage and the middle middle stage. When the 12th “bell” cannot be stopped in the middle lower stage, the other “bells” are stopped.
In addition, when the upper reel is stopped at the upper right when the right reel 31 is stopped, and the second symbol is pressed when the left reel 31 is stopped, the upper upper is displayed at the upper left. Stop. Thereby, when the left reel 31 is stopped, the double symbols are stopped at the upper left stage and the left middle stage. If “upper” cannot be stopped at the upper left, “replay” is stopped.
Therefore, when the 14th “upper target” is stopped in the upper right when the right reel 31 is stopped, the small role 16 wins, and “upper target” − “bell (12th)” − “upper target”. ”, It will be a double line of symbols.

On the other hand, when the “Cherry” of No. 15 is stopped at the upper right when the right reel 31 is stopped, when the double symbol is pressed when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the “lower target” is stopped at the lower middle. Let If you cannot stop “Lower Ligage” in the middle lower row, stop “Cherry” in the middle lower row.
In addition, when the 15th “cherry” is stopped at the upper right when the right reel 31 is stopped, and the second symbol is pressed when the left reel 31 is stopped, the 15th “replay” is displayed at the upper left. Stop. When the 15th “replay” cannot be stopped on the upper left, another “replay” is stopped on the upper left.
From the above, the stop type is “Replay”-“Lower jelly / Cherry”-“Cherry (No. 15)”, and the small role 15 that allows two consecutive symbols in the middle row and the lower row wins a prize.

  When winning the above-mentioned small roles H, small roles I group, small role J groups, small roles K group, the winning small roles are different depending on the order of pressing, but the number of payouts is all in any pressing order. Seven small roles win the prize. Therefore, there is a difference in the number of players acquired in the game between when the sub-control board 80 (image display device 23) displays the effect of pushing the double symbols and when not displaying the effect of pushing. Absent.

The small role L is drawn only during the RBA operation, and when winning, the small role 01 (10 cards) is won.
The small combination M is drawn only during the RBB operation, and at the time of winning, the small combination 01 (10 pieces) is won.

The winning numbers “58” to “86” are winning numbers that include winnings of any special role.
The winning numbers “58”, “66”, “76”, and “81” are the winning numbers for single winning of 1BBA, 1BBB, 1BBC, and 1BBD, respectively. In addition, the winning number “86” is a winning number for the single winning of the SB that is one of the special roles. In the present embodiment, a winning number in which the SB and another winning combination are won is not provided.
At the time of winning these winning numbers, it is possible to stop at the active line by pressing the symbol corresponding to the respective accessory. Since each symbol constituting the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination has a “PB ≠ 1” arrangement, the symbol cannot be stopped on the active line unless it is pressed. However, as described above, the special combination can carry over the winning after the next game.

In addition, among the winning numbers “58” to “86”, the winning numbers other than the single winning of the special role are the winning numbers for the special role and the small role or the replay overlapping winning. As described above, in a winning combination game between a special combination and a small combination of “PB = 1” or replay, the selected small combination or replay always wins (all replays are “PB = 1”).
In the present embodiment, if the winning number including the special role is won and the advantageous section is won, the transition from the next game to the advantageous section is performed without transitioning to the standby section. When to have.

In FIG. 17, when winning numbers “63” to “65” are won, the process does not shift to the waiting section. In other words, when one of the winning numbers “63” to “65” is won, the next game shifts to an advantageous section. This means that when the winning number “63” is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the small role E (chance eye A) is stopped, and when the winning number “64” is won, it corresponds to the small role F (chance eye B). This is because the combination of symbols to be displayed is stopped and the combination of symbols corresponding to the small role G (chance eye C) is stopped and displayed when the winning number “65” is won.
Here, when winning number “44” is won, the combination of symbols corresponding to small role E (chance eye A) is stopped, and when winning number “45” is won, it corresponds to small role F (chance eye B). The combination of symbols to be displayed is stopped and when the winning number “46” is won, the combination of symbols corresponding to the small role G (chance eye C) is stopped and displayed. Migrate to For this reason, when the combination of symbols corresponding to these chances A to C is stopped and the advantageous section display LED 77 is not lit, the winning numbers “44” to “46” are not won but the winning combination is won. The player knows that the numbers “63” to “65” have been won. Therefore, when the winning combination that can display the symbols corresponding to the chances A to C is won, even if the winning combination of special roles is included, the next game is not shifted to the waiting section. Shifted to an advantageous section.
As a result, when any of the winning numbers “44” to “46” is won, before the next game is started (specifically, after the combination of symbols in the current game is stopped and displayed, Before the settlement based on the operation of 46 becomes possible, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit. For this reason, since the player can recognize that the next game won in any of the winning numbers “44” to “46” is a game in the advantageous section, it is possible to prevent the game from being stopped by pressing the settlement switch 46. Can be made.

On the other hand, even if the winning number “63” to “65” is won and the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the small roles E to G is stopped, the winning numbers “44” to “46” are won. Similarly to the time, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit. Thus, by making it impossible to determine whether or not the 1BBA has been won by the advantageous section display LED 77, it is possible to increase the expectation of the game after the next game.
In addition, if you win a winning number that includes a special role other than these, and you win the advantageous section (decided to move to the advantageous section), the game of the standby section will be executed from the next game, and it will correspond to the selected special combination When the symbol combination stops on the active line, the game moves to the advantageous section (the game of the symbol combination corresponding to the special role becomes the advantageous section game from the next game of the game stopped on the effective line).
In addition, when a winning number including a special combination that does not have a setting difference is won, it is determined by lottery whether or not to move to the advantageous section, and only when it is decided to move to the advantageous section, the advantageous section is transferred. You may do it. However, in the present embodiment, when a winning number including a special combination that does not have a setting difference is won in the normal section (except for the winning number “86”), it always shifts to the advantageous section.
On the other hand, when a winning number including a special combination that does not have a setting difference is won, it may be controlled to move to the waiting section uniformly without performing a lottery on whether or not to move to the advantageous section. .

  18 to 33 are diagrams showing the winning probabilities determined by the lottery table when the winning numbers are drawn by the winning lottery means 61, and the numbers of the winning numbers for each RT and each set value. When the numerical values shown in FIGS. 18 to 33 are divided by “65536”, the winning probability is obtained. For example, in FIG. 18, the winning number “28” is set to “8927” in common for all settings, so the winning probability is “8927/65536”. The same applies to FIGS. 42 to 44.

18 and 19 show a numerical table in non-RT. In non-RT, the push order replay and special replay are not drawn, but only the replay H (normal replay A) of the winning number “28” is drawn. Also, among the small combinations, the winning numbers “47” to “57” are drawn only during the operation of the combination (RBA), and therefore are not drawn during the so-called normal game including non-RT.
20 and 21 show the numeric tables in RT1. RT1 is a so-called increase RT (RT for increasing medals), and stays at RT1 during ART.
In RT1, push order replays (replay duplication wins) of winning numbers “1” to “6” are drawn. In RT1, when replay 03 or 04 positioned as a fall replay wins at the time of these replay overlap wins, it is shifted to RT3, which is more disadvantageous (lower replay win probability) than RT1.

RT1 is an increase RT, and is set such that the non-winning probability is “0” (so that any winning combination is won) as shown in FIG. In RT1, as shown in FIG. 21, the winning probability number of the combined replay is about “42000”.
Furthermore, in RT1, since it is RT used in the additional specialization zone (which determines the number of games of ART, or adds the number of games of ART. The winning numbers corresponding to the E group to the G group are lottery, and when these winning numbers are won, there is a case in which an effect of pushing the double symbols is output. At this time, the predetermined display device (LED or the like) electrically connected to the main control board 50 does not perform notification that pushes the double symbols, but the image display device electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 23, the lamp 21, the speaker 22 and the like, there is a case where a notification for pushing the double symbols is executed.

The winning probability of the replay E group is set to replay E3> replay E2> replay E1. The reason for setting in this way is to make the double symbols appear as late as possible when a right press instruction (notification) effect is output. In other words, it is designed so that the player can operate the stop switch 42 with more expectation until the final stop (third stop). Specifically, even if the two symbols do not stop at the first stop, the probability that the two symbols stop as the second stop and the third stop increase. Even if the player does not stop, the player can continue to expect. Therefore, when the right press instruction effect is output during the advance rush, the probability that the double symbol stops when the right reel 31 stops as the first stop is low, and when the left reel 31 stops as the third stop. The highest probability that the double symbol will stop is set.
In addition, for the replay G group in which two double symbols can be stopped, the replays G1, G2, and G3 are set to the same winning probability so that the appearance of two double symbols is random. .

This is also set in the same way when winning the small role I group during RBA operation, which will be described later, and the probability that the two symbols stop when the right reel 31 stops, which is the first stop, is the third stop. The probability that the two symbols stop when the left reel 31 is stopped is set to be the highest.
Also, for the small role J group in which two double symbols can be stopped, in the same manner as the replay G group, in order to make the appearance of two double symbols random, small roles J1, J2, and J3 Is set to the same winning probability.

22 and 23 show the numeric tables in RT2. RT2 is an RT that is shifted to after completion of the accessory operation (after completion of the special game).
In RT2, when replay J (which is drawn only in RT2) is won, an effect that causes the “BAR” symbol to be displayed is output. Replay J is set to win with a probability of about 1/3. Note that the replay 09 or 12 (see FIG. 14) that stops when the replay J is won is set as an RT2 end condition (see FIG. 34 described later).

  In particular, in this embodiment, if a special role is won during the main game state 1 (high probability), after the special game is over, the state shifts to RT2 and the main game state 1 (high probability). Here, it is determined whether or not to shift to the advance rush (SR) when the replay J is won according to the normal mode when the special role is won. Since Replay J is a role that does not have a setting difference, it is possible to draw an advance rush (ART). When the special mode is selected, when the normal mode is Gase Kosei (the value of the address “F024 (H)” in FIG. 40 described later is “0”), it is determined not to shift to the advance rush. On the other hand, when the normal mode at the time of winning the special role is true high accuracy (the value of the address “F024 (H)” is “1” or more), it is decided to shift to the advance rush.

24 and 25 show the table of numbers in RT3. RT3 is the RT that transitions from RT1 (by falling).
In RT3, lottery for replay group B and group C is performed. When the replay group B is won and the replay 14 (falling replay) wins, it shifts to non-RT. Also, when the replay group C is won and replay 09 or 12 (promotion replay) wins, the process proceeds to RT1. Therefore, when it is desired to stay at the increased RT as during ART, when the player falls from RT1 to RT3, the correct answer pressing order for winning Replay 09 or 12 when the Replay C group is won is notified. On the other hand, when falling to non-RT, the replay 14 is likely to win a prize without notifying the correct pressing order for maintaining RT3 when the replay B group is won.

26 and 27 show a table of numbers in RT4. RT4 is an RT for internal use after the special role is won. In RT4, the replay A group is drawn, but RT does not shift regardless of whether the answer is correct or incorrect.
In RT4, when a winning number that is a winning combination of a special role and a small role or replay is won, as described above, only the winning and replay condition device (small role or replay) is won. For example, when winning number “59” in FIG. 17 is won at RT4, only Replay H is won.
In RT4, the combined winning probability of replay is lower than RT1, but higher than non-RT. In RT4, the winning probability of replay is not set as high as in RT1, so as not to unnecessarily impair the opportunity to win the winning special combination. Of course, the combined winning probability of replay in RT4 can be set to be equal to the replay winning probability in non-RT.

  FIG. 28 and FIG. 29 show a numerical table during the SB operation. Since the SB game is one game, the numeric tables shown in FIGS. 28 and 29 are used in this one game. After the SB operation (SB game) is completed, the process shifts to non-RT (FIG. 34 described later).

30 and 31 show the numerical tables during the RBA operation. When 1BBA is activated (1BBA game), the RBA is continuously operated, so that during 1BBA game, the winning numbers are drawn according to the number tables shown in FIG. 30 and FIG.
In the 1BBA game, a lottery of the small role H, group I to group K is performed. And in the case of winning either of these, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, there is a case where an effect that causes the two symbols to be displayed is output. The effect (informing and displaying) that pushes the double symbols is not executed by a predetermined display device (LED or the like) electrically connected to the main control board 50, but is electrically connected to the sub-control board 80. In some cases, the image is output by the image display device 23, the lamp 21, the speaker 22, or the like.
Although the details will be described later, in the first half part in 1BBA game (specifically, mission bonus), it is possible to output an effect that pushes double symbols, but in the second half part in 1BBA game, Even when the winner is won, no effects are displayed that push the double symbols. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the output frequency of the effect of pushing the double symbols may be set so that the first half part is higher than the second half part.
During the RBA operation, the small role L having the winning number “56” is also drawn. When winning the small role L, the sub-control board 80 determines the order in which the dummy (fake) is pushed (for example, the first half part is the first right stop and the two symbols are displayed, the second part is left or middle) It is also possible to notify the pressing order (also referred to as “erasing navigation” described later) consisting of the first stop. When winning the small role L, the small role 01 wins regardless of the pressing order. Therefore, when the push order of the left or middle first stop is notified at the time of winning the small role H, I group to K group and at the time of the small role L winning, it is determined which of the winning points has been won It is difficult.

32 and 33 show a table of numbers when the RBB is operating. When 1BBB to 1BBD is activated (1BBB to 1BBD game), the RBB is continuously operated. During 1BBB to 1BBD game, the winning numbers are drawn according to the number table shown in FIG. 32 and FIG.
As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, only the small role M with the winning number “57” is assigned to the winning number to be won, and the winning probability of the small role M is “1 (100%)”. Is set. Note that, when setting the selection number, 2-byte data (0 to 65535 (D)) is used, but “FF (H)” which is 2-byte full and “65535 (D)” are the maximum value. Therefore, “65536 (D)” cannot be set. For this reason, the winning number “57” of the small role M is divided into two, and one of the numbers is set to “4 (D)” and the other number is set to “65532 (D)”. Thereby, the winning number of the small combination M can be set to “65536 (D)”.
The winning probability of the small role M is set to “1 (100%)” by setting one of the numbers to “32768 (D)” and the other number to “32768 (D)”. It is also possible. However, in this case, a total of 4 bytes (2 bytes + 2 bytes) are required as numeric data. For this reason, as in this embodiment, the data capacity can be reduced by setting one set of numeric data to 1 byte and the other set of numeric data to 2 bytes for a total of 3 bytes.

Returning to FIG.
The winning flag control means 62 controls on / off of winning flags corresponding to each combination based on the lottery result by the combination lottery means 61. In this embodiment, a winning flag is provided for each combination for all combinations. When any of the winning combinations is won in the lottery performed by the winning lottery means 61, the winning flag for the winning combination is turned on (the winning flag is set).

For example, in a non-internal game, when the replay A1 (see FIG. 11) is won, the three winning flags Replay 01, 03, and 04 included in the condition device corresponding to the replay A1 are turned on. The winning combination flag is turned off.
Similarly, in the non-inside medium game, when winning the small combination A1 (see FIG. 14), the four winning flags of small combinations 01 to 04 included in the condition device corresponding to the small combination A1 are turned on, and otherwise The winning flag for will be turned off.

In addition, as described above, winnings of roles other than 1BB are not carried over, so even if the winning combination is turned on in this game and the winning flag of these roles is turned on, at the end of the current game The winning flag is turned off.
On the other hand, since the 1BB win is carried over, if 1BB is won in the game this time and the winning flag relating to the 1BB won is once turned on, the ON state is maintained until the 1BB wins, Turned off when 1BB wins.

  Also, for example, when the winning lottery means 61 duplicates and wins 1BBA and replay H of the winning number “59” (see FIG. 17), the winning flag corresponding to 1BBA and the small role H (replays 01 and 02) is turned on, Replay 01 wins in the game. At the end of the game, the winning flags for replays 01 and 02 are turned off, and the winning flag for 1BBA is kept on.

Furthermore, for example, when the winning lottery means 61 wins the 1BBA of the winning number “58” alone, the 1BBA winning flag is turned on in this game, and when the 1BBA is not won in the current game, the 1BBA winning flag Is kept on.
Furthermore, when winning the small combination A1 in the next game (inside), the winning flags of the small combinations 01 to 04 corresponding to the small combination A1 are turned on in addition to 1BBA carrying over the winning combination. At the end of the current game, the winning flags for the small roles 01 to 04 are turned off, and the 1BBA winning flag is kept on (because one of the small roles 01 to 04 always wins in the game).

The push order instruction number selection means 63 selects (determines) a push order instruction number (a number corresponding to the correct push order) based on the lottery result of the winning number by the combination lottery means 61.
The “push order” of the push order instruction number selected here means a push order that is advantageous to the player. For example, when winning the small role A group, it indicates the pressing order for winning the high eye bell. In addition, when replay overlap is won, it refers to a push order that promotes to an advantageous RT or a push order that does not fall to a disadvantaged RT.
Note that the push order instruction number selection means 63 may select the push order instruction number in any of the advantageous section and the normal section, but is not limited to this, for example, only in the advantageous section. The push order instruction number may be selected. Alternatively, after the high eye bell is won once in the advantageous section, the push order instruction number may be selected only during ART.
Further, the selected push order instruction number can be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 only during the advantageous section. Therefore, even if the push order instruction number is selected by the push order instruction number selection means 63 in the normal section (note that the push order instruction number may or may not be selected in the normal section), the push order instruction number is not displayed. 80 will not be sent.
In this embodiment, each winning number is provided with a unique push order instruction number.

In addition, when the replay D, E group to G group, small role H, I group to K group are won and the notification condition is satisfied, the sub-control board 80 operates the stop switch 42 with the right first stop. Notify what to do and what to do with double symbols.
However, the notification of the pressing order or the like in this case is not so-called “instruction function activation”. When the main control board 60 wins the above-mentioned combination, it is only necessary to transmit information (effect group number) indicating which combination is won to the sub-control board 80. No number is selected and notification is not performed on a predetermined display device (LED or the like) electrically connected to the main control board 50. When the information received from the main control board 60 is information corresponding to the winning of each of the above-mentioned roles, the sub-control board 80 notifies the pressing order and the eye pressing based on the information.
When the push order designation number is selected by the push order designation number selection means 63, the push order notification by the main control board 63, that is, the designation function is activated. Thus, the push order instruction information corresponding to the push order instruction number is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. Since this push order instruction number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80, the sub-control board 80 reports the push order based on the received push order instruction number.

As a push order instruction number, for example,
Correct push order 123: Push order instruction number “A1 (H)”
Correct push order 132: Push order instruction number “A2 (H)”
Correct answer push order 213: Push order instruction number “A3 (H)”
Correct push order 231: Push order instruction number “A4 (H)”
Correct push order 312: Push order instruction number “A5 (H)”
Correct answer push order 321: Push order instruction number “A6 (H)”
It is stipulated. Therefore, for example, when the small combination A1 is won during the AT, the push order instruction number “A1 (H)” is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. When the sub control board 80 receives this push order instruction number “A1 (H)”, it notifies the correct push order, for example, “left middle right”.
In addition, the main control board 60 determines the relationship between the push order instruction number and the push order instruction information in advance. For example,
Push order instruction number “A1 (H)”: Push order instruction information “= 1”
Push order instruction number “A2 (H)”: Push order instruction information “= 2”
Push order instruction number “A3 (H)”: Push order instruction information “= 3”
Push order instruction number “A4 (H)”: Push order instruction information “= 4”
Push order instruction number “A5 (H)”: Push order instruction information “= 5”
Push order instruction number “A6 (H)”: Push order instruction information “= 6”
It is determined.
In this case, when the push order instruction number selection unit 63 selects the push order instruction number “A1 (H)”, “= 1” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 by the operation of the instruction function.

The effect group number selection means 64 is an effect group number corresponding to the winning number and selects a number to be transmitted to the sub control board 80.
As shown in FIGS. 11-17, the production group number corresponding to the winning number is defined. For example, the effect group number when winning one of the replay A groups is “1”, and the effect group number when winning the small role A group is “17”. Then, the effect group number selection means 64 selects an effect group number corresponding to the winning number of the game, and the main control board 60 transmits the selected effect group number to the sub-control board 80. The sub control board 80 outputs an effect related to the winning combination based on the received effect group number.
Here, it may be considered that the winning number itself determined by the combination lottery means 61 is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. However, in this embodiment, the winning number itself is not transmitted to the sub control board 80. As a result, the sub-control board 80 side cannot fully know the winning combination of the current game.

FIG. 71 is a diagram showing an effect group number table for selecting an effect group number.
The effect group number selection means 64 selects an effect group number corresponding to the winning and replay condition device number stored in the game. In FIG. 71, for example, when the winning and replay condition device numbers of the game are “1” to “6”, the production group number “1” is selected. Similarly, when the game winning and replay condition device numbers are “32” to “37”, the production group number “17” is selected.
Furthermore, for example, a unique production group number is selected for each of the game winning and replay condition device numbers “19” to “31” (replays D to K).

The effect group numbers shown in FIG. 71 are stored in the ROM 54 of the main control board 50. In this embodiment, there are “57” types of winning and replay condition device numbers, and one byte storage area is provided for each winning and replay condition device number. Therefore, the total is “57” bytes.
As shown in FIG. 71, in the first embodiment, the address of the winning and replay condition device number “0” is set to “1500 (H)”. And for each address,
1500 (H): 0 (D)
1501 (H): 1 (D)
1502 (H): 1 (D)
:
1506 (H): 1 (D)
1507 (H): 2 (D)
1508 (H): 2 (D)
:
150C (H): 2 (D)
150D (H): 3 (D)
:
151F (H): 16 (D)
1520 (H): 17 (D)
:
1538 (H): 36 (D)
1539 (H): 37 (D)
Is stored.

In the first embodiment, in order to determine (derived) the production group number, “1500 (H)” which is the head address of the production group number table is stored in the HL register, and the winning and replay condition device number is stored in the A register. Remember.
Next, by obtaining the data of the address indicated by the value obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value, it is possible to determine the effect group number corresponding to the winning and replay condition device number.
Specifically, when the winning combination of the game is a small combination A2 (winning and replay condition device number “33”),
HL register value: 1500 (H) (initial value)
A register value: 21 (H) (33 (D))
HL register value + A register value: 1521 (H)
Data stored at address “1521 (H)”: 11 (H) (17 (D))
Can be determined as the production group number.
By comprising in this way, the control processing for determining an effect group number can be simplified.

  The reel control means 65 controls to start rotation of all (three) reels 31 when a rotation start command for the reels 31 is received, particularly when the start switch 41 is operated in the present embodiment. Further, after the winning number is determined by the winning lottery means 61, the reel control means 65 refers to the ON / OFF of the winning flag in the current game, and the stop position determining table corresponding to ON / OFF of the winning flag. When the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined and the motor 32 is driven based on the timing when the stop switch 42 is operated. Control is performed so that the reel 31 is stopped at the determined position.

  For example, in a game in which at least one winning flag is on, the reel control means 65 selects a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination (the combination with the winning flag turned on) within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. The reel 31 is stopped and controlled so as to be able to stop on the active line, and the reel 31 is stopped and controlled so as not to stop the combination of symbols corresponding to a combination other than the winning combination (the combination whose winning flag is off) on the effective line. .

Here, “within the range of stop control of the reel 31” means the time from the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 actually stops or the amount of rotation of the reel 31 (the number of moving frames (patterns)). Means within range.
In this embodiment, the reel 31 is rotated at a speed of about 80 rotations per minute at a constant speed.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, the time from when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is set within 190 ms. Thereby, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of moving frames from the symbol at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops is set to four frames.

  For example, in FIG. 2, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the first “bell” of the left reel 31 is located at the lower left stage, the four frames ahead, that is, up to the fifth “replay” is the lower left stage. It becomes a symbol that can be stopped at once. Therefore, at the above operation timing, the symbols of No. 1 (bita stop) to No. 5 (4 tops) are symbols that can be stopped at the lower left.

However, the present invention is not limited to the above, and it is also possible to set the maximum number of moving frames to 4 frames from the symbol next to the symbol positioned on the active line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated. In this case, for example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the first “bell” of the left reel 31 is located in the lower left stage, the next symbol, that is, the second “watermelon”, Up to the 6th “bell” that is 4 frames ahead is a symbol that can be stopped at the lower left. Therefore, at the above-described operation timing, the symbols Nos. 2 to 6 are symbols that can be stopped at the lower left.
In the following description, it is assumed that the maximum number of moving frames is 4 frames from the symbols positioned on the effective line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated.

  First, at the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, if any of the symbols within the range of the stop control of the reel 31 is a symbol to be stopped at a predetermined effective line, the stop switch 42 is operated. In addition, the design is controlled to stop at a predetermined effective line.

  That is, if the reel 31 is stopped immediately at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop control of the reel 31 is stopped until the reel 31 is stopped when the symbol related to the winning combination does not stop at a predetermined effective line. By controlling the rotational movement of the reel 31 within the range, the symbol related to the winning combination is controlled to stop as much as possible on the predetermined effective line (retraction stop control).

Conversely, if the reel 31 is stopped immediately at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped on the effective line, the reel 31 is stopped when the reel 31 is stopped. By controlling the rotational movement of the reel 31 within the range of 31 stop control, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is controlled so as not to stop on the effective line (kicking stop control).
Furthermore, in a game in which a plurality of winning combinations are won, the priority order of winning combinations is determined in advance according to the winning combination, the pressing order of the stop switch 42, and the operation timing of the stop switch 42. By doing so, the highest priority drawing pull-in control is performed.

Further, the reel control means 65 detects the pressing order (operation order) of the stop switch 42. The reel control means 65 detects which one of the left, middle and right stop switches 42 is operated when the stop switch 42 is operated by the player.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, a signal indicating that the stop switch 42 has been operated is input to the reel control means 65. By discriminating this signal, the reel control means 65 detects which stop switch 42 has been operated. Then, stop control of the reel 31 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is executed.

Further, the reel control means 65 includes a stop position determination table for each winning number (for each condition device). The stop position determination table defines the stop position of the reel 31 with respect to the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated. In each stop position determination table, for example, when the stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the first symbol (“bell” in the case of the left reel 31) passes through the lower left stage, the number of symbols is controlled to move. The stop position is set in advance so that the number of symbols is stopped at the lower left.
As described above, according to the winning number (condition device), the pressing order, and the operation timing of the stop switch 42, the symbols that stop on the active line are determined in advance by the stop position determination table.

Moreover, the following method is mentioned as stop control of the reel 31 when the selected winning number is an overlapping winning combination of a plurality of small roles.
As the first priority, when all of the symbols constituting the winning symbol combination (of the reel 31) can be stopped on the active line, the reel 31 is stopped at that position.

Next, when it is not possible to “stop all of the symbols that make up the winning symbol combination on the active line” (when the first priority cannot be adopted), the second priority is set to “number priority” ”Or“ number priority ”, the reel 31 is controlled to stop.
Here, the “number priority” is to stop (pull in) the symbol of the reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination having the largest number of payouts among the combinations of symbols that are selected in duplicate, with priority on the line. Say. For this reason, at the time of winning the small role A group, the small role 01 corresponds to the combination of symbols having the largest number of payouts (10).
On the other hand, “number priority” means that the symbols on the reel 31 are stopped on the effective line so that the number of combinations of symbols that can be stopped on the effective line is maximized.

  For example, when the small combination A1 is won and the middle first stop is performed, it is not possible to simultaneously stop all of the middle reels 31 related to the winning combination on the active line. This is because there are a plurality of types of symbols for the medium reel 31 of the selected small role, but there is only one effective line, so only one type of symbol can be stopped on the effective line.

  Therefore, when the small role A group is selected, the reel 31 is controlled to stop according to either the number priority or the number priority. In the present embodiment, when the small role A group is selected, the reels are controlled to stop with priority on the number of sheets when the correct answer is in the pushing order, and the reels 31 are controlled to stop with priority on the number when the answer is incorrect. When the reels are controlled to stop with the priority given to the number, the small combination 01 (10-piece combination) is not awarded and the three-piece combination can be won.

In the above example, for example, when winning a small role A1, winning combination of small roles 01-04, the combination of symbols that can be awarded is:
Small role 01: "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell"
Small role 02: "Bell"-"Blank"-"Upper"
Small role 02: "Bell"-"Blank"-"Watermelon"
Small role 02: "Bell"-"Watermelon"-"Upper"
Small role 02: "Bell"-"Watermelon"-"Watermelon"
Small role 03: “Lower”-“Bell” – “Upper”
Small role 03: “Top angel” – “Bell” – “Watermelon”
Small role 03: “Blank”-“Bell”-“Upper”
Small role 03: "Blank"-"Bell"-"Watermelon"
Small role 03: “Cherry”-“Bell”-“Upper”
Small role 03: "Cherry"-"Bell"-"Watermelon"
Small role 04: "Lower Tag"-"Lower Tag"-"Bell"
Small role 04: “Upper” – “Cherry” – “Bell”
Small role 04: "Blank"-"Lower Lime"-"Bell"
Small role 04: "Blank"-"Cherry"-"Bell"
Small role 04: "Cherry"-"Lower Lime"-"Bell"
Small role 04: "Cherry"-"Cherry"-"Bell"
It is.

And, when winning the small role A1, when giving priority to the number at the time of the middle first stop (when the push order is incorrect), if the “bell” is stopped on the active line, the symbol that can be stopped on the active line The maximum number of combinations is seven. Therefore, in this case, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the “bell” is stopped on the effective line.
Next, when the left reel 31 stops as the second stop, if “blank” or “cherry” is stopped, the number of symbols that can be stopped becomes two, which is the maximum. Therefore, when the left reel is stopped, “blank” or “cherry” is stopped. As a result, during the first stop during the winning of the small role A1, the small role 03 wins a prize.

Also, when winning the small role A1 and giving priority to the number at the time of the first stop on the right (at the time of incorrect push order), if the “bell” is stopped on the active line, The maximum number of combinations is seven. Therefore, in this case, when the right reel 31 is stopped, the “bell” is stopped at the effective line.
Next, when the left reel 31 stops as the second stop, if “blank” or “cherry” is stopped, the number of symbols that can be stopped becomes two, which is the maximum. Therefore, when the left reel is stopped, “blank” or “cherry” is stopped. As a result, the small role 04 wins at the time of the first stop on the right when the small role A1 is won.

On the other hand, when winning the small role A1, when the first stop is left, the correct answer is the pressing order at this point, so the left reel 31 stops the “bell” symbol related to the small role 01 with priority given to the number of pieces. Let In the middle second stop, the correct answer in the pushing order is determined at this time, so the number priority is executed after the second stop and the small combination 01 is won.
On the other hand, if the stop is the second stop on the right after the first stop on the left, the incorrect answer in the pressing order is determined at this point, so the number priority is switched. Therefore, if the “upper tag” or “watermelon” is stopped when the right reel 31 is stopped, the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped is two, which is the maximum. Therefore, when the right reel is stopped, the “upper tag” or “watermelon” is stopped. As a result, the small role 02 wins in the middle of pushing order when winning the small role A1.
Similarly to the above, for the small combination A2 to small combination A6, the reel 31 is controlled to stop by giving priority to the number when the correct answer is in the pushing order and giving priority to the number when the answer is incorrect.

Each of the small roles E to K has a duplicate winning combination between seven winning combinations, and since there is a overlapping winning combination of small roles with the same payout number, there is no priority on the number of sheets or priority on the number. It is determined that the small role 05 is won when the small role E is won, the small role 06 is awarded when the small role F is won, and the small role 07 is awarded when the small role G is won.
Further, as described above, the small combination H, the small combination I group to the small combination K group predetermine the small combination to win according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42.

Since the small combination L is a winning combination of the small combination 01 (10-sheet combination) and the small combination 11 (7-sheet combination), the above-mentioned number priority or number priority is applied. In the present embodiment, when the small combination L is won, the number priority is executed regardless of the pressing order. Therefore, the small role 01 is always awarded.
Further, the small combination M is a winning combination of the small combinations 01 to 15 and the small combination 17 and is a double winning combination of three, seven, and ten, so the number priority or the number priority is applied. In the present embodiment, when the small combination M is won, priority is given to the number of sheets in any pressing order. Therefore, the small combination 01 or the small combination 17 is won. In this case, 1) always wins the small role 01, 2) always wins the small role 17, 3) according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42, for example, at the first left stop, the small role 01 is won, At the time of the first stop on the right, any method such as winning the small role 17 may be used. When the small role 17 is won, the “bell” is aligned with the middle line.

Returning to FIG.
The winning determination means 66 determines whether or not the combination of symbols on the reel 31 stopped on the active line matches the combination of symbols corresponding to any combination when the reel 31 is stopped (whether any combination has won a prize). Or not). The winning determination means 66 determines the symbol on the active line by detecting, for example, the angle when the motor 32 is stopped, the number of steps, and the like.

  The payout means 67 determines that the winning combination determining means 66 determines that the combination of symbols stopped on the active line when the reel 31 is stopped matches the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations, and when the winning combination is won. Depending on the winning combination, a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player, or credits are added. Further, at the time of replay winning, control is performed so that the number of medals inserted in the current game is automatically inserted without paying out medals.

The RT control means 68 determines whether or not the RT transition condition is satisfied when each game and all the reels 31 are stopped. When it is determined that the RT transition condition is satisfied, the RT control means 68 controls to perform the RT transition. Is.
As described above, the RT of the present embodiment includes non-RT, RT1 to RT4, 1BBA operation, and 1BBB to 1BBD operation. As shown in FIGS. 18 to 33, the type and number of winning numbers and their winning probabilities differ for each RT.

In the present embodiment, the RT transition timing is set at the time of stop display of the symbol combination or at the time of winning the RT transition combination, that is, at all stops (when all reels 31 are stopped).
However, the transition from non-RT, RT1 to RT3 to RT4 may be performed based on the winning of 1BB, or may be performed based on the fact that 1BB has not won in the game won of 1BB. Also good. In the present embodiment, the game shifts to RT4 based on the fact that 1BB has not won in the game won by 1BB.
The non-internal game corresponds to non-RT, RT1, RT2, and RT3. Further, the inside game corresponds to RT4.
However, when SB wins, the next game is determined to be SB operation (SB game) and non-RT.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an RT transition diagram of the present embodiment.
When the RWM 53 is initialized, the game is started from non-RT. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the RWM 53 is initialized, the RT before the initial stage (before the power is turned off) may be maintained. For example, when the RWM 53 is initialized when the 1BB winning is carried over, the winning of the 1BB is also maintained (carried over) and may be started from RT4.
In a non-RT, RT1-RT3 non-internal game, when 1BB is won and 1BB does not win, the RT control means 68 determines that the RT transition condition is satisfied, and determines RT4 corresponding to the internal game. Transition.

In addition, when 1BB wins in a game won by 1BB, the operation of 1BB is started when all the current games are stopped, and in this case, RT4 (internal middle game) is not passed.
On the other hand, when the SB is won at RT1, RT2 or RT3 and the SB wins, the process shifts to non-RT. And SB game is performed in non-RT. Even after the end of the SB game, the non-RT remains.
The combination of symbols of SB is “PB ≠ 1” as shown in FIG. Therefore, when the SB is not won in the game won for the SB, there is no RT transition.

When 1BB is won and the process shifts to RT4, the RT4 is continued until the winning 1BB wins. When the RT control means 68 determines that 1BBA has won in RT4, the RT control means 68 determines that the RT transition condition is satisfied, and shifts to 1BBA operation (1BBA game). Similarly, when it is determined at RT4 that 1BBB to 1BBD have won, it is determined that the RT transition condition is satisfied, and the operation shifts to 1BBB to 1BBD operation (1BBB to 1BBD game).
When 1BBA is in operation, the operation is continued until the operation end condition of 1BBA is satisfied. In the present embodiment, the 1BBA operation end condition is set such that the number of payouts exceeds 91.

  The RT control means 68 determines whether or not more than 91 medals have been paid out during each game and 1BBA operation, and if it is determined that more than 91 medals have been paid out, the 1BBA operation end condition It is determined that the condition is satisfied, and control is performed so as to shift to RT2 from the next game.

Further, the end condition of the 1BBB operation is set to pay out more than 420 medals.
The RT control means 68 determines whether or not more than 420 medals have been paid out in each game during 1 BBB operation. It is determined that it is satisfied, and control is performed so as to shift to RT2 from the next game.
Furthermore, the end condition of the 1BBC and 1BBD operation is set to pay out more than 50 medals.
The RT control means 68 determines whether or not more than 50 medals have been paid out for each game during 1 BBC or 1BBD operation. It is determined that the operation end condition is satisfied, and control is performed so as to shift to RT2 from the next game.

During the 1BBA operation, the RBA is continuously operated as described above. The RBA ends when either of two winning combinations or two games are satisfied, and after that, the RBA is operated again on condition that the 1BBA operation end condition is not satisfied.
Similarly, during the operation of 1BBB to 1BBD, as described above, the RBB is continuously operated. As with RBA, the RBB ends when either of two winnings or two games are satisfied, and after that, the RBB is again made on condition that the end conditions for the 1BBB to 1BBD operation are not satisfied. Is activated.

  RT2 is positioned as an RT in preparation for starting ART. RT2 is continued until Replay 09 or 12 wins. When Replay 09 or 12 wins, the process proceeds to RT1. As shown in FIG. 22, the replay J with the winning number “30” is drawn at RT2. Replay J is a role that Replay 09 or 12 wins as shown in FIG. Therefore, when the replay J is won, the RT transition condition is satisfied. Further, since the winning probability of Replay J is about “1/3”, the expected number of games to stay at RT2 is about 3 games.

  When ART is executed after the operation of 1BB is completed, RT1 is allowed to stay. In this case, the operation shifts to RT2 after the end of the 1BB operation, and when the operation further shifts from RT2 to RT1, the stay of RT1 is maintained until the end of ART. In RT1, as shown in FIG. 20, the replay A group is selected by lottery. During ART, when the replay A group is selected, the instruction function is activated to display the correct answer push order for winning the replay 01. When Replay 01 wins at RT1, RT1 is maintained. On the other hand, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the incorrect answer pressing order when the replay group A is won, the replay 03 or 04 wins and the process proceeds to RT3. In RT1, if the operation of the instruction function is terminated due to the end of ART, it becomes easier for Replay 03 or 04 to win when Replay A group is selected. In other words, it becomes easier to shift to RT3.

During replay A group winning during ART and RT1, if replay 03 or 04 is won due to a player's operation mistake of stop switch 42, replay B group winning selected at RT3 after moving to RT3 Sometimes, the correct push order is displayed by the operation of the instruction function, the replay 02 is won, and RT3 is maintained. In addition, when the replay C group is selected at RT3, the correct answer push order is displayed by the operation of the instruction function, and replay 09 or 12 is won and promoted to RT1.
When the ART and the advantageous section are completed and the process shifts to RT3, the replay 14 is easy to win because the instruction function is not activated when the replay group B is selected by RT3. In other words, it becomes easier to shift to non-RT.
In this embodiment, after transitioning to non-RT, unless 1BB is won, there is no case of transitioning from non-RT to RT. However, not limited to this, when a predetermined RT transition condition is satisfied, non-RT transitions to other Of course, it may be possible to return (transfer) to RT.
On the other hand, after the 1BB operation is finished, the instruction function does not operate when the execution right of the advantageous section (ART) is not possessed. Therefore, in any case, RT2 → RT1 → RT3 → non-RT.

FIG. 35 is a diagram showing transition of the main game state.
36 to 39 are diagrams showing fluctuation conditions (start condition, end condition) of the main game state, changes in the section type number, and the like.
40 and 41 are diagrams showing storage areas provided in the RWM 53 of this embodiment, and show addresses and their contents.
In FIG. 1, the main game state control means 69 executes a process according to the main game state described later at the start of the game, and executes a process according to the main game state described later at the end of the game. When the transition condition is satisfied, the main game state is shifted. The main game state control means 69 also controls the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the ART.

In FIG. 35, the main gaming state 0 is a normal section (non-advantage section) and non-ART. When the advantageous section is won in the main gaming state 0 and the transition to the standby section is made, the transition to the standby section in the main gaming state 0 is performed. The transition to the waiting section in the main game state 0 is only when 1BBA is won.
In the main game state 0, if the advantageous section is won without winning 1BB, the main game state 1 is entered. In this embodiment, the main game states 1 to 13 are all advantageous sections.

The main gaming state 1 is in the high probability that the ART winning probability is set high. It should be noted that there are a plurality of types, including gaze high accuracy (details will be described later).
ART is the main gaming state 3, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, and 10. The main game state 3 is the advance rush (SR), the main game state 5 is the T shoot-off battle (ART 1), the main game state 6 is the M strategy battle (ART 2), and the main game state 9 is the final. The final game (ART 3), the main game state 10 is ending.

The main game state 3 (SR) is a specialized zone for acquiring the number of ART games.
As shown in FIG. 35, the main gaming state 1 (high probability) wins the ART. When the ART game is won in the main game state 1, the main game state 3 (SR) is passed through the main game state 8 (name based on the game characteristics and effects when the game progresses from the main game state 1 to the main game state 8; episode (EP)). ) To determine the number of ART games. Further, when the transition condition to the main game state 3 is satisfied during the ART, the state shifts to the main game state 3 (additional special zone), and the number of ART games is added.

When the main game state 3 (SR) is finished, if a predetermined condition (HP counter = “0” described later) is not satisfied, the process proceeds to the main game state 5 (T defeat), and the predetermined condition (HP counter = When “0”) is satisfied, the game proceeds to the main game state 6 (M strategy battle). In the main game state 5 (T defeat battle), when the number of ART games reaches “0” (GS counter = “0”, which will be described later), the ART is terminated (“1” is set in an advantageous section clear counter, which will be described later). Remember). After proceeding to the main game state 6 (M strategy battle), when the number of games of ART becomes “0” (GS counter = “0” described later), the game proceeds to the main game state 7 (M final battle). In this main gaming state 7, it is determined whether or not to continue ART, and if it is determined not to continue ART, the state shifts to main gaming state 0 (normal). On the other hand, if it is decided to continue the ART, the game proceeds to the main game state 8 (the designation based on the game characteristics and effects when the main game state 7 progresses to the main game state 8; after the victory of the M battle). Then, the game proceeds to the main game state 3 (SR) again to determine the number of ART games.
In the main game state 7, the number of games is determined on the basis of a single shot counter value and a continuous shot counter value which will be described later.
In the main game state 8, the number of games is determined based on an episode counter value described later.

When the number of times of advancement from the main game state 7 to the main game state 8 (area counter value) reaches a predetermined number of times (four times), the main game state 9 does not proceed to the main game state 9 (final battle; ART3) Transition.
In the main game state 9, when the ART is terminated without satisfying the condition for transition to the main game state 10, the main game state 9 is shifted to the main game state 0.
On the other hand, when the transition condition from the main gaming state 9 to the main gaming state 10 is satisfied (when the remaining number of games in the advantageous section becomes less than a predetermined number), the state shifts to the main gaming state 10 (ending). The main game state 10 (ending) is a game state in which the ART game (advantageous section) is ended after digesting a plurality of games. When transitioning to the main gaming state 10 (ending), the ending effect is output until the end of the main gaming state 10 (ART game). For example, the ending effect is maintained even if the game transitions to the 1BB game during the main gaming state 10 (ending). It is set to be.
When the predetermined number of games is executed in the main game state 10 (when GS counter = “0”) or when the number of games in the advantageous section (advantageous section clear counter) becomes “0”, the main game State 10 (ending) is ended, and the main game state 0 is entered.

The main game states 11 and 12 are 1BBA-operated game states. Furthermore, the main game state 13 is a game state in which 1 BBA to 1 BBD are operated.
When 1BBA is won in the main game state 0 or 1, the game state shifts to the main game state 11 (name based on game characteristics and effects; mission bonus).
In addition, if 1BBA is won in the main game state 5 (T defeat battle), the game state shifts to the main game state 12 (C bonus).
When 1BBA is won in a game state other than the main game state 0, 1 or 5, or when 1BBB to 1BBD is won in all main game states in which no accessory is in operation, the state shifts to the main game state 13 (bonus). .
Therefore, when 1BB is won during ART, the game state shifts to the main game state 12 or 13. When the 1BB operation is completed in the main game state 12 or 13, the state returns to the ART when the accessory is not operated, so that the state shifts to the main game state 2 (AT preparation). Then, the main game state 2 returns to a predetermined main game state (main game state at the time of winning the bonus).

Subsequently, the contents of data stored in the RWM 53 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41.
40 and 41, the address is expressed in hexadecimal notation, and the range of the data value in each address and the numerical value in the contents are expressed in decimal notation for easy understanding.
The main game state (_NB_GAM_STS) of the address “F020 (H)” is a storage area for storing the current game state. For example, when the current main game state is the main game state 3 (SR), “3” is stored.
The advantageous section type (_NB_ADV_KND) of the address “F021 (H)” is a storage area for determining the current gaming section. For example, when the current gaming section is the advantageous section, “1” is stored. .

The advantageous section clear counter (_CT_ADV) of addresses “F022 (H)” and “F023 (H)” stores the number of games in the advantageous section within the range of “0” to “1500 (D)”. 2 byte counter. “1500” is set at the start of the advantageous section, and “1” is subtracted at the end of each game. When this advantageous section clear counter becomes “0”, it means that the advantageous section is ended.
In the present embodiment, in the case of a 2-byte counter, the address with the smaller address value is the lower digit storage area, and the address obtained by adding “1” to the lower digit address value is the upper digit storage area. ing.

The normal mode (_NB_NML_MD) of the address “F024 (H)” stores the normal mode (highly accurate type) in the main gaming state 1 (highly accurate). In the main game state 0, when an advantageous section is won (at the time of the small role E to G win), and when shifting to the main game state 1, it is determined by lottery which one is to be high. Then, for each high accuracy, the number of highly reliable guaranteed games is determined in advance, and is stored in the normal mode security counter (_CT_NMS_SC) of the address “F025 (H)” according to the determined high accuracy.
The high accuracy of the present embodiment has a high accuracy and a high accuracy. This high accuracy includes a high accuracy short, a high accuracy middle, and a high accuracy long, which differ in the number of games that can be stayed with high accuracy (expected value of the number of games).

For example, when the winning is highly accurate, the normal mode is “0” and the number of guaranteed games is “5”, which are stored in the addresses “F024 (H)” and “F025 (H)”, respectively. Also, when winning the high-definition short, the normal mode is “1” and the number of guaranteed games is “10”. Furthermore, when winning the high-precision middle, the normal mode is “2” and the number of guaranteed games is “30”. Further, when winning the high-precision long, the normal mode is “3” and the number of guaranteed games is “50”. And it is game nature which makes a game play in anticipation of winning of a special role (winning of ART) during high accuracy (this high accuracy).
In the normal mode, promotion lottery is performed in accordance with the selected condition device, but no downgrade is performed.

When the normal mode guarantee counter reaches “0”, a lottery for shifting (falling) to the main gaming state 0 is performed. In the present embodiment, a transfer lottery is performed at the time of replay H winning. Therefore, after shifting to the main game state 1, the normal mode guarantee counter becomes “0”, and when the shift (fall) lottery is won at the time of replay H winning, the next game shifts to the main game state 0.
Since the main game state 1 is at least an advantageous section, before the main game state 1 is finished, the instruction function is activated at least once in the small role A group winning. In the present embodiment, after the transition to the main gaming state 1, the instruction function is activated when the first small role A group is won. When the normal mode guarantee counter reaches “0” and the instruction function has not yet been activated (when the maximum instruction generation flag described later is “0”), the advantageous section is not terminated and the main gaming state 1 To maintain. When the small role A group is won and the instruction function is activated, the advantageous section is ended.

  As described above, after the 1BB operation is completed, the process proceeds to RT2, but in RT2, replay J ("BAR rematch") is drawn. Then, in the main gaming state 1, when 1BB having a setting difference is won, and when the operation shifts to RT2 after the 1BB operation, the replay J (“BAR” matching replay) is won according to the normal mode before the 1BB operation. Sometimes SR (ART) lottery is performed. Since Replay J has no setting difference, it is possible to draw an SR. In the present embodiment, if the accuracy is high (normal mode “0”) before the 1BB operation, even if the replay J is won, the SR is not won (winning probability “0”). On the other hand, when the high accuracy (normal mode “1” or more) is established before the 1BB operation, the SR is always won when the replay J is won (winning probability “1”). Further, when the replay J is won and the replay 09 or 12 wins, the transition condition from RT2 to RT1 is satisfied so that SR (main game state 3) can be executed at RT1. In addition, when SB wins in RT2, it shifts to non-RT, but since SB is a combination of symbols having a low winning probability, it is rare to shift to non-RT.

The SR winning counter (_CT_SR_HIT) of the address “F026 (H)” is a counter that becomes “1” when the SR is won. By referring to the value of the SR winning counter, it can be determined whether or not the condition for transition to SR is satisfied.
The episode counter (_CT_EPSD) of the address “F027 (H)” counts the remaining number of games in the main game state 8. In the present embodiment, when the SR is won in the main game state 1 and the game state 8 is shifted to the main game state 8, “3” is set as the number of games in the main game state 8 (episode) when the SR is first hit. This count value is decremented by “1” at the end of each game. When the episode counter reaches “0”, the end condition of the main gaming state 8 is satisfied.
Further, when the main game state 7 (M final battle) is shifted to the main game state 8 (after M final battle victory), “2” is set as the number of games in the main game state 8 (after M final battle victory). Also in this case, when the game “1” is subtracted in the same manner as described above and the episode counter becomes “0”, the end condition of the main game state 8 is satisfied. Note that when the user is in the main game state 8 (when the episode counter is not “0”), the game is a game that activates the instruction function.

The maximum instruction generation flag (_FL_MORD) of the address “F028 (H)” is a flag for determining whether or not the instruction function is activated when winning the small role A group in the advantageous section. In the advantageous section, the flag is set to “1” in the first game in which the small role group A is won and the instruction function is activated. When this flag is “1”, the advantageous section can be ended, and when it is “0”, the advantageous section cannot be ended.
However, when 1BB which shifts to the advantageous section is won, the maximum instruction generation flag is set to “1” when the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is stopped (at the time of 1BB winning). When 1BB which shifts to an advantageous section is won, since 1BB game is executed, it is not necessary to operate the instruction function (the advantageous section can be terminated without operating the instruction function once).

  The GS counters (_CT_GS) of the addresses “F029 (H)” and “F030 (H)” are counters for counting the number of ART games, and are added in the main game state 3 (SR). The range is “0” to “300 (D)”. Since the range exceeds “255”, it is a 2-byte counter. During ART, the GS counter value is decremented by “1” at the end of each game. For example, when the main game state 5 becomes “0”, it is determined that the ART end condition is satisfied. On the other hand, when it becomes “0” in the main game state 6, it is determined that the transition condition to the main game state 7 is satisfied. In other words, the GS counter (_CT_GS) is referred to when determining whether or not the ART termination condition is satisfied, or when determining whether or not to shift to the main gaming state. Note that the GS counter is decremented during ART, that is, in the main gaming states 5, 6, 9, and 10.

The fall flag (_FL_MD_DWN) of the address “F02B (H)” is a flag for managing the end of the advantageous section and the end of the SR. It is “1” when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, and “2” when the end condition of the SR is satisfied.
For example, the flag is referred to when the game ends, and when the flag is “1” during the advantageous section, control is performed so that the advantageous section ends in the game.
Further, the flag is referred to when the game ends, and when the flag is “2” during SR, control is performed so as to end SR in the game.
The main game state buffer (_BF_GAM_STS) of the address “F02C (H)” is used to store the main game state at the time of 1BB winning. For example, when a special role is won in the main game state 1 and the main game state 11 (mission bonus) is entered, the value of the main game state of “F020 (H)” is “11”, but the address “F02C ( H) ”stores“ 1 ”, so that the main gaming state to return to after returning to 1BB operation (specifically, after winning the replay J (“ BAR ”matching replay)) is stored. To leave.

The additional counter (_CT_ADD) of the address “F02D (H)” stores the additional number determined in the main gaming state 3 (SR). In the main game state 3, the number of extras is determined by lottery in a game that can stop two symbols. Then, the determined addition number is added to the addition counter. Further, since the determined additional number is the number of ART games, the additional number is also added to the GS counter described above. Although details will be described later, the value of the add-on counter (_CT_ADD) is not always added to the GS counter.
The one-shot bullet counter (_CT_BLW_BLT) of the address “F02E (H)” is a continuation counter used in the main game state 7 (M battle), and uses a counter value “1” per game. That is, every time the blow counter is used, the counter value is subtracted by “1”. Therefore, the number of games in the main game state 7 is “1” per one-shot counter value “1”. One blow is stored in the main game state 6 (M strategy battle). For example, in the main gaming state 6, when a specific winning number is won (for example, when winning numbers “20” to “27”, “44” to “46” are won), a single lottery is drawn. When this lottery is won, the one-shot bullet counter value is added.
The one-shot ammunition accumulated in the main game state 6 is used in the main game state 7 to continue the ART lottery. For example, when the blow counter value is “3”, the number of games “3” in the main game state 7 is guaranteed, so the ART lottery continuation is executed in the three games.

The continuous shot counter (_CT_RPT_BLT) of the address “F02F (H)” is a counter for continuation used in the main game state 7 (M decisive battle) similarly to the above-mentioned single shot counter, and is used for one game. . Continuous shots are stored in the main game state 6 (M strategy battle). For example, in the main game state 6, when a specific winning number is won (for example, when winning number “20” to “27”, “44” to “46” is won), a lot of bullets (number The lottery counter value is added by the number selected in the lottery.
Then, the continuous shots stored in the main game state 6 are used in one game in the main game state 7 regardless of the continuous shot counter value, and the ART continuous lottery is performed. Therefore, the larger the continuous shot counter value, the easier it is to win the ART continuous lottery. Note that the value of the continuous shot counter may correspond to the winning probability of the ART continuous lottery. Specifically, when the continuous shot counter is “20”, the ART continuous lottery is won by 20%, and when the continuous shot counter is “100” or more, the ART continuous lottery is set. And so on. When the value of the continuous shot counter corresponds to the winning probability of the ART continuous lottery, the upper limit value of the continuous shot counter may be set to “100”.
In the main game states 5 (T defeat battle) and 6 (M capture battle), the game continues until the GS counter value becomes “0”. When the GS counter value becomes “0” in the main game state 6 (M strategy battle), the state shifts to the main game state 7 (M battle). In the main game state 7 (M decisive battle), a value obtained by adding “1” to the one-shot-ball counter value when the consecutive-ball shot counter value is “1” or more is the number of games.

  The SR guaranteed game number counter (_CT_SRSC_GM) of the address “F030 (H)” stores the number of SR guaranteed game times, and the initial value is set to “8” in this embodiment. Therefore, SR can continue at least 8 games. When shifting to SR (main game state 3), “8” is stored in this SR guaranteed game number counter, and “1” is subtracted at the end of each game. When the SR guaranteed game number counter reaches “0”, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to end each game and SR.

The HP counter (_CT_HP) of the address “F031 (H)” stores a counter indicating the enemy force (HP). The SR has a game for the purpose of setting the enemy soldier (HP) to “0”. For example, when the enemy soldier (HP) is added 10 times, the enemy soldier (HP) is set to be reduced by “10”. At the time of SR entry (initial value), the HP counter is set to “200”. Each time the additional number is determined, the enemy military power (HP) is subtracted by the additional number. As described above, the additional counter of the address “F02D (H)” indicates the number of additional games in the SR, and the enemy military power (HP) is subtracted by the additional number of games added here. Therefore, for example, when the additional number becomes “x” during SR,
Additional counter value = + x
GS counter value = + x
HP counter value = 200−x
It becomes.
However, when the additional counter is larger than the remaining value of the HP counter, the above formula does not apply.
For example,
When the additional counter value is “50” under the condition of the HP counter “20”, “20” is added to the GS counter, and the HP counter becomes “0”. In the present embodiment, when the HP counter reaches “0”, “100” is further added to the GS counter.

This enemy force (HP) is always displayed as an image in the main game states 3 and 5. For example, when the HP counter is “150”, “150/200” or the like is displayed as an image display. On the other hand, in other main game states, the enemy military power (HP) is not displayed as an image. For example, in the main game state 6, it is clear that the enemy soldier power (HP) has become “0”. Instead, the image display area can be effectively used by displaying other information or the like in the image area where the enemy military power (HP) has been displayed as an image.
The HP counter is configured not to be cleared by a transition from the main game state 3 to the main game state 5. In other words, after the transition from the main gaming state 3 to the main gaming state 5, when the transition is made to the main gaming state 3 again, the HP counter at the transition from the main gaming state 3 to the main gaming state 5 is maintained. For example, when the HP counter is “60”, the main game state 3 shifts to the main game state 5 and the main game state 5 wins the SR lottery, or the main game state 5 wins 1 BBA (C bonus). Then, after shifting to the SR lottery, the HP counter is started from the status of “60” when the main game state 3 is entered. With this configuration, as will be described later, the HP counter in the main gaming state 3 in one area can be limited to “200” at the maximum (the value of the GS counter can be limited to “300”). Become.

  The area counter (_CT_AREA) of the address “F032 (H)” counts the number of stays in the main gaming state 8. When the main gaming state 8 ends, “1” is added, and when the count value is “1” to “3”, the state shifts to the main gaming state 3 (SR). On the other hand, when the count value becomes “4”, the main game state 9 (final battle) is entered.

  The SR guarantee extra counter (_CT_SRSC_ADD) of the address “F033 (H)” stores the minimum extra guarantee game count in the SR, and is set to “30” in the present embodiment. Therefore, when shifting to SR, even when the above-mentioned SR guaranteed game number counter becomes “0”, the additional number (additional counter value) in SR is “30” or more which is the SR guaranteed additional counter value. Otherwise, SR will not end. Therefore, in SR, the added number is at least 30 games or more.

  The SR fall avoidance counter (_CT_SRDW_AVD) of the address “F034 (H)” is a counter that stores the number of games for which the fall (end) lottery in SR is postponed. In the present embodiment, the addition during SR is conditional on winning the winning number that allows the above-described two symbols to be stopped, but for rare roles (such as chances) that do not have a setting difference during SR. When winning, an SR fall avoidance counter is added to give the player the benefit of increasing the number of games during SR. In the present embodiment, when a rare combination other than the conditional device that can stop the double symbols is won, “1” is added to the SR fall avoidance counter.

  Therefore, in the SR of the present embodiment, SR fall avoidance is provided on the condition that the number of games is “8” or more which is the SR guaranteed number of games and the additional number is “30” or more which is the SR guaranteed addition number. The counter is decremented by “1” every game. When the SR fall avoidance counter reaches “0”, the SR fall lottery is executed at the time of pushing order replay winning. When the SR fall avoidance counter is “0” from the beginning, the SR fall lottery is started on the condition that the number of games is “8” or more and the additional number is “30” or more. When the SR fall lottery is won, “2” is stored in the fall flag of the address “F02B (H)” described above. When “2” is stored in the fall flag, SR is terminated in the game, and the main game state 5 or 6 is entered. Not only the SR fall avoidance counter is decremented by “1” every game, but also the number of games is “8” or more which is the number of SR guaranteed games, and the additional number is “30” or more which is the SR guaranteed number of additions. Then, “1” may be subtracted on condition that the winning number for executing the SR falling lottery is won.

  Addresses “F035 (H)” to “F039 (H)” (_NB_ADD_ARY0 to _NB_ADD_ARY4) are five storage areas for storing the added arrays. If “F035 (H)” is 0th and “F039 (H)” is 4th, the 0th is the storage area for storing the newest data. During SR (more precisely, during ART), the game and data are updated. Data is updated by discarding the oldest data and adding one latest data. At this time, the data is shifted. “Shift data” means, for example, that when data “1” is stored at address “F035 (H)”, data “1” is stored at address “F036 (H)” in the next game. It is.

In the present embodiment, the value corresponding to the five additional numbers is determined by lottery when the ART (SR) is first hit. As shown in FIG. 40, the number of additions includes seven types of “5”, “10”, “20”, “30”, “50”, “100”, and “200”. In this embodiment, “0” is not selected as the additional number.
A value corresponding to the number of additions is determined in advance. For example, the value corresponding to the additional number “5” is “1”. Further, the expected value of the extra number selected in the lottery is about “10”. Then, at the beginning of SR, values corresponding to the five additional numbers are determined. Here, for example, “3 (addition number: 20)”, “2 (addition number: 10)”, “5 (addition number: 50)”, “4 (addition number: 30)”, “2 ( It is assumed that the number of additions is 10) ”. In this case,
F035 (H): 2 (additional number: 10)
F036 (H): 4 (additional number: 30)
F037 (H): 5 (additional number: 50)
F038 (H): 2 (additional number: 10)
F039 (H): 3 (additional number: 20)
Remember.

In addition, as will be described in detail later, if the winning number that can stop the double symbol during SR is won, the additional number of the double symbols that can be stopped is determined by lottery from the already selected additional number. To do.
For example, in the case where it is stored as described above, when a winning number that can stop two consecutive symbols is won, two additional numbers are determined by lottery. It is assumed that “4” (addition number: 30) of “F036 (H)” and “2” (addition number: 10) of “F038 (H)” are selected in this lottery. In this case, since the total number of additions in the game is “40”, “40” is added to the above-described addition counter, “40” is added to the GS counter, and “40” is added from the HP counter. Subtract.
Then, the value is updated so as to clear the value corresponding to the determined addition number. In the above example,
F035 (H): 2
F036 (H): 0
F037 (H): 5
F038 (H): 0
F039 (H): 3
Update to

Next, the value of “F039 (H)” that stores the oldest value is cleared, and the value of the previous address is stored as “address value + 1”. That is, each value of the address is shifted by “1” so as to be stored in “address value + 1”.
Thus, in the above example,
F035 (H): 0
F036 (H): 2
F037 (H): 0
F038 (H): 5
F039 (H): 0
It becomes.

Next, the value to be stored at the address where the data is “0” is determined by lottery. Here, when the additional number is determined during SR and the data is discarded, a value of “4” (the additional number “30”) or more is selected by lottery. Therefore, for example, “F039 (H)” and “F037 (H)” (addresses obtained by adding “1” to the address where the data is cleared because the number of additions is determined during SR) are changed to “4” ( When the number of additions is “30”) and “5” (the addition number is “50”),
F035 (H): 0
F036 (H): 2
F037 (H): 5
F038 (H): 5
F039 (H): 4
Updated to
Furthermore, since the value stored at the address “F035 (H)” (value to be updated every game) is determined by lottery, for example, when “1” is determined by this lottery,
F035 (H): 1
F036 (H): 2
F037 (H): 5
F038 (H): 5
F039 (H): 4
Updated to

Even if the winning number that can stop the two symbols in this game is not won, in the next game, the data of the address “F039 (H)” is cleared and the value of each address is changed to the address. Shift to “F039 (H)” by “1”. Take the above as an example:
F035 (H): 2
F036 (H): 4
F037 (H): 5
F038 (H): 2
F039 (H): 3
The
F035 (H): 0
F036 (H): 2
F037 (H): 4
F038 (H): 5
F039 (H): 2
Update to
Then, a value to be stored in “F035 (H)” is determined by lottery. For example, when “1” (addition number 5) is selected in this lottery,
F035 (H): 1
F036 (H): 2
F037 (H): 4
F038 (H): 5
F039 (H): 2
Updated to

There are two other examples.
(Example 1)
F035 (H): 1
F036 (H): 2
F037 (H): 4
F038 (H): 5
F039 (H): 2
In the case where the winning number that can stop one double symbol is won and “2” of the address “F039 (H)”, that is, the additional number “10” is selected, the address “F039 ( H) ”will be cleared.
F035 (H): 1
F036 (H): 2
F037 (H): 4
F038 (H): 5
F039 (H): 0
Updated to

And at the end of the game, if the data of each address is shifted to the address of “address value + 1”,
F035 (H): 0
F036 (H): 1
F037 (H): 2
F038 (H): 4
F039 (H): 5
Updated to
Next, since a new value is determined by lottery for the address “F035 (H)” based on the selection of the additional number, a value equal to or greater than “4” (the additional number 30) is selected. Here, when “5” (additional number 50) is selected,
F035 (H): 5
F036 (H): 1
F037 (H): 2
F038 (H): 4
F039 (H): 5
Updated to

(Example 2)
F035 (H): 1
F036 (H): 2
F037 (H): 4
F038 (H): 5
F039 (H): 2
In this case, when a winning number that allows three double symbols is selected, all five additional numbers are acquired. Therefore, the total number of additions is “10 + 50 + 30 + 1 + 5 = 55”. In addition, the superposition array is
F035 (H): 0
F036 (H): 0
F037 (H): 0
F038 (H): 0
F039 (H): 0
Updated to
In this case, in the next game, all five values are determined by lottery. Further, when cleared because it has been selected as an additional number, as described above, “4” (additional number 30) or more is selected. For example, “4” (additional number 30), “5” ( When the number of additions is 50), “6” (100 additions), “5” (50 additions), and “4” (30 additions),
F035 (H): 4
F036 (H): 5
F037 (H): 6
F038 (H): 5
F039 (H): 4
Updated to

The M destruction counter (_CT_MX_DFT) of the address “F03A (H)” stores the number of sets in the main gaming state 9. When transitioning to the main game state 9 for the first time, “0” is set as the M destruction counter, and the GS counter value “20” is set. Then, every game, the GS counter value is decremented by “1”, and when the GS counter value becomes “0”, that is, when the continuation condition of the main game state 9 is satisfied at the time of 20 game digestion (M described later) When the continuation flag is “1”), “1” is added to the M destruction counter.
The upper limit value of the M destruction counter is set to “9”. That is, when one set of 20 games is repeated 10 times (when 200 games have been consumed in total), it is determined that the end condition of the main game state 9 is satisfied, and the main game state 10 is entered. When the end condition of the main game state 9 is satisfied, the M defeat counter value is cleared.

The M continuation flag (_FL_MX_CTN) of the address “F03B (H)” draws whether or not the continuation condition of the main game state 9 is satisfied within the 20 games in the main game state 9, and wins the lottery. Is a flag in which “1” is stored. In the main gaming state 9, when the GS counter value is “0” and the M continuation flag is “1”, it is determined that the continuation condition of the main gaming state 9 is satisfied, and the GS counter value is set to “20” again. "Is set. In this case, the M continuation flag is cleared.
In the present embodiment, the M continuation flag lottery is set so that when the following winning number is won, the winning probability shown below is won (the M continuation flag is updated to “1”). Yes.
Winning numbers “20” to “22”: Winning probability 50%
Winning numbers “44” to “46”: Winning probability 80%
Winning number “58” to “65”: Winning probability 100%
Winning number “86”: Winning probability 5%

In particular, when the winning number “19” is won in the main game state 9, the fact that the right first stop should be made and that the two symbols should be aimed is output as an effect. When winning number “19” is won, the double symbol does not stop as described above. In addition, the effect that should be the first stop right and aim at the double symbols is an effect that is performed only by the sub-control board 80 (display that is not output on the main control board 50), as described above.
On the other hand, when winning numbers “20” to “22” are won, a lottery with a winning probability of 50% is performed as described above. Output what should be aimed at. In this case, the double symbol stops. When the two symbols are stopped, the stop control effect by the bound stop is executed as described above. Furthermore, the main game state 9, that is, the effect that means that the final battle is continued for 20 games is output.

In the main game state 9, when the M continuation flag lottery is won, the M continuation flag lottery may not be performed in the set. When the M continuation flag lottery is not performed, even if the winning numbers “20” to “22” are won, an effect that the right first stop should be aimed and that the two symbols should be aimed is not output. To do.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lottery of the M continuation flag may be continued even after winning the lottery of the M continuation flag. When the M continuation flag is won again, the value of the M continuation flag is updated from “1” to “2”. Then, at the end of the set, the value of the M continuation flag is updated from “2” to “1”. In this way, the M continuation flag can be stocked.
Alternatively, when the M continuation flag is “n”, it is also possible to set “20 × n” to the GS counter value and update the M continuation flag to “0” in the next set.

The battle introduction counter (_CT_BTL_INTR) of the address “F03C (H)” is a counter for storing the transition to the main game state 7 (M battle). It becomes “1” when Also, when the main game state 7 is entered, it is cleared.
The battle end flag (_CT_BTL_END) of the address “F03D (H)” is a flag that becomes “1” when the end condition of the main game state 7 (M battle) is satisfied.
Also, when the main game state 8 is entered, it is cleared.

The BB internal medium flag (_FL_BBCND_HIT) of the address “F03E (H)” is a flag that becomes “1” when 1BB is won, and in other words, a flag indicating that the BB is operating. When 1BB is not activated, it is “0”.
In the present embodiment, the game won 1BB does not store “1” in the flag but stores “1” at the start of the next game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and “1” may be stored in a game won in 1BB (for example, immediately after winning or at the end of the game).

The push order instruction number (_NB_ORD_INF) of the address “F03F (H)” is an area for storing the push order instruction number. In this embodiment, when the replay A group, the B group, the C group, and the small role A group are elected, a favorable pushing order (correct pushing order) is assigned to the player, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, A push order instruction number corresponding to the winning number is acquired and stored at this address.
Note that “when a predetermined condition is satisfied” refers to a state in which a push order is instructed, that is, an instruction function operation game. Therefore, in the push order instruction state, the push order instruction number is acquired and stored in the address of the RWM 53. However, when it is not in the push order instruction state, acquisition of the push order instruction number and storage in the RWM 53 are not executed.

The effect group number (_NB_ACT_GRP) of the address “F040 (H)” is a number transmitted to the sub control board 80, and is a number that the sub control board 80 uses for the effect output.
As shown in FIGS. 11 to 16, the production group number is a value from “0” to “37”. In the present embodiment, when a winning number is drawn, an effect group number corresponding to the winning number is selected and stored in this address.

  The winning (small role) and replay condition device number (_NB_CND_NOR) of the address “F044 (H)” is an area for storing the winning and replay condition device number, and this memory is stored after the winning number is drawn. In the area, a winning and replay condition device number corresponding to the winning number is stored. The value stored here is used for selection of a stop position determination table used for stop control of the reel 31, selection of an advantageous section or ART lottery (and addition), production group number, and the like. The storage area of the winning and replay condition device number of the address “F044 (H)” is a storage area of the condition device number that does not carry the winning information to the next game.

  On the other hand, the accessory condition device number (_NB_CND_BNS) of the address “F045 (H)” is an area for storing the accessory (1BB) condition device number that can carry the winning information. When no object is won, “0”, “1” when 1BBA is won, “2” when 1BBB is won, and so on are stored (see FIG. 17). Similarly to the above, this value is also used for selection of a stop position determination table used for stop control of the reel 31, selection of advantageous sections, ART lottery (addition), production group number, and the like.

The RT state number (_NB_RT_STS) of the address “F046 (H)” is a storage area for storing the RT state number. In this embodiment, the RT state has “0” (non-RT) to “4” (RT4), and stores data indicating which RT is the current RT.
The acquirable number (_CT_BIG_PAY) of the addresses “F047 (H)” and “F048 (H)” at the time of BB operation is a storage area for storing the maximum number of medals that can be obtained in 1BB game. A predetermined value is set as an initial value at the start of the 1BB game. Specifically, although details will be described later, “92 (D)” is stored when 1 BBA is operated, “349 (D)” is stored when 1 BBB is operated, and “61 (D)” is stored when 1 BBC or 1 BBD is operated. Each time a medal is paid out, the stored value is subtracted. For example, at the start of 1BBA game, “92 (D)” is stored in the address, and the number of medals is subtracted every time a medal is paid out. When the address value becomes “0”, 1BBA game It is determined that the end condition of is satisfied.
The acquired number counter at the time of 1BB operation counts the range from “0” to “349 (D)” at the time of 1BBB operation, so the address “F047 (H)” (lower 8 bits) and “ F048 (H) ”(upper 8 bits) is used, but when 1BBA, 1BBC, or 1BBD is activated, the range from“ 0 ”to“ 255 (D) ”or less is counted, so the 1-byte address“ F047 ( H) "only.

The operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) of the address “F049 (H)” is an area for storing data of the operation state flag. In this embodiment, the replay is D0 bit, RB is D2 bit, 1BB is D3 bit, SB is assigned to the D5 bit.
For example, when the replay is won, the replay is activated, and the D0 bit is set to “1” when the game state is set (FIG. 52 described later). The D0 bit is changed from “1” to “0” when the game by replay is completed.
In addition, when 1BB wins, the operation state of 1BB and the operation state of RB are set, and when the gaming state is set, the D2 bit and the D3 bit are set to “1”. When the end condition of 1BB is satisfied, the D2 bit and the D3 bit are “0”.
When the SB wins, the SB is activated and the D5 bit is set to “1” when the gaming state is set. Then, it is set to “0” at the end of the SB game.

  The symbol combination display flag (_FL_WIN) of the address “F04A (H)” is an area for storing the symbol combination display flag. In this embodiment, the D0 bit is replayed, the D3 bit is 1BB, and the D5 bit is SB. Assigned. The assignment of these bits is the same as the operating state flag described above. For example, when it is determined that the replay symbol has stopped (when winning), the D0 bit is set to “1”. The bit is changed from “1” to “0” when the start switch 41 of the next game is operated.

The operation type (_WK_ACT_KND) of the address “F04B (H)” is a flag for determining one of 1BBA to 1BBD when 1BB operates. In each case, a predetermined value is stored according to the activated 1BB. Since the waiting time at the start and end of 1BB is set for each type of 1BB, the operation type is referred to when setting the standby time.
The advantageous section display flag (_FL_ADV_LED) of the address “F04C (H)” is a flag which is “1” when the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit and “0” when the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off. When the advantageous section is won and the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, this flag is updated to “1”. As a result, the advantageous section display flag is referred to during subsequent interrupt processing, and when it is “1”, the advantageous section display LED 77 is controlled to be lit.

  The medal management flag (_FL_MEDAL_STS) of the address “F04D (H)” is an area for mainly storing a flag for controlling turning on / off of a status display LED (not shown in FIG. 1). In the medal management flag, the D0 bit indicates the start switch 41 receiving state, and when the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted, that is, when the start switch 41 is operable (for example, a state before a bet is placed and a game is started). ) Is set to “1”, and is set to “0” when the operation of the start switch 41 cannot be accepted (for example, while the reel 31 is rotating).

The blocker state of the D2 bit is data that is “1” when the blocker 45 is on, and is “0” when it is off. By determining the value of this D2 bit, it is possible to determine what state the current blocker 45 is in (on or off).
The D3-bit replay display LED is data that is set to “1” when a replay is displayed and a medal is automatically inserted as a replay. When this data is “1”, the replay display LED of the status display LEDs is lit. Further, the data is set to “0” when the game by re-game is finished. When this data is “0”, the replay display LED is turned off.

  The D4-bit effect display LED is data that is set to “1” when the settlement switch 46 is operated to settle a bet medal and / or a stored medal. When this data is “1”, the effect display LED of the status display LEDs is lit. Further, the data is set to “0” when the settlement of the medal to be settled is completed.

  In the present embodiment, for example, when the replay is not won, and when the settlement switch is operated in a situation where there is a bet medal ("1" or more) and a storage medal ("1" or more) The bet medals are targeted for settlement, and the effect display LED is lit when the bet medals are being settled, but the bet medals and the stored medals are formed for settlement. In the case where the bet medals or the stored medals are settled, it is preferably formed to be set to “1” (so that the effect display LED lights up). As described above, when a bet medal is obtained by an automatic bet process by replay, the bet medal is not targeted for settlement. In other words, after the replay is won, when the settlement switch is operated in a situation where there is a bet medal and there is no stored medal, the medal settlement is not executed.

  The D6 bit setting change disable flag is data that is “0” when the setting can be changed, and is “1” otherwise. In this embodiment, the data is set to “1” when the start switch 41 is operated and the game is advanced, and is set to “0” when the medal acceptance of the next game is started. . When the setting is changed, the value of the setting change permission flag is referred to. When the setting change disable flag is “1”, the setting change is not permitted. However, even if the setting change disable flag is “1”, if it is determined that the error cannot be recovered (for example, random number update abnormality determined for each interrupt process), the setting change is permitted and the setting change is not allowed. Based on this, it becomes possible to cancel the unrecoverable error.

  The D7-bit medal limit setting determination is data that is “1” when the bet medal number has reached the medal limit number (specified number), and “0” when it has not reached the medal limit number. In the present embodiment, the limit number (specified number) is set to 2 only for 1 BBA game (RBA operation), and 3 for the other. Therefore, for example, in normal games, when the number of bet medals is 0, 1, or 2, the medal limit number is not reached, so it is “0”. When the number is 3, the medal limit number is reached. “1”.

Addresses “F051 (H)” to “F056 (H)” are assigned to storage areas for storing timer values among the storage areas of the RWM 53 of this embodiment.
The storage area of the timer value of this embodiment has a 1-byte timer storage area and a 2-byte timer storage area. The addresses of all the 1-byte timer storage areas are arranged so as to be continuous. Similarly, the addresses of all the 2-byte timer storage areas are arranged so as to be continuous. Further, the 2-byte timer storage area has a 1-byte storage area for storing the lower digits and a 1-byte storage area for storing the upper digits, and the addresses of these two 1-byte storage areas are consecutive. Yes.

As described above, the 2-byte timer storage area is not arranged between the two 1-byte timer storage areas. Similarly, a 1-byte timer storage area is not arranged between two 2-byte timer storage areas.
Note that, in the address of the 2-byte timer storage area in the present embodiment, the smaller address value indicates the lower digit address, and the address obtained by adding “1” to the lower digit address value indicates the upper digit address. For example, in the 2-byte timer in the waiting period (_TM2_WAIT), the address “F053 (H)” is a lower digit storage area, and the address “F054 (H)” is an upper digit storage area.

  The addresses of the storage areas for storing the timer values are arranged consecutively (so as to be serial numbers) from “F051 (H)” to “F056 (H)”. The leading address “F051 (H)” is the reference address in the first embodiment. The meaning of “reference address” will be described later.

The reference address starts from a 1-byte timer storage area, and after two 1-byte timer storage areas are continuously arranged, two 2-byte timer storage areas are continuously arranged.
In the present embodiment, for simplification of description, as illustrated in FIG. 41, two are illustrated as 1-byte timers and two are illustrated as 2-byte timers. However, in practice, more one-byte timers and two-byte timers are provided, and it does not mean that the timers are limited to the timers shown in FIG.
All timer values are subtracted (updated) during timer measurement of interrupt processing (step S605 in FIG. 63), which will be described later. That is, “1” is subtracted for each interrupt.
Here, even when the interrupt process of FIG. 63 is executed, if the power interruption is detected in step S619, the timer measurement in step S605 does not proceed, so the timer value is always “1” during the interrupt process. It is not always subtracted (updated). Therefore, in this specification, each timer value is described as “subtracting”, but actually means “subtractable” and always means “subtract” in any case. Not what you want.
As described above, by continuously arranging storage areas for storing timer values, it is possible to sequentially update all timer values in a simple manner by timer measurement (FIG. 64) described later.

In addition, in the MPU (1-chip microprocessor) instruction of this embodiment, subtraction processing can be performed with one instruction even with a 2-byte timer. The 2-byte timer subtraction process is programmed as follows.
“0100 (H)” → “1” subtraction → “00FF (H)”
“0001 (H)” → “1” subtraction → “0000 (H)”
“0000 (H)” → “1” subtraction → “0000 (H)”
Similarly, the 1-byte timer
"10 (H)"->"1"subtraction->"0F(H)"
“01 (H)” → “1” subtraction → “00 (H)”
“00 (H)” → “1” subtraction → “00 (H)”
It becomes.

In other words, when a carry occurs due to the subtraction process, it is “0000 (H)” (in the case of 2 bytes) or “00 (H)” (in the case of 1 byte).
Here, it is determined whether the value stored in the address to be subtracted is “0000 (H)” or “00 (H)”, and is “0000 (H)” or “00 (H)”. In some cases, the program may be such that the subtraction process is not executed. In this case, it is necessary to determine whether or not “0000 (H)” or “00 (H)” and to determine whether or not to perform subtraction processing according to the determination result. .
On the other hand, when a carry occurs (as in this embodiment), if the value is “0000 (H)” or “00 (H)”, the value before the calculation is “0000 (H)”. Alternatively, the timer value can be updated by the same subtraction process regardless of whether it is “00 (H)”, so that the program capacity can be simplified.

  The monitoring time (_TM1_BLOFF_CHK) of the blocker OFF of the address “F051 (H)” is set when the passage sensor 43a rises (when a medal is detected by the passage sensor 43a), and is used for waiting when the blocker 45 is turned off from on. This is an area for storing the timer value. When the rising data of the passage sensor 43a is detected, “144 (D)” (“90 (H)” in hexadecimal) is set as an initial value, and “1” is subtracted for each interrupt. Until this value becomes “0”, the blocker 45 is not turned off from on. As described above, the blocker 45 is not turned off from on-off for a certain period of time after the passage sensor 43a detects the medal, so that the medal is prevented from being caught between the medal selector and the blocker 45 (as a result, a medal retention error or the like). Is to prevent).

  The blocker on-time monitoring time (_TM1_BLON_CHK) of the address “F052 (H)” is set when the passage sensor 43a rises, and is an area for storing a timer value for standby when the blocker 45 is turned on from off. When the rising data of the passage sensor 43a is detected, “45 (D)” (“2D (H)” in hexadecimal) is set as an initial value, and “1” is subtracted by one for each interrupt. Until this value becomes “0”, the blocker 45 is not turned on from off. As described above, the reason why the blocker 45 is not turned on for a predetermined time after the passage sensor 43a detects the medal is to prevent the medal from being caught between the medal selector and the blocker 45 as described above. is there.

Furthermore, there is a difference between the waiting time when the blocker 45 is turned off from “on” (“145” interrupt) and the waiting time when the blocker 45 is turned on from “off” (“46” interrupt). This is because the time required to turn off is longer than the time required for the blocker 45 to turn on from off.
Although not illustrated in the present embodiment, when the blocker 45 is turned on from off, it is attracted by the magnetic force of the magnet. On the other hand, when the blocker 45 is turned off from on, it is due to an action of releasing with a spring. As described above, this is based on the difference between the time for turning on from off and the time for turning off from on due to the difference in power used.

The waiting time (_TM2_WAIT) of addresses “F053 (H)” and “F054 (H)” is a storage area for storing the waiting time at the start of 1BB game and the end of 1BB game. In the present embodiment, a waiting time at the start and end of the 1BB game is provided for each type of 1BB, and during this waiting time, control is performed so as to output an effect that matches the waiting time.
When the 1BB symbol combination stops on the active line, a predetermined waiting time is stored, and thereafter, “1” is subtracted for each interrupt process. Then, when the value becomes “0”, the standby time at the start of 1BB ends.
At the end of 1BB game, a predetermined waiting time is stored, and thereafter, “1” is subtracted for each interrupt process. Then, when the value becomes “0”, the waiting time at the end of 1BB ends.
During the waiting time, the game does not progress.

  The game standby display start time (_TM2_BACK_OFF) of the addresses “F055 (H)” and “F056 (H)” is an area for storing a timer value for measuring the standby time until the game standby display is performed. An initial value is set in order to count the number of interruptions “26846” at the game start setting described later (step S101 in FIG. 52). Note that the game standby display start time of the present embodiment is set to “about 60 seconds” (26846 × 2.235 ms≈60 seconds).

When the game standby display start time becomes “0”, the value of acquired number data (not shown) stored in the RWM 53 is cleared. As a result, “00” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. For example, even if the number of medals paid out in the previous game is “10” and the player pays out by operating the checkout switch 46 and ends the game, “00” is displayed after about one minute. Is done. Thereby, it has the effect that a vacant stand can be reduced by being able to recognize a hall clerk and another player as a vacant stand.
The acquired number display LED 78 after the game standby display start time elapses is not limited to “00” but may be “* 0” or “**”. Here, “*” indicates light extinction.

Next, the transition of the main game state will be described more specifically based on the above-described main game state transition diagram of FIG. 35 and the main game state change conditions shown in FIGS.
In FIGS. 36 to 39, when the 1BB condition device is operated, that is, when 1BB is won, it is assumed that the game state shifts to the main game states 11 to 13 except for the case of shifting to the waiting section.
36 to 39, “section type number” indicates the number of the advantageous section type of the address “F021 (H)” in FIG.
Of the main game states 0 to 13, the main one is the main game state 0. The main game state 0 is a main game state when an accessory is not operating and in a normal section (non-advantage section, non-AT).

(Starting condition of main game state 0)
(1) As shown in FIG. 36, when the RWM is initialized, it starts from the main gaming state 0. The range at the time of initialization of the RWM 53 includes the address “F020 (H)” in FIG. Therefore, after initialization of the RWM 53, the value of the address “F020 (H)” is “0”.
(2) Even after the setting is changed, the value of the address “F020 (H)” is cleared (becomes “0”) as in the initialization of the RWM 53. Therefore, it starts from the main gaming state 0.
(3) Furthermore, when the above-described advantageous section clear counter (addresses “F022 (H)” and “F023 (H)”) is “0”, the start condition of the main gaming state 0 is satisfied. Further, after the transition to the advantageous section, when the advantageous section clear counter becomes “0” and the maximum instruction generation flag (address “F028 (H)”) is “1”, the termination condition of the advantageous section is satisfied. . Note that, as described above, all except the main game state 0 are advantageous sections in this embodiment.
In the following description, various transition conditions from another main gaming state to the main gaming state 0 are exemplified, but when the maximum instruction generation flag is “0”, the transition to the main gaming state 0 may occur. The maximum instruction generation flag is “1” in order to shift to the main gaming state 0. In the following description, when the transition condition to the main game state 0 is satisfied, the condition that “the maximum instruction generation flag is“ 1 ”” is omitted.

(4) When the SR winning counter is “0” and the fall flag is “1” in the main gaming state 1 (high probability, advantageous section), the main gaming state 0 is entered. In the main game state 1, when neither the bonus nor the SR is won, and when the winning lottery in the game period of the main game state 1 is won, the main game state 1 is ended and the main game state 0 is shifted to.
(5) In the main game state 5 (T defeat battle), when the GS counter becomes “0”, the ART end condition is satisfied and the state shifts to the main game state 0.
As described above, the GS counter is set or added in the main game state 3 (SR), and this value becomes the number of games of ART. During ART, every game, the GS counter is decremented by “1”.

(6) In the main game state 7 (M battle), when the SR winning counter is “0”, the single shot counter is “0”, the continuous shot counter is “0”, and the battle end flag is “1”, Since the end condition of ART is satisfied, the game state shifts to the main game state 0. In the main game state 8 (M decisive battle), the number of games is determined on the basis of the single shot counter and the continuous shot counter. The counter value of the single shot counter is the number of games. Further, when the continuous hitting counter is “1” or more, it corresponds to one game in the main gaming state 7 (M final battle). When the single shot counter is “0” and the continuous shot counter is “0”, the battle end flag is “1”, which satisfies the end condition of the main game state 7.
(7) In the main game state 9 (final battle), when the GS counter is “0” and the M continuation flag is “0”, the ART end condition is satisfied, and the state shifts to the main game state 0. On the other hand, in the main gaming state 9, when the continuation lottery is won before the GS counter becomes “0” and the M continuation flag becomes “1”, the main gaming state 0 is not shifted.

(8) In the main game state 10 (ending), when the GS counter becomes “0”, the end condition of the main game state 10 is satisfied and the state shifts to the main game state 0. When the GS counter is “0” in the main game state 10 (ending), it is when the number of games in the advantageous section has reached “1500” (upper limit value).
(9) In the main gaming state 11 (mission bonus), a transition lottery to SR is performed during 1 BBA gaming. At the end of 1BBA operation (when the number of medals earned reaches the upper limit in 1BBA game), if SR is not won, that is, if the SR win counter is “0”, transition to main game state 0 To do.

(Termination condition for main game state 0)
(1) In the main game state 0, the result of the advantageous section transition lottery is “1” (meaning that the advantageous section is won. The same applies hereinafter), the small role E to G condition device is not activated (non-winning), 1BBA condition device At the time of operation (winning) and 1BBA operation symbol non-display (at the time of non-winning), the main game state 0 remains as it is, but the section type number is “2”, that is, shifts to the standby section. This situation corresponds to the winning numbers “58” to “62”.
(2) In the main gaming state 0, the result of the advantageous section transition lottery is “1”, the small role E to G condition device is not activated (non-winning), the 1BBB condition device is activated (winning), and the 1BBB operation symbol is not displayed (not displayed) At the time of winning), the main game state 0 remains as it is, but the section type number is “2”, that is, shifts to the waiting section. This situation corresponds to winning numbers “66” to “75”.
(3) In the main gaming state 0, when the result of the advantageous section transition lottery is “1” and the 1BB condition device is not activated (non-winning), the main gaming state 1 (high probability) (section type number “1”) Transition. This situation corresponds to the time of winning the small roles E to G with the winning numbers “44” to “46”.

(4) In the main game state 0, when the result of the advantageous section transition lottery is “1”, the small role E to G condition device operation (winning), and the 1BBA condition device operation (winning), the main game state 11 (section type) Number "1").
As described above, in FIGS. 36 to 39, the description will be made on the assumption that the main gaming state shifts when the 1BB condition device is actuated (when winning) except when shifting to the waiting section. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is a matter of course that the main gaming state may be shifted when the 1BB operation symbol is displayed (winning).
(5) In the main game state 0, when the result of the advantageous section transition lottery is “1”, the small role E to G condition device is not activated (non-winning), 1BBA condition device is activated (winning), and 1BBA operation symbol is displayed, When 1BBA wins in a game won by 1BBA, the game shifts to the main game state 11 (section type number “1”) without shifting to the waiting section.
(6) In the main game state 0, when the result of the advantageous section transition lottery is “1”, 1BBB condition device operation (winning), and 1BBB operation symbol display, transition to the main game state 13 (section type number “1”) To do.

(Main gaming state 0 and waiting section start condition)
(1) In the main game state 0, the result of the advantageous section transition lottery is “1”, the small role E to G condition device is not activated (non-winning), the 1BB condition device is activated (winning), and the 1BB operation symbol is not displayed (not displayed) At the time of winning), the main game state 0 remains as it is, but the section type number is “2”, that is, shifts to the waiting section.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 17, when the 1BBA and the small roles E to G are simultaneously selected (the winning numbers “63” to “65”), the small portion E to G condition device is not operated ( It is a condition that it is not elected.
(Main game state 0 and waiting section end condition)
(1) When the 1BBA operation symbol is displayed, the waiting section is ended and the state shifts to the main gaming state 11 (mission bonus) (section type number “1”).
(2) When the 1BBB operation symbol is displayed, the waiting section is ended and the state shifts to the main gaming state 13 (section type number “1”).

(Starting condition of main game state 1)
(1) In the main game state 0, the main game state 1 is started when the result of the advantageous section transition lottery is “1” and the 1BB condition device is not activated (not elected). This situation corresponds to, for example, a case where a special combination (1BB) is not won but a rare combination (for example, any one of winning numbers “44” to “46”) is won.
(2) In the main game state 11 (mission bonus) or 13 (bonus), when the main game state buffer is “1” at the end of the 1BB operation, the main game state 1 is entered. This situation corresponds to the case where the main game state before the start of the 1BB game is the main game state 1.

  (3) In the main gaming state 11 (mission bonus) or 13 (bonus), when the main gaming state buffer is “0” and the SR winning counter is “1” at the end of 1BB operation, the main gaming state 1 is set. Transition. This situation corresponds to a case where 1BB is won in the main gaming state 0 (normal) and SR is won during the 1BB game. In particular, in a 1BBA game, an SR lottery is performed (this will be described later).

(Termination condition for main gaming state 1)
(1) When the SR winning counter is “0” and the fall flag is “1”, the main game state 1 is terminated and the state shifts to the main game state 0 (section type number “0”). In this situation, after winning the advantageous section and shifting to the main game state 1, the number of guaranteed games in the main game state 1 is consumed without winning the SR, and the winning lottery for staying in the main game state 1 is won. It corresponds to when.
(2) In the main gaming state 1, when the SR winning counter is “1” and the RT variation symbol is displayed, the state shifts to the main gaming state 8 (episode). This situation corresponds to winning 1BBA in the main gaming state 1, winning SR in the 1BBA game (SR winning counter is “1”), and returning to the main gaming state 1 after the end of the 1BBA game.

In the present embodiment, it is set so as to pass through the main game state 8 (episode) before the execution of SR (main game state 3). Since the main game state 8 (episode) is executed at RT1, for example, if RT2 is staying, when the replay 09 or 12 wins, it shifts to the main game state 8. In this case, a combination of symbols constituting the replay 09 or 12 corresponds to the “RT variation symbol” described above.
Although the probability is low, when SB is won and SB wins, it shifts to non-RT. This case also corresponds to “RT fluctuation symbol display”. In other words, the combination of symbols constituting the SB (the role number “005”) also corresponds to the “RT variation symbol”. Therefore, in this case, the main gaming states 8 and 3 are executed in the non-RT.
Hereinafter, in the description of FIGS. 37 to 39, “RT variation symbol” includes both replay 09 or 12 for shifting to RT1 and SB shifting to non-RT.

(3) In the main game state 1, when the advantageous section clear counter becomes less than “44”, the main game state 1 is ended and the state shifts to the main game state 10 (ending).
(4) In the main gaming state 1, the SR winning counter is “0” (SR non-winning), and when the 1BBA condition device is activated (winning), the main gaming state 11 is entered.
(5) In the main gaming state 1, the SR winning counter is “0”, and when the 1BBB-1BBD condition device is activated (during winning), the main gaming state 13 is entered.

(Starting condition of main game state 2 (ART preparation))
(1) In the main game state 12 (C bonus) or 13 (bonus), when the 1BB operation ends and the main game state buffer exceeds “1”, the state shifts to the main game state 2. As shown in FIG. 35, this is because the accessory condition device (any one of 1BBA to 1BBD) is activated during the ART, and when the operation is completed, the main game state 2 (ART preparation) is passed.

(End condition of main game state 2 (ART preparation))
(1) When the main game state buffer is “3” and the RT variation symbol is displayed, the state shifts to the main game state 3 (SR). This situation corresponds to that the accessory condition device (any one of 1BBA to 1BBD) operates in the main game state 3 (SR), and returns to the main game state 3 before the accessory condition operation after the operation ends.
(2) When the main game state buffer is “7” (M battle) or “8” (after the episode or M battle is won) and the area counter is less than “4”, when the RT variation symbol is displayed Shifts to the main gaming state 3. When the main game state is 7 (M decisive battle) or 8 (after episode or M decisive battle win), the 1BB condition device operates, and when the game shifts to 1BB game, after the 1BB operation ends, the main game state 3 (SR) Execute. When the area counter is “4”, it will be described later.

(3) When the main game state buffer is “5” (T defeated battle) and the RT variation symbol is displayed, the state shifts to the main game state 5. This is a process for returning to the main gaming state before the 1BB operation.
(4) When the main game state buffer is “6” (M decisive battle) and the RT variation symbol is displayed, the state shifts to the main game state 6. Similar to the above, it is a process for returning to the main gaming state before the 1BB operation.
(5) When an RT variation symbol is displayed when the main game state buffer is “7” (M battle) or “8” (after an episode or M battle win) and the area counter is less than “4” Shifts to the main game state 3 (SR) without returning to the original main game state 7 or 8. In other words, even if there is a possibility of losing in the M battle, it is regarded as a victory because 1BB has been won, and the game moves to the main game state 3 (SR). At this time, the area counter is also incremented by “1”, so that the game in the next area can be executed after the end of the main game state 3 (SR).
When the main game state buffer is “7” (M battle) or “8” (after an episode or M battle has been won) and the area counter is “4”, when the RT variation symbol is displayed, the main game Transition to State 9 (M Final Battle). When the number of transitions from the main game state 7 to 8 is the upper limit number (“4”), the state is shifted to the main game state 9 (M final battle) without returning to the original main game state 7 or 8. . At this time, “1” is added to the area counter. In other words, even if there is a possibility of losing in the M final battle, it is regarded as a victory by winning 1BB, and the game in the main game state 9 (M final battle) can be executed.

(6) When the main game state buffer is “9” and the RT variation symbol is displayed, the state shifts to the main game state 9. This is a process for returning to the main gaming state before the 1BB operation.
(7) When the advantageous section clear counter becomes less than “44”, the main game state 10 (ending) is entered.
(8) When the 1BB condition device is activated (winning), the game proceeds to the main gaming state 13 (bonus). When the accessory condition device is activated during ART, the game state is shifted to the main game state 13 (bonus) except when 1 BBA is activated in the main game state 5.

(Main game state 3 (Attack Rush; SR) start condition)
(1) In the main game state 2 (ART preparation), when the main game state buffer is “3” and the RT variation symbol is displayed, the state shifts to the main game state 3. This is a process for returning to the main gaming state 3 before the operation of the 1BB condition device.
(2) In the main game state 2 (ART preparation), when the main game state buffer is “7” or “8”, the area counter is less than “4”, and the RT variation symbol is displayed, the main game Transition to state 3.

(3) In the main game state 5 (T defeat battle), if the SR winning counter becomes “1” when the HP counter is not “0”, the state shifts to the main game state 3. This corresponds to when the SR is won in the main game state 5, that is, ART.
(4) In the main game state 8 (after winning the episode or M battle), when the episode counter is “0” and the area counter is less than “4”, the state shifts to the main game state 3. In the main game state 8, when the area counter is less than “4”, when the number of games (episode counter) in the main game state 8 is consumed, the state shifts to the main game state 3.

(Conditions for main game state 3 (Attack Rush; SR))
(1) When the HP counter is not “0” and the fall flag is “2”, the state shifts to the main gaming state 5 (T defeat battle). In the main game state 3 (SR), a falling lottery for determining whether or not to end the main game state 3 is performed. When this falling lottery is won, “2” is stored in the fall flag. In this case, the main game state 3 is ended and the state shifts to the main game state 5.
(2) When the HP counter reaches “0”, the main game state 3 is terminated and the state shifts to the main game state 6 (M strategy battle). As will be described later, when shifting to the main gaming state 3 (SR), the initial value “200” is set as the HP counter. However, when the HP counter becomes “0”, the transition condition to the main gaming state 6 is set. It will satisfy. Even in a main game state 5 (ART1; T defeat battle) described later, when the HP counter is “0”, the transition condition to the main game state 6 (ART2; M strategy battle) is satisfied.

(3) When the advantageous section clear counter becomes less than “44”, the end condition of the main game state 3 is satisfied, and the state shifts to the main game state 10 (ending). Therefore, even during SR, the value of the advantageous section clear counter is prioritized, and when the advantageous section clear counter becomes less than “44”, SR is terminated at that time and the main gaming state 10 is entered.
(4) When the 1BB condition device is activated (at the time of winning), the main game state 3 is terminated and the main game state 13 is shifted to. However, “3” is stored in the main game state buffer, and the main game state 3 is restored after the operation of the 1BB condition device is completed.

(Start condition of main game state 5 (ART1; T defeat battle))
(1) In the main game state 2, when the main game state buffer is “5” and the RT variation symbol is displayed, the state shifts to the main game state 5. This situation is a process in which the 1BB condition device is activated in the main game state 5, and is returned to the main game state 5 before the operation of the 1BB condition device after the operation ends.
(2) In the main game state 3, when the HP counter is not “0” and the fall flag is “2”, the state shifts to the main game state 5. In the main game state 3 (SR), a falling lottery is performed, and when the falling lottery is won, “2” is stored in the falling flag. In this case, the main game state 3 is ended and the state shifts to the main game state 5.

(Termination condition for main game state 5 (ART1; T defeat))
(1) When the HP counter is not “0” and the GS counter is “0”, the main gaming state 5 is terminated. When the GS counter becomes “0”, it means that the number of ART games has become “0”. In this case, the main game state 5 and then ART is terminated, and the main game state 0 (normal) ).
(2) When the HP counter is not “0” and the SR winning counter is “1”, the main gaming state 5 is terminated and the state shifts to the main gaming state 3 (SR).
(3) When the HP counter reaches “0”, the main game state 5 is terminated and the state shifts to the main game state 6 (ART 2; M strategy battle). The transition from the main gaming state 5 to 6 is set so that the HP counter becomes “0” regardless of the value of the GS counter.

(4) When the advantageous section clear counter becomes less than “44”, the main gaming state 5 is terminated and the main gaming state 10 is entered. This end condition is the same as in other main game states.
(5) When the 1BBA condition device is activated, the main gaming state 5 is terminated and the state shifts to the main gaming state 12 (C bonus) (see FIG. 35). Only when 1BBA is won in the main game state 5 of the ART, the state is shifted to the main game state 12.
(6) When the 1BBB to 1BBD condition device is activated, the main gaming state 5 is terminated and the state shifts to the main gaming state 13 (bonus). In this case, “5” is stored in the main game state buffer, and when the operation of the selected 1BB condition device is finished, the main game state 5 is returned again (via the main game state 2). .

(Starting condition of main game state 6 (ART2; M strategy battle))
(1) In the main game state 2, when the main game state buffer is “6” and the RT variation symbol is displayed, the main game state 2 is shifted to the main game state 6. As will be described later, when the operation of the 1BB condition device is completed, it is a process for returning to the main gaming state when the 1BB condition device is activated.
(2) In the main game state 3 or 5, when the HP counter becomes “0”, the state shifts to the main game state 6. Here, when the HP counter becomes “0” in the main gaming state 5, it is as described above. Further, in the main gaming state 3 (SR), the HP counter may become “0”. In this case, the main game state 3 (SR) shifts to the main game state 6 (M strategy battle) without going through the main game state 5 (ART1; T-defeat battle).

(End condition of main game state 6 (ART2; M strategy battle))
(1) When the GS counter reaches “0”, the main game state 6 is terminated and the state shifts to the main game state 7 (M battle). As described above, in the main gaming state 5, when the GS counter becomes “0”, the ART is terminated and the state shifts to the main gaming state 0 (normal). On the other hand, in the main game state 6, even if the GS counter becomes “0”, the ART does not end and the state shifts to the main game state 7. The number of games in the main game state 7 is not based on the GS counter value, but based on the single shot counter and the continuous shot counter.
(2) When the advantageous section clear counter becomes less than “44”, the main gaming state 6 is terminated and the main gaming state 10 is entered. This end condition is the same as in other main game states.
(3) When the 1BB condition device is activated, the main gaming state 6 is terminated and the state shifts to the main gaming state 13 (bonus). In this case, “6” is stored in the main game state buffer, and when the operation of the elected 1BB condition device is finished, the main game state 6 is again returned (via the main game state 2). .

(Starting condition of main game state 7 (M decisive battle))
(1) In the main game state 6, when the GS counter becomes “0”, the main game state 6 is shifted to the main game state 7 (as described above).
(End condition of main game state 7 (M decisive battle))
(1) When the SR winning counter is “0”, the single shot counter is “0”, the continuous shot counter is “0”, and the battle end flag is “1”, the main game state 7 is ended, and the main Transition to gaming state 0 (normal). That is, ART is terminated.
Here, since the SR winning counter is “0”, the condition for shifting to the main gaming state 3 (SR) is not satisfied. In addition, as described above, the main game state 7 digests the game based on the values of the single shot counter and the continuous shot counter, so when both counters become “0”, the remaining of the main game state 7 It means that the number of games is “0”. When both the counters are “0”, the battle end flag is “1”. Therefore, when the above condition is satisfied, the end condition of the main gaming state 7 (ART) is satisfied.

(2) When the SR winning counter is “1”, the main game state 7 is shifted to the main game state 8. In the main game state 7, the SR lottery is performed, and when the SR lottery is won, the SR winning counter becomes “1”. Thereby, the transition condition to the main game state 8 is satisfied. That is, when SR is won in the M game battle that is in the main game state 7, it is set to win the M game battle and shift to the main game state 8 after the M game battle victory.
(3) When the advantageous section clear counter becomes less than “44”, the main gaming state 7 is terminated and the main gaming state 10 is entered. This end condition is the same as in other main game states.
(4) When the 1BB condition device is activated, the main gaming state 7 is terminated and the state shifts to the main gaming state 13 (bonus).
When the main game state buffer is “7”, when the operation of the 1BB condition device is finished and the state shifts to the main game state 2, if the area counter is less than “4”, the RT fluctuation symbol is displayed. To shift to the main gaming state 3 (SR). On the other hand, if the area counter is “4”, the display shifts to the main gaming state 9 (final battle) by displaying the RT variation symbol.

(Starting condition of main game state 8 (after winning episode or M battle))
(1) In the main gaming state 1 (high probability), when the SR winning counter becomes “1” and the RT variation symbol is displayed, the state shifts to the main gaming state 8. When a transition is made from the main game state 1 (high probability) to the main game state 8, an episode effect at the start of ART is output in the main game state 8. Further, when the game state shifts to the main game state 8 in this way, “3” is set in the episode counter (“F027 (H)”), that is, the number of games in the main game state 8.
(2) In the main game state 7 (M battle), when the SR winning counter becomes “1”, the M battle is won as described above, and the game shifts after the M battle is won in the main game state 8. When the game state transitions to the main game state 8 in this way, “2” is set as the number of games in the main game state 8 in the episode counter.

(End condition of main game state 8 (after winning episode or M battle))
(1) When the episode counter is “0” and the area counter is less than “4”, the main gaming state 8 is shifted to the main gaming state 3 (SR).
(2) When the episode counter is “0” and the area counter is “4”, the main game state 8 is shifted to the main game state 9 (ART 3; final battle).
Thus, when the area counter is less than “4”, the main gaming state 8 → 3 → 5 or 6 → 7 → 8 is repeated (of course, the condition that the ART termination condition is not satisfied).
In addition, as described above, the area counter counts the number of times of transition from the main gaming state 7 to the main gaming state 8, and when the predetermined number of times (four times) is reached, the main gaming state 8 The game state 3 (SR) is not advanced to the main game state 9 (final battle).

(3) When the advantageous section clear counter becomes less than “44”, the main gaming state 8 is terminated and the main gaming state 10 is entered. This end condition is the same as in other main game states.
(4) When the 1BB condition device is activated, the main game state 8 is terminated and the state shifts to the main game state 13 (bonus).
When the main game state buffer is “8”, when the operation of the 1BB condition device is finished and the state shifts to the main game state 2, if the area counter is less than “4”, the RT fluctuation symbol is displayed. To shift to the main gaming state 3 (SR). On the other hand, if the area counter is “4”, the display shifts to the main gaming state 9 (final battle) by displaying the RT variation symbol.

(Starting condition of main game state 9 (final battle))
(1) In the main game state 2 (ART preparation), when the main game state buffer is “7” or “8”, the area counter is “4”, and the RT variation symbol is displayed, the main game state 9 starts. This point is as described above.
(2) When the RT variation symbol is displayed when the main game state buffer is “9”, the main game state 9 is started. When the 1BB is activated in the main game state 9 and the 1BB operation is completed, the process is returned to the main game state 9 when the 1BB is activated.
(3) In the main game state 8, when the episode counter is “0” and the area counter is “4”, the state shifts to the main game state 9. This point is as described above.

(Conditions for main game state 9 (final battle))
(1) When the GS counter becomes “0” and the M continuation flag becomes “0”, the ART end condition is satisfied, so that the main game state 0 is entered.
(2) When the GS counter is “0”, the M continuation flag is “1”, and the M destruction counter is “9”, the state shifts to the main gaming state 10. When the M destruction counter reaches “9”, the end condition of the main gaming state 9 is satisfied.
(3) When the advantageous section clear counter becomes less than “44”, the main gaming state 9 is terminated and the main gaming state 10 is entered. This end condition is the same as in other main game states.
(4) When the 1BB condition device is activated, the main game state 9 is terminated and the state shifts to the main game state 13 (bonus). In this case, “9” is stored in the main game state buffer.

(Main game state 10 (ending) start condition)
(1) In the main game state 1 to 9, or 11 to 13, when the advantageous section clear counter becomes less than “44”, the main game state 10 is entered.
That is, since the advantageous section clear counter when the transition condition to the main gaming state 10 is satisfied is “43”, the next game of the game in which the advantageous section clear counter becomes “43” when the main gaming state 10 is entered. ), “42” is set in the GS counter.
(Termination condition for main game state 10 (ending))
(1) When the GS counter becomes “0”, the main gaming state 10 (that is, ART) is terminated, and the state shifts to the main gaming state 0 (normal). As described above, when shifting to the main game state 10, "42" is set in the GS counter as the number of games in the main game state 10, so the main game state 10 is terminated when the 42 games are consumed. To do.

In the above, the maximum number of ART games added in the main game state 3 (SR) in one area is “300”. Therefore, it is conceivable that the maximum number of ART games is “3 × 300 = 900” while the area counter is “1” to “3”.
When the area counter reaches “4”, 20 games can be repeated up to 10 times (20 × 10 = 200) in the main game state 9. Therefore, the maximum number of ART games in the area counters “1” to “4” is “1100”.
By setting in this way, it is set so that the ART can be completed within 1500 games which is the number of continuous upper limit games in the advantageous section. For this reason, for example, a large number of games are added during ART, but it is possible to eliminate the possibility that ART will be forcibly terminated due to reaching the continuation upper limit continuation number of times “1500” during the ART.

(Starting condition of main game state 11 (mission bonus))
(1) In the main game state 0 (normal), when the result of the advantageous section transition lottery is “1”, the small role E to G condition device operation, and the 1BBA condition device operation, the state shifts to the main game state 11. The above condition is met when winning numbers “63” to “65” are won.
(2) In the main game state 0 (normal), when the result of the advantageous section shift lottery is “1”, the small role E to G condition device operation, the 1BBA condition device operation, and the 1BBA operation symbol display, the main game state 11 is displayed. Transition. This situation means that in addition to the above (1), the winning 1BBA has won.
(3) When the main game state is 0 and the advantageous section type is “2” (that is, the waiting section), when the 1BBA operation symbol is displayed, the state shifts to the main game state 11. This situation corresponds to a case where 1 BBA is won but immediately does not shift to the main gaming state 11 but shifts to a waiting section and 1 BBA wins during the waiting section.
(4) In the main game state 1 (high probability), when the SR winning counter is “0” and the 1BBA condition device is activated, the state shifts to the main game state 11. This situation corresponds to a case where 1 BBA is won in the main game state 1.

(Termination condition for main game state 11 (mission bonus))
(1) When the main game state buffer is “0” and the SR winning counter is “0” at the end of the 1BBA condition device operation, the main game state 11 is ended and the main game state 0 before the 1BBA condition device operation is started. Return to.
(2) When the main game state buffer is “0” and the SR winning counter is “1” at the end of the operation of the 1BBA condition device, that is, when the SR is won during the 1BBA game, the main game state 1 (high probability) Migrate to In this case, after that, the main game state 8 (SR) is entered via the main game state 8.

(3) When the main game state buffer is “1” at the end of the operation of the 1BBA condition device, the state shifts to the main game state 1 (high probability). This is a process for returning to the main game state before the operation of the 1BBA condition device.
(4) When the advantageous section clear counter becomes less than “44”, the main game state 10 is entered. In this embodiment, such a process is executed in order to give priority to the continuation upper limit (1500 games) of the advantageous section over the continuation of the main game state based on the actuating action. However, even if the game state transitions to the main game state 10, it does not change that the accessory condition device is in operation unless the end condition of the accessory (1BBA) condition device operation is satisfied.
(5) When the advantageous section clear counter becomes “0”, the main game state 0 is entered. Further, when the game section clear counter becomes “0”, the advantageous section type is updated from “1” to “0”. However, even if the game state shifts to the main game state 0, it does not change that the accessory condition device is operating as long as the end condition of the accessory (1BBA) condition device operation is not satisfied.

In particular, in the present embodiment, there is a case in which the main game states 11 to 13 are caused by the operation of the accessory condition device (when so-called special role is won), so that the accessory condition device operation symbol is not yet displayed (special Even in the case of no winning combination, i.e., inside), the player may stay in the main gaming states 11-13. Then, after the operation of the accessory condition device, before the display of the accessory condition device operation symbol (after winning 1BB, before winning, that is, inside), the above-mentioned condition (4) “Advantageous section clear counter is“ 44 ” When it becomes less than, control is performed to maintain the current main game state without shifting to the main game state 10.
However, the condition (5) “when the advantageous section clear counter becomes“ 0 ”” must always end the advantageous section unless the maximum instruction generation flag is “0”. Controls to shift to the main gaming state 0 and update the advantageous section type to “0”.

(Starting condition of main game state 12 (C bonus))
(1) In the main game state 5, when the 1BBA condition device is activated, the state shifts to the main game state 12 (FIG. 35).
(Termination condition for main game state 12 (C bonus))
(1) When the operation of the 1BBA condition device ends, the state shifts to the main gaming state 2 (ART preparation) (FIG. 35).
(2) When the advantageous section clear counter becomes less than “44”, the main game state 10 is entered. For the same reason as above.
(3) When the advantageous section clear counter becomes “0”, the main game state 0 is entered. For the same reason as above.

(Main game state 13 (bonus) start condition)
(1) In the main gaming state 0 (normal), when the advantageous section transition lottery result is “1” and the 1BBB condition device is activated (that is, when 1BBB is elected to win the advantageous section), the transition to the main gaming state 13 To do.
(2) When the main game state is 0 (normal) and the advantageous section type is “2” (standby section), when the 1BBB action symbol is displayed (at the time of 1BBB winning), the state shifts to the main game state 13.
(3) In the main game state 1 (high probability), when the 1BBB to 1BBD condition device is activated, the state shifts to the main game state 13.
(4) In the main game states 2 to 4 or 6 to 9, when the 1BB condition device is activated, the state shifts to the main game state 13.
(5) In the main game state 5, when the 1BBB to 1BBD condition device is activated, the state shifts to the main game state 13.
From the above (4) and (5), when the 1BB condition device other than the 1BB condition device operation of the main game state 5 (ART1; T defeat battle) is operated, the state shifts to the main game state 13. It should be noted that the main game state 12 (C bonus) is transferred only when the 1BBA condition device in the main game state 5 is activated.

(Termination conditions for main game state 13 (bonus))
(1) When the 1BB condition device operation ends and the main game state buffer is “1”, the main game state 1 is entered. That is, it returns to the main game state before the operation of the 1BB condition device.
(2) When the 1BB condition device operation ends and the main game state buffer is “2” or more, the state shifts to the main game state 2 (ART preparation).
(3) When the advantageous section clear counter becomes less than “44”, the main game state 10 is entered. For the same reason as above.
(4) When the advantageous section clear counter becomes “0”, the main game state 0 is entered. For the same reason as above.

Next, more specific contents of the mission bonus (main game state 11) will be described.
42 and 43 are diagrams showing the level up of the first half part of the mission bonus (main game state 11).
FIG. 44 is a diagram showing the effects of the second half part of the mission bonus (main game state 11).
The 1BBA game, which is a mission bonus, consists of a first half part and a second half part. The mission bonus satisfies the end condition when the payout number reaches 92 or more. And in the mission bonus, since every game, 7 small payouts win a prize, the number of games is 14 games. Among the 14 games, the first half part is 9 games and the second half part is 5 games.
In 9 games of the first half part, level up lottery and SR lottery are executed according to the winning number of the game. Further, the effect output devices such as the lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the image display device 23 can output the effect corresponding to the current level to notify or suggest the level to the player.
Here, the SR lottery corresponding to the winning number is executed on the main control board 50. Further, the main control board 50 can execute the SR lottery when the winning symbol that can stop the two symbols is displayed, but is not involved in the instruction (notification) of the pressing order based on the winning number (main control). The board 50 does not instruct (inform) the pressing order). Furthermore, whether or not the SR is true is not affected by whether or not the double symbol has actually stopped.
On the other hand, the sub-control board 80 can execute the determination of the current level and the level-up lottery. The sub-control board 80 enables notification of the pressing order (right first stop) at which the double symbol can be stopped when the winning symbol is the symbol at which the double symbol can be stopped.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the main control means 50 may execute level-up lottery (manage the level), and the sub control board 80 may only display the level determined by the main control board 50 as an image.

FIG. 42 is a diagram showing the relationship between the winning number and the level shift when the current level is 1 to 3.
The level has a range of level 1 to level 6 and starts from level 1 when the mission bonus starts. Then, SR lottery is performed according to the winning number in the mission bonus.
The relationship between the winning number and the SR winning probability is as follows.
Winning number “47” (2 consecutive gazes (cannot stop 2 symbols)): SR winning probability “0” or very low probability Winning number “48” (can stop 2 symbols) 1 SR winning Low probability of winning Winning number “49” to “50” (can stop 2 double symbols) Winning: Low SR winning probability Winning number “51” to “53” (can stop 2 double symbols) Winning: SR winning probability intermediate probability Winning number “54” (can stop 3 double symbols) Winning: SR winning probability high probability Winning number “55” (Can stop 3 double symbols, can stop 1st time) Winning: SR winning probability extremely high probability (may be determined SR winning)
Winning number “56” (Bell) winning: SR winning probability “0” or very low probability

Further, separately from the SR lottery, a level-up lottery is performed with a number corresponding to the winning number for the current level. However, it is set to be easier to level up when SR is selected.
For example, in FIG. 42, when the current level is level 1 (and SR non-winning) and the winning number “47” is won, the level 1 (currently maintained) number is “65536 (1/1)”. Therefore, it does not level up.
In addition, when the current level is level 1 (and SR non-winning), when winning number “48” is won, the number to be raised to level 2 is “65536 (1/1)”. Always go up to level 2.

  Furthermore, when the current level is level 1 (and SR non-winning), when winning number “51” is won, it is raised to level 2 with a probability of “1/2” and “1/2” Increase to level 3 with a probability of. On the other hand, the current level is level 1 as described above, and even when the winning number “51” is won, the SR level is increased to level 3 with a probability of 100%. That is, when winning at the same level and the same winning number, it may be set that the level when winning the SR is easier to level up than when not winning the SR. However, it is not always set as such. For example, when the current level is level 1 and the winning number “54” is won, both SR winning and non-winning are 100%. Increases to level 4 with a probability of.

The level in the mission bonus may be clearly shown to the player, or the level is not clearly shown (implying or suggesting) depending on the background or characters appearing during the performance. )
As shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, the level is more likely to increase as the winning number with a large number of double symbols to be stopped is won. In addition, when the SR is won, it is easier to level up when winning the winning number that allows the double symbols to be stopped than the SR non-winning.

As shown in FIG. 43, when the highest level 6 is reached, there is no level change even if any winning number is won thereafter.
In FIG. 43, if the winning number “54” or “55” is won at the current level 3, the level may be raised to level 6. Furthermore, as shown in the current level 6 in FIG. 44, the level may be increased to level 6 even when SR is not won.
The higher the level, the higher the probability of winning the SR.

In the first half of the mission bonus, when the winning numbers “47” to “55” are won, the sub-control board 80 should make the pressing order of the stop switch 42 the first stop on the right (right push instruction), and The player is notified by the image display device 23 and the like that the two symbols should be aimed.
When winning number “47” is won, the double symbol does not stop. However, when winning numbers “48” to “55” are won, if all the reels 31 are hit by double symbols, At least one of the two symbols can be stopped.
In addition, when winning number “55” is won, the double symbols can be stopped at the upper and middle stages. When the right reel 31 stops, if the two symbols stop at the upper and middle stages, the double symbol alignment (stop three symbols) is confirmed.

In the present embodiment, even if the winning number “55” is won, the SR winning is not confirmed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the winning number “55” is won, the SR winning may be confirmed. .
Furthermore, when the winning number “56” (the winning number corresponding to the bell alignment) is won, the sub-control board 80 does not notify that the right first stop should be made and the double symbols should be aimed. However, this is not limiting, and the above notification may be performed by lottery or unconditionally. The notification in this case is a gaze notification as in the case of winning of the winning number “47”.
In the first half part, when winning the winning number that can stop two symbols, you may always output the effect that you should push right and aim at the two symbols, The production may not be output according to the presence or absence and the level at that time. For example, when the winning number “55” is selected and the SR winning is determined, when the winning number “55” is won and the double symbol pattern stops at the upper and middle stages, the player You can know the winning decision. Therefore, if no profit is given to the player even if the two symbols stop after that, it is meaningless to output an effect that pushes the two symbols, giving the player a sense of loss. Because it might be.

The above shows the mission bonus, that is, the effect in the main gaming state 11, but the main gaming state 12, that is, the C bonus has a different point from the mission bonus.
The main game state 12 sets the SR winning probability higher than that of the main game state 11. For this reason, in the main game state 12, when the winning number “48” is won, control is performed so that the SR winning is determined.
In the main game state 12, when the winning number "48" is won, the player is instructed to make the middle first stop and aim for the double symbols.
Here, as shown in FIG. 15, when winning number “48” (small role I1) is won, if two consecutive symbols are pressed in the middle first stop, three double symbols can be stopped (2 Can be stopped). And when 3 double symbols are stopped in the middle first stop, the SR winning is determined.

As shown in FIG. 31, the winning number “48” is “3276”, so the probability of winning in one game is about 5%, and the probability of winning among the nine games in the first half part is about 37%.
Further, if the middle first stop is notified only when the winning number “48” is won, the winning of the winning number “48” is confirmed when the middle first stop is notified, which is not preferable for production. Therefore, even when the winning number “47” (Gasse 2 series) is won, the medium / first stop is notified by lottery or unconditionally.
Furthermore, when the winning numbers “49” to “55” are won, unlike the main gaming state 11 (mission bonus), the pushing order is different from the right first stop (four ways in which the first stop is left or in the middle). An arbitrary pressing order from the pressing order of “. The above-mentioned“ erase navigation ”” is notified. In other words, in the game where the winning numbers “49” to “55” are won, the pressing order for not stopping the two symbols is notified.

In the C bonus in the main gaming state 12, the SR winning probability at the time of winning the winning numbers “49” to “55” is set lower (including 0%) than the mission bonus in the main gaming state 11 (so as to be different). May be set the same as the mission bonus. At least, when the winning number “48” is won, the SR winning is determined in the main gaming state 12.
In the main game state 11, when winning number “48” is won, even if the first right stop operation is ignored and the middle first stop operation is performed to stop the double symbol alignment, the SR winning probability will be does not change.
In the main game states 11 and 12, when winning numbers “48” to “55” are won, even if the two symbols do not stop because the player's intention is not accurate, the SR winning probability Will not change. This is because the SR lottery is not performed on the basis of the winning number, but the SR lottery is performed based on the winning number.

  In addition, if the winning number “48” is won once in the C bonus in the main gaming state 12 described above, even if the winning number “48” is won again during the C bonus, the two-line pattern You may alert | report the pushing order (for example, the 1st stop on the left. "Erasing Navi" mentioned above) which does not stop display of alignment. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost. The C bonus (1BBA game) in the main game state 12 is different from the mission bonus (1BBA game) in the main game state 11 and there is no concept of the first half part and the second half part, and the SR lottery is performed with the same probability. I am doing so.

In the main game state 11, when the SR is won in the middle of the first half part of the nine games, the SR lottery may be ended or continued. For example, when the SR lottery is won a plurality of times, the SR win may be stocked, or the lottery may be performed to be more advantageous when determining the number of games in SR.
If SR is not won in the first half part, the SR lottery is continued in the second half part. The SR lottery of the second half part is performed based on the winning number as in the first half part. However, unlike the first half part, the second half part does not output the effect that the two symbols should be aimed even if the winning number that the two symbols can be stopped is won.

When the first half of the nine games is completed as described above, an effect indicating the SR lottery result is output in the second half part 5 game.
FIG. 44 is a diagram showing the contents of the effects of the latter half part 5 game. Before entering the second half part, the level at that time and whether or not SR is won are decided. Then, based on the level at that time and whether or not SR is won, one of the S (scenario) numbers is determined by lottery. As shown in FIG. 44, for example, when the level is equal to or lower than level 3 and the SR is not won, the S number “01” is selected with the probability of the numerical value “38036”, and the probability of the numerical value “5000”. The S number “02” is selected by..., And the S number “06” is selected with the probability of the numerical value “500”.

For example, when S number “01” is selected, an effect in which an enemy character appears in the first game of the second half part is output. In the second game, an effect in which a platoon (hero character) appears is output. In the third game, an effect set by the character A is output. Characters A to C appearing in the third game are one of the main characters belonging to the platoon. The strength of the characters A to C (probability of winning the enemy character) is set such that character C> character B> character A.
In the fourth game, for example, in S number “01”, an effect (whether or not) of whether character A wins or loses the enemy character is output. If an effect in which the characters A to C win the enemy character is output, it means an SR winning effect, and if an effect that the characters A to C lose to the enemy character is output, it means an SR non-winning effect. Therefore, at the end of the first half part, when SR is won, characters A to C select an S number that outputs an effect over the enemy character, and when SR is not won, characters A to C are selected. Select an S number that outputs an effect that is defeated by an enemy character.

In the 4th game,
1) When characters A to C are defeated by an enemy character and indicate SR non-winning in the game (for example, S number “01”; “out” in FIG. 44).
2) When characters A to C win the enemy character and show SR winning in the game (for example, S number “07”; “winning” in FIG. 44).
3) There is a case where the characters A to C are defeated by the enemy character and output an effect of “Press the chance button 24!” (“PUSH” in FIG. 44).
When the chance button 24 is pressed, the revival effect at the 5th game (characters A through C are defeated by the enemy at the 4th game, but the characters A through C are revived at the 5th game and defeat the enemy character. 44, the case of outputting “Restoration”) and the case of not outputting the resurrection effect (the effect does not change from the fourth game) (“No change” in FIG. 44).
For example, in the S number “02”, the effect “Press the chance button 24!” Is output in the fourth game, but the effect does not change in the fifth game (the character A is not revived).
Further, for example, as in S number “07”, there is a case where the victory of characters A to C is confirmed in the fourth game and the effect is not changed in the fifth game.

On the other hand, the S number “13” indicates an effect in which the character A is restored when the start switch 41 of the fifth game is operated.
Here, in the fifth game of FIG. 44, “start recovery” means outputting a recovery effect at the timing when the start switch 41 is operated. Similarly, “1 stop revival” means outputting a revival effect at the timing when the first (first) stop switch 42 is operated. Similarly, “three-stop restoration” means outputting a restoration effect at the timing when the third (last) stop switch 42 is operated.

  During the second half part 5 game, the sub control board 80 does not output the effect that the right first stop should be made or the double symbols should be looked on as in the first half part. In the second half part, the sub-control board 80 does not output any effects relating to the pressing order or the eye-pressing, or presses the front (left first stop) even when the winning number that can stop the double symbols is selected. Notification is made (such notification may be referred to as “erase navigation”). In the second half part, the main purpose is to show the presence or absence of SR winning in the production, so as not to stop the double symbols.

In addition, when SR is not won at the start of the second half part, the SR lottery is also performed in the second half part according to the winning number as in the first half part (however, as described above, the two symbols are displayed). The target production is not output.) Therefore, SR may be won in the second half part. When the SR is won during the second half part, the S number is changed (rewritten).
Note that the mission bonus of this embodiment is a game in which the first half part raises the level in the first half part, and the game performance in which the SR winning is informed by directing the level up, so the first half part has a higher SR winning probability. doing. Specifically, the probability of winning the SR when winning the condition device numbers “48” to “55” in the first half part is the SR probability when winning the condition device numbers “48” to “55” in the second half part. It is set higher than the probability of winning. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it goes without saying that the SR lottery may be performed with the same probability in the first half part and the second half part.
In FIG. 44, for example, when the S number “01” is selected at the start of the second half part, when the SR is subsequently won, the S number is changed to “13” (see the column “When winning SR during battle”). . Regardless of the 1st game to the 5th game, no matter which game is won, the S number is changed to a consistent S / D due to the connection of the previous and subsequent effects. Specifically, for example, when the S number “01” is selected, the character A appears, but when the SR is won in the second half part, the character A is changed to the S number “13” that wins. .

In the present embodiment, the production contents are different between the main game state 11 and the main game state 12. However, in the main game state 12 (C bonus), it is also possible to output the effects of the first half part 9 game and the second half part 5 game, as in the main game state 11 (mission bonus).
When the SR is won in the main game state 11 or 12, the state shifts to SR (Advance Rush) which is the main game state 3.
In SR, the number of ART games is determined. When shifting to SR in the middle of ART, an additional number of ART games is determined.

Next, the contents of the effect (image display) in the main game state 3 (SR) will be described.
45 to 50 are diagrams showing examples of effects during SR.
First, FIG. 45 is a diagram showing an image example (1) in SR, where (a) shows an “N” game and (b) shows an “N + 1” game.
When the transition is made to SR which is the main gaming state 3, first, an image corresponding to the added number corresponding to the added array (F035 (H) to F039 (H))) is displayed in the added array display area 23a.
As described above, in this embodiment, the additional number “0” is not selected, but “0” may be selected.
In addition, the five initial values “F035 (H)” to “F039 (H)” may be selected at any time, such as when SR is won, when SR starts, when power is turned on, or when an advantageous section is shifted.

In the added array display area 23a, the added numbers corresponding to the data of “F039 (H)” to “F035 (H)” among the addresses “F035 (H)” to “F039 (H)” are respectively displayed from the left side. indicate.
Specifically, at the start of the main gaming state 3 (SR), the image display device 23 is placed on the overlay arrangement display area 23a from the left side.
"Addition number corresponding to the value stored in F039 (H)", "Addition number corresponding to the value stored in F038 (H)", "Addition number corresponding to the value stored in F037 (H)" , “The number of additions corresponding to the value stored in F036 (H)” and “the number of additions corresponding to the value stored in F035 (H)” are displayed as images.
FIG. 45 (a)
F035 (H): 3 (H) (addition number 20)
F036 (H): 5 (H) (additional number 50)
F037 (H): 6 (H) (additional number 100)
F038 (H): 4 (H) (additional number 30)
F039 (H): 2 (H) (additional number 10)
An example is shown.
Therefore, FIG. 45A shows an example in which the number of additions “10, 30, 100, 50, 20” is displayed as an image.

As shown in FIG. 45 (a), during SR, the image display device 23 displays an image indicating that SR is in progress at the upper left corner, and displays the acquired number of images during SR at the upper right corner.
Further, the above-mentioned enemy HP counter value is displayed as an image. For example, as an initial value, the HP counter value is displayed as “200/200”. If the enemy HP is scraped by “20” (damaged), the image display is updated to “180/200”. The upper limit value of the HP that can damage the SR is “200”. When HP is set to “0”, “100” is added to the GS counter as a bonus point, and the GS counter becomes “300”.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 45 (a), when winning numbers “19” to “27” are won, the sub-control board 80 should be set to the right first stop (right push) and the two symbols are displayed. Display what you should aim for. When the winning number “47” is won, the sub-control board 80 may determine whether or not to display these images by lottery. Similarly, when winning numbers other than the above are won, the sub-control board 80 may determine whether or not to display these images by lottery.

In FIG. 45 (a), in this game, it is assumed that the double symbol does not stop and the number of extras has not been determined. Even in this case, the game and the extra array are updated. In FIG. 45 (a), at the end of the game or at the start of the next game, the leftmost additional number “10” is deleted, and the remaining four additional numbers are shifted by one to the left. Then, on the rightmost side, the newly added number determined by lottery is displayed. In the example of FIG. 45 (b), an example in which the additional number “50” is added is shown.
Looking at this in the state of RWM 53 described above,
F035 (H): 3 (H) (addition number 20)
F036 (H): 5 (H) (additional number 50)
F037 (H): 6 (H) (additional number 100)
F038 (H): 4 (H) (additional number 30)
F039 (H): 2 (H) (additional number 10)
From this state, the oldest extra number (the value of “F039 (H)”) is deleted, and the address of the other value is shifted by 1 (the data of the current address is stored in the address of “address value + 1”) )When,
F035 (H): 0 (H)
F036 (H): 3 (H) (additional number 20)
F037 (H): 5 (H) (additional number 50)
F038 (H): 6 (H) (additional number 100)
F039 (H): 4 (H) (additional number 30)
It becomes.
Then, the value stored in “F035 (H)” is determined by lottery. In the example of FIG. 45 (b), it is shown that “5 (H)” (addition number 50) is determined. That is,
F035 (H): 5 (H) (additional number 50)
F036 (H): 3 (H) (additional number 20)
F037 (H): 5 (H) (additional number 50)
F038 (H): 6 (H) (additional number 100)
F039 (H): 4 (H) (additional number 30)
It becomes.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45B, an example is shown in which the number of additions “30, 100, 50, 20, 50” is displayed as an image.

Next, image display when the double symbols are stopped will be described.
Note that the display of the emphasized image described below is executed by the sub control board 80. In addition, the emphasized image can be displayed in the main game state 3 (SR), but in other game states (for example, the main game state 5 or 6), even when the double symbol is stopped. Does not display the emphasized image.
Furthermore, the main control board 50 executes the bound stop described above when stopping the double symbols in the main gaming state 3. On the other hand, in other game states (for example, main game states 5 and 6), the bounce stop is not executed even when the double symbols are stopped. In other words, also in the reel stop control, the reel 31 stop control is executed with reference to the main game state and the winning number (winning and replay condition device number) (the operation mode of the stop switch 42 is the same). In some cases, the symbols to be stopped are the same even if the main game state is different).
Further, in a game state other than the main game state 3 (for example, the main game state 5 or 6), when the winning number that can stop the double symbols is won, the sub-control board 80 has the first stop left. Alternatively, the push order selected from the four push orders in the middle is notified, and the two symbols are not stopped as much as possible.
Note that only the display of the emphasized image may be defined as “enhancement effect”, or the combination of the emphasized image and the bound stop may be defined as “enhancement effect” (hereinafter described in the former). .)

  FIG. 46 shows an example in which the two symbols are stopped when the right reel 31 is stopped by winning the replay E1 of the winning number “20” in the game. When the double symbol is stopped, the peripheral portion of the display window 17 where the double symbol is stopped is displayed, for example, by displaying an image that is wrapped in a flame, so that the double symbol is stopped is displayed as an emphasized image. (Emphasis production). The emphasis effect is an example, and any effect may be used as long as it is possible to emphasize that the two symbols have stopped. For example, an effect of displaying a specific character image in the vicinity of the stopped double symbol may be used. In addition, as described above, when the image display device 23 is formed of a transmissive liquid crystal display device including the region of the display window 17, when the two symbols stop, It is also possible to display an emphasized image including the area.

  Then, when the double symbols are stopped, target images corresponding to the number of the stopped double symbols (a diagram in which a cross line is superimposed on a double circle; one in the example of FIG. 46) are added to the overlay arrangement display area 23a. An image is displayed, and the number of the images displayed in the added array display area 23a is randomly moved left and right. In the example of FIG. 46 (a), the target image shows a figure positioned on the additional number “30”, but the target image moves to the left in the figure and is positioned on the additional number “10”. Or the target image moves to the right side in the figure and is positioned on the additional number “100”.

  When displaying an image in which the target image is moving left and right, “PUSH” is displayed on the image display device 23, and the player operates the chance button 24. When the player operates the chance button 24, the target image is then stopped on any of the added numbers, and an image that the added number is blown up is displayed. FIG. 46B is a diagram showing an example of the situation at this time, and shows an example of blasting on the additional number “50”. This means that the additional number “50” has been acquired.

The main control board 50 randomly determines which additional number is selected by lottery. For example, at the time of winning a winning number that can stop one double symbol, the main control board 50 randomly selects one of the five additional numbers. For example, there is a method of selecting (equally selecting) each additional number with a winning probability of 20%.
When the main control board 50 selects the number of additions, the sub control board 80 executes image display corresponding to the selected number of additions according to the selection.
In the example of FIG. 46B, since the player has acquired the additional number “50”, the image is displayed as “+50 GET!”. In the example of FIG. 46, the HP before the addition is an example of “150” (the image display is “150/200”), and since the addition number “50” is acquired, “50” is obtained from the HP. An example in which “100” is subtracted (display is “100/200”) is shown.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 46 (b), after acquiring the additional number “50”, the additional number “50” is deleted, so that the additional number displayed in the additional array display area 23a is “ 10, 30, 100, (erase), 20 ". Then, in the next game, as described above, the leftmost extra number is deleted, and the game is moved to the left side except for the extra number “50” acquired by the player. Thereby, the number of additions on the addition arrangement display area 23a is “30, 100, (undecided), 20, and (undetermined)” from the left side, respectively. Then, two undecided addition numbers are selected by lottery, and the addition number corresponding to the value of the selected addition array is displayed as an image.

The above flow is explained by RWM53.
Before selecting the extra number,
F035 (H): 3 (H) (addition number 20)
F036 (H): 5 (H) (additional number 50)
F037 (H): 6 (H) (additional number 100)
F038 (H): 4 (H) (additional number 30)
F039 (H): 2 (H) (additional number 10)
It is.
And since the additional number of “F036 (H)” was selected,
F035 (H): 3 (H) (addition number 20)
F036 (H): 0 (H)
F037 (H): 6 (H) (additional number 100)
F038 (H): 4 (H) (additional number 30)
F039 (H): 2 (H) (additional number 10)
It becomes.

Next, when the leftmost addition number (the value of “F039 (H)”) in the figure is deleted and the data at each address is shifted by “1”,
F035 (H): 0 (H)
F036 (H): 3 (H) (additional number 20)
F037 (H): 0 (H)
F038 (H): 6 (H) (additional number 100)
F039 (H): 4 (H) (additional number 30)
It becomes.

Here, since the value of the address “F037 (H)” is cleared based on the selection of the additional number, “4” (the additional number 30) or more is selected, and the address “F035 (H)” is selected. The value is chosen randomly. As a result of selecting two extra arrays by lottery, “4” (addition number 30) is selected as the value of the address “F037 (H)”, and “2” (addition number 10) is selected as the value of the address “F035 (H)”. When you do
F035 (H): 2 (H) (additional number 10)
F036 (H): 3 (H) (additional number 20)
F037 (H): 4 (H) (additional number 30)
F038 (H): 6 (H) (additional number 100)
F039 (H): 4 (H) (additional number 30)
It becomes.
Therefore, the number of additions displayed in the addition arrangement display area 23a in the next game in FIG. 46B is “30, 100, 30, 20, 10” from the left side, respectively.
The update of each address value of the RWM 53 as described above is executed by the main control board 50, and the image display of the number of additions in the addition arrangement display area 23a is executed by the sub control board 80.

FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an example when winning the replay F2 of the winning number “24” that allows the double symbols to be stopped when the left and right reels 31 are stopped.
As shown in FIG. 47A, when the double symbols are stopped when the left and right reels 31 are stopped, the periphery of the display window 17 of the left and right reels 31 is displayed as an emphasized image, respectively.
In addition, since two double symbols have stopped, there are two target images that appear, and the two target images move randomly to the left and right, respectively. In the example of FIG. 47A, an example is shown in which the target image is positioned on the additional numbers “30” and “50”.
Then, when the player operates the chance button 24, the target image is then stopped on the additional number selected in the lottery, and an effect of blasting the additional number is output. FIG. 47B is a diagram showing a state at this time. In the example of FIG. 47B, an example is shown in which the additional number is determined to be “50” and “20”. Accordingly, since the total number of additions is “70”, the HP before the addition is “120/200”, and the HP after the addition is “50/200”.

FIG. 48 is a diagram showing an example of when winning the replay G1 of the winning number “26” that can stop the double symbols in the middle and lower tiers when the left, middle and right reels 31 are stopped.
As shown in FIG. 48A, when the double symbols are stopped when the left, middle and right reels 31 are stopped, the periphery of the display window 17 of each of the left, middle and right reels 31 is displayed as an emphasized image. .
When three double symbols are stopped, there are five target images that appear. That is, it is determined that the target image is positioned on all the additional numbers and that all the additional numbers are acquired. In the example of FIG. 48A, an example in which the target image is located on all the additional numbers is shown.
Then, when the player operates the chance button 24, an effect of blasting all the additional numbers is output. FIG. 48B is a diagram showing a state at this time. In the example of FIG. 48B, since the total number of additions is “120”, the HP before the addition is “150/200”, and the HP after the addition is “30/200”.

FIG. 49 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the number of additions displayed in the addition arrangement display area 23a and HP.
In the example of FIG. 49A, the maximum value of the displayed additional number is “50”. Further, the HP in this example is “130/200”. Therefore, even if the player acquires the maximum additional number “50”, the HP does not become a negative value. In such a case, all the additional numbers are displayed as images.
On the other hand, the example in FIG. 49B shows an example in which the current HP is “40/200”. In this case, if the additional number “50” is acquired, the HP becomes negative. Even if a player temporarily acquires an additional number that makes HP negative, the maximum value of HP that can be acquired by SR is “200”. Therefore, in such a case, “50” is not displayed as an additional number, and for example, “defeat” is displayed as shown in FIG. 49B (contents other than actual numerical values are displayed). . Even when the image “defeat” is displayed by the sub control board 80, “5” corresponding to the addition number “50” is stored in the RWM 53 (upward arrangement) of the main control board 50. Then, if the additional number of “defeat” is acquired, it indicates to the player that the HP will be “0”. By displaying an image in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from giving an impression that not all of the acquired additional numbers have been added.

FIG. 50 is a diagram illustrating an example of obtaining the additional number in the example of FIG. 49 (b). FIG. 50A shows an example in which the replay E1 with the winning number “20” is won in the game and the two symbols stop when the right reel 31 stops. Further, the HP at this time is assumed to be “40/200”.
Then, as shown in FIG. 50 (b1), when the winning number “30” is won by lottery, an image that blows up the additional number “30” is displayed in the same manner as described above, and the additional number “30” is displayed. An image showing that has been acquired is displayed. Further, since the additional number “30” is subtracted from the HP, the HP after the subtraction (after the addition) is “10/200”.

On the other hand, FIG. 50 (b2) shows an example in which the original number of additions is “50” but the number of additions displayed as “Blasting” is acquired on the image display. In this case, the additional number “50” is originally acquired. However, when the additional number “50” is added, the HP becomes negative. Therefore, the additional number “40” at which HP becomes “0” is obtained. Display an image. Then, when the additional number “40” is added, the HP becomes “0/200”.
Further, in the SR, when HP becomes “0” (addition number is “200”), as described above, “100” is further added as a bonus. Then, when HP becomes “0”, the termination condition of SR (main gaming state 3) is satisfied (see the termination condition (2) of main gaming state 3 in FIG. 37). In this case, “200 + 100 = 300” is stored in the GS counter.

For example, as shown in FIG. 50 (a), when the HP counter is small, for example, when a winning number that allows double symbol alignment is selected, the right first stop or 2 The player is made to operate the stop switch 42 at the first stop on the left without notifying that the consecutive symbols should be aimed. Then, after the third stop, “PUSH!” Is displayed, and when the chance button 24 is operated, “Destroy! (HP = 0)” is output.
In this way, it is possible to prevent an effect such that the added number exceeds “200”.

As described above, when HP becomes “0” during SR, the termination condition of SR (main game state 3) is satisfied, and in this case, the state shifts to main game state 6 (ART2; M strategy battle). To do.
On the other hand, SR ends before HP becomes “0” in the following cases (in most cases, SR ends before HP becomes “0”).
First, when transitioning to SR (main gaming state 3)
SR guaranteed game frequency counter = 8
SR security additional counter = 30 (D)
SR fall avoidance counter = 0
Fall flag = 0
Is set.

Then, as the SR game is digested, the counter for each game and the SR guaranteed game number is decremented by “1”. Therefore, the SR guaranteed game number counter becomes “0” when eight games are consumed. When the additional number is determined during SR, the additional number is subtracted from the SR guarantee additional counter. Since the initial value of the SR guarantee addition counter is “30”, for example, when the addition number “20” is acquired, “20” is subtracted from the SR guarantee addition counter and updated to “10”.
With the digestion of the SR game, when the SR guaranteed game number counter = 0, the SR guaranteed extra counter = 0, and the SR fall avoidance counter = 0 (this will be described later), every time from the next game The game, SR falling lottery begins. The SR falling lottery (decision) method may be any method, for example,
1) Every game, regardless of which winning number is won, a lottery to win a fall with a predetermined probability 2) To decide a fall when winning a predetermined winning number 3) To a predetermined winning number For example, a lottery lottery will be held when winning.

  In addition, during SR, it is a game in which HP is subtracted (added the number of additions) based on the fact that a winning symbol that can stop two symbols is won, other than the winning number that can stop two symbols In some cases, the winning number is a so-called rare role. Even if a rare role is won during SR, it is disadvantageous for the player not to give any profit to the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, when winning numbers (rare roles) other than the winning number that can stop the double symbols, such as small roles E to G of the winning numbers “44” to “46” are won, SR Add “1” to the fall avoidance counter. In this embodiment, when the rare role is won, “1” is uniformly added. For example, when a rare role with a very low winning probability is won according to the winning probability of the rare role, SR falls. It is also possible to add “2” or more to the avoidance counter.

  When SR guaranteed game number counter = 0 and SR guaranteed addition counter = 0, if SR fall avoidance counter ≠ 0, every game, SR fall avoidance counter is set to “1” from the next game. Subtract. Not only the SR fall avoidance counter is decremented by “1” every game, but also the number of games is “8” or more which is the number of SR guaranteed games, and the additional number is “30” or more which is the SR guaranteed number of additions. Then, “1” may be subtracted on condition that the winning number for executing the SR falling lottery is won. When the SR fall avoidance counter is not 0, the SR fall lottery is not performed. Then, when the SR fall avoidance counter = 0 (and the SR guaranteed game number counter = 0 and the SR guaranteed extra counter = 0), the SR fall lottery starts. By setting in this way, it is possible to give the player a benefit that the SR falling lottery can be avoided when the rare combination that does not stop the double symbols during SR is won.

The examples shown in FIGS. 45 to 50 show the effect images during the SR, but the content of the effect is the above in the main game state 11 (mission bonus) and the main game state 12 (C bonus). And have similarities.
As described above, in the main game states 11 and 12, the small combination H to small combination K2 with the winning numbers “47” to “55” are drawn. The small combination H to small combination K2 of the winning numbers “47” to “55” is a role corresponding to the replays D to G2 of the winning numbers “19” to “27” in SR.
Even in the main game state 11, when winning numbers “47” to “55” are won, as shown in FIG. 45, an image indicating that the two symbols should be aimed by right-pressing is displayed. In addition, since the main game states 11 and 12 (during the bonus) are not a game to be added, the added arrangement and HP are not displayed as images.

Further, when the double symbols are stopped, for example, as shown in FIG. 46A, the periphery of the display window 17 where the double symbols are stopped is displayed as an emphasized image.
Furthermore, in the main game state 12, when winning numbers “47” and “49” to “55” are won, an image display of “Aim by double-pressing the two symbols right!” Is displayed as in SR. On the other hand, when the winning combination “1” with the winning number “48” is won, an image is displayed as “Aim at the two consecutive symbols! As described above, when the winning combination “1” of the winning number “48” is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the middle first stop, the double symbol alignment can be stopped.

For example, in the main game state 12, after winning the small role I1 of the winning number "48", the double symbol alignment is stopped and the SR is confirmed, and again, the small role I1 of the winning number "48" is won. In some cases, the following control method is used.
1) Notify again that the second symbol should be aimed at the middle first stop. In this case, a privilege that is more advantageous to the player may or may not be granted. The privilege may be a privilege such as displaying a rare image (video) in addition to a substantial score such as addition of the number of SR games.
2) Notify the right first stop and stop only one double symbol. This is because it is not necessary for the player to make the double symbol alignment again in the case where the SR is confirmed when the small combination I1 with the winning number "48" is won.
3) Aim for a double symbol and do not notify the pressing order (or perform the above-mentioned “erasure navigation”). This is to prevent the two symbols from being stopped after that when SR is confirmed when the winning combination I1 with the winning number "48" is won.
In addition, when a winning symbol that can stop two symbols is won, if the player does not output an effect that informs the right first stop and that the two symbols should be aimed, Even if the first stop is performed and the two symbols are stopped, the enhancement effect is not output. In such a case, when the double symbol is stopped, it is possible to output no effect related to the double symbol, or to output another effect different from the emphasis effect.

In addition, when shifting from the main game state 0 or 1 to the main game state 11 (mission bonus), the emphasis is on showing the above-mentioned first half part and second half part effects and the two-line stop effect. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the total number of acquired images in the mission bonus is not imaged. In particular, the total number acquired is not displayed in the final game of the mission bonus. By not displaying the total number of acquired images as an image, it is possible to concentrate on the effect of whether or not the SR is won without worrying about the total number of acquired images. However, the number of acquired games (7) for each game may be displayed as an image. The number of acquired 7 games for each game is also displayed by the acquired number display LED 78.
The number of digested games and / or the remaining number of games in the mission bonus may be displayed as an image. Further, the number of digested games and / or the number of remaining games may be displayed as an image separately for the first half part and the second half part.

On the other hand, in the main game state 12 (C bonus) transferred from the main game state 5 (T defeat battle; ART1), the total number acquired during the 1BBA game (the number acquired during the ART and the number acquired during the 1BBA game) (The total number of images obtained by adding together) may be displayed as an image. The number acquired in 1BBA game is also added to the total number acquired in ART. This is to show the player that the total number of acquired tickets during ART further increases due to the shift to the 1BBA game during ART.
In the main game state 13 (bonus; 1BBB to 1BBD game), the total number acquired during 1BB game (the total number acquired during the ART and the number acquired during 1BBB-1BBD game may be added). Is displayed as an image.

Returning to FIG.
In FIG. 1, the external signal transmission means 70 transmits an external signal to the external concentration terminal board 100. This external signal is a signal indicating the start and end of an advantageous section, the start and end of ART, the start and end of operation of an accessory, and the like.

The control command transmission means 71 transmits information (control command) necessary for the effect output from the sub control board 80 to the sub control board 80.
The control command includes, for example, a first control command and a second control command. Each of the first control command and the second control command is, for example, 8-bit 1-byte data. One control command is a pair of the first control command and the second control command. For example, the first control command may be set to data indicating the type of control command, and the second control command may be set to data indicating a parameter (variable).

For example, in the case of a control command indicating RT, the first control command is “33 (H)” (00110011 (B)) in the present embodiment. In addition, when the parameter of RT is, for example, RT1, it is “00000001 (B)” in the present embodiment. Therefore, the two-byte data obtained by combining these, “00110011/00000001” (“/” indicates between the first control command and the second control command, and is not actually present) is an RT control command. Is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80.
The push order instruction number (instruction function operation game only), the production group number, and the accessory condition device number are also transmitted in the same manner as the RT. Also in this case, the first control command is type data, and the second control command is data stored in the RWM 53.

  Note that the control command transmission means 71 does not transmit the winning and replay condition device numbers to the sub-control board 80. For example, when the push order bell (small roles A1 to A6) is won, the correct push order may be known based on the winning and replay condition device numbers due to fraudulent acts. On the other hand, with respect to the accessory condition device number, there is no fear of the above fraud. Therefore, for example, when 1 BBA is won, the accessory condition device number “1” (00000001 (B)) is transmitted to the sub-control board 80.

Here, the main control board 50 provides the sub-control board 80 with all the address information shown in FIG. 40 and “F03A (H)” to “F040 (H)”, “F045 (H)” in FIG. "To" F048 (H) "can be transmitted.
The transmission timing of these pieces of information can be selected from various timings such as before the game starts (before the start switch 41 is operated), when the start switch 41 is operated, when the game ends, and the like.
The main control board 50 can also change the information to be transmitted according to the main game state. For example, when the main gaming state is 0, the information of “F024 (H)” to “F039 (H)” in FIG. 40 and “F03A (H)” to “F03D (H)” in FIG. Although not transmitted, in the main gaming state 5, the information of “F026 (H)” to “F02A (H)”, “F031 (H)” to “F032 (H)” may be transmitted.

In FIG. 1, the sub CPU 85 of the sub control board 80 includes effect output control means 91.
As described above, the effect output control means 91 is based on the control command transmitted from the main control board 50, specifically, each control command such as a push order instruction number, an effect group number, and an accessory condition device number. Thus, at what timing (when the start switch 41 is operated, when each stop switch 42 is operated, etc.) and what effect is output (how the lamp 21 is turned on, blinked or turned off, the speaker 22 And the like, such as what kind of sound is to be output and what kind of image is to be displayed on the image display device 23, etc.).

  Then, the effect output control means 91 controls the output of the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the image display device 23 according to the determination. In addition, during the 1BB operation or ART, the acquired number, the number of games (the number of remaining games or the number of digested games), and the like are displayed as images. Further, during ART, when the instruction function is activated, the correct pressing order is notified (image display). For example, when a small role A6 is won in a game in ART and a control command corresponding to the push order instruction number is received, the correct answer is given by the player, such as “right, middle, left” which is the correct push order. The contents which can easily know the pressing order are notified.

  Furthermore, it can be said that the control command for the production group number does not include information on which winning number (role) is actually won, but includes rough winning information. For example, when a control command corresponding to the production group number “17” (see FIG. 14) indicating that the small role A group has been won is received, the sub control board does not determine which of the small role A groups has been won. You cannot know on the 80 side. However, it is possible to know whether any small role group A has been won. Therefore, it is possible to output effects such as displaying the symbol of “bell” or lighting the frame lamp with “yellow” which is the corresponding color of “bell”.

Next, the control flow of this embodiment will be described.
In the present embodiment, a main process (also referred to as a main loop) that is performed once per game is provided as information processing for proceeding with a game (FIG. 51). The main process is a process in which inserted medals are detected or a winning process is performed after all reels 31 are stopped.
During this main process, the main process is temporarily exited, and an interrupt process (timer interrupt process; FIG. 63) described later is executed. In the interrupt processing, processing for detecting the input port 51 and the like are executed, and after execution of these processing, processing for returning to the main processing again is periodically performed. The interval of the interrupt time is 2.235 ms in this embodiment. That is, the data of the input port 51 is acquired for each interrupt process at intervals of 2.235 ms.

  Based on the acquired data, the level data of the input port 51 (data indicating ON / OFF of each bit) and the rising data of the input port (data that was turned off at the time of the previous interruption and turned on at the time of the current interruption) Data indicating which bit is present) and falling data of the input port (data indicating which bit is the data that was turned on at the previous interrupt and turned off at the previous interrupt) are generated and stored. Therefore, these data are updated every 2.235 ms.

In addition, all of the input ports 51 are detected regardless of when the interrupt processing is performed. For example, since the player cannot operate the bet switch 40 while the reel 31 is rotating (before the stop switch 42 is operated), the bit data of the input port corresponding to the bet switch 40 is not necessarily acquired. However, in the present invention, all bit data is acquired. If all the bit data is acquired, it is possible to make an error determination. For example, the rise data of the bet switch 40 is turned on while the reel 31 is rotating.
For example, if 1-byte data (8 bits) of the input port is acquired, it is possible to know the on / off status of all the operation switches.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) processing in the present embodiment.
52, 55, 57 to 58, and 60 to 62 are processes showing a subroutine during the main process.

In FIG. 51, in step S51, a stack pointer is set. Specifically, it is a process of setting “F200 (H)” as an initial value as a stack pointer. For example, when “F200 (H)” is designated as the stack pointer, the address at which information such as registers is stored in the stack area is the stack area (F1E0 (H) to F1FF (H)). “F1FF (H)”.
In the next step S52, game start set processing (MS_GAME_SET) is performed. If it progresses to step S52, it will transfer to the process of FIG. 52 mentioned later.

In the next step S53, a bet medal is read. This process is a process of reading the number of medals bet at the present time (unlike reading of the stored number).
In the next step S54, the presence / absence of a bet medal is determined based on the bet number read in step S53.

  If it is determined in step S54 that there is a bet medal, the process proceeds to step S56. If it is determined that there is no bet medal, the process proceeds to step S55 to perform a medal insertion waiting process, and the process proceeds to step S56. The medal insertion waiting process is a process of detecting a setting key switch signal and determining whether or not a game standby display start time has elapsed.

In step S56, medal management processing is performed. This process is a process for determining whether or not a medal has been inserted and whether or not the settlement switch 46 has been operated.
In the next step S57, a soft random number update process is performed. This process is a process of updating (for example, adding “1” by one) a processing random number for processing (arithmetic processing) into a random number (hard random number or built-in random number) used in the role lottery means 61. The soft random number is a 16-bit random number having a range of 0 to 65535 (D). As an update method, a process of adding an interrupt count value (a count value (variable) incremented at the time of an interrupt) to a value before update may be executed.

In the next step S58, the main control board 50 performs a start switch check process. This process is a process for determining whether or not the start switch 41 is operated. In the start switch check in step S58, when it is determined that the start switch 41 is operated, the process proceeds to step S59, and when it is determined that the start switch 41 is not operated, the process returns to step S53.
In step S59, a start switch receiving process is performed. In this process, various flags are set, the medal bet signal output count is set, and the like.

  Next, proceeding to step S60, the main control board 50 (role lottery means 61) draws a winning number (role). Here, at the timing when the start switch 41 is operated, that is, when the operation signal of the start switch 41 is received, the lottery of the winning number is executed. That is, the random number value at the time of the lottery drawing is acquired by receiving the start switch in step S59. Then, in step S60, a process is performed to determine whether the acquired random number value is a random number value corresponding to any winning number using a lottery table. Then, a winning and replay condition device number and an accessory condition device number are generated from the winning number, and in FIG. 41, the winning and replay condition device number of the address “F044 (H)” and the address of “F045 (H)” are generated. It is stored in the accessory condition device number.

In the next step S61, start time control (M_START_CTL) is executed (FIG. 58 described later). Although details of this processing will be described later, processing at the start of the game according to the current main game state is performed.
In step S62, the main control board 50 (push order instruction number selection means 63) executes a push order instruction number setting process. This process performs the process of selecting the push order instruction number and storing it in the address “F03F (H)” of the RWM 53 in the game (instruction function operation game) that displays the push order instruction information according to the winning number. By this processing, push order instruction information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.
Next, proceeding to step S63, the main control board 50 (effect group number selection means 64) executes effect group number setting processing. In this process, an effect group number corresponding to the winning and replay condition device number stored in the address “F044 (H)” is selected, and the selected number is stored in the address “F040 (H)” of the RWM 53. This is a process of storing the effect group number in the control command buffer in order to transmit the effect group number to the sub-control board 80.

In the next step S64, a reel rotation start preparation process is executed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the minimum game time has elapsed.
Next, proceeding to step S65, the reel control means 65 starts the rotation of the reel 31. In the next step S <b> 66, the main control board 50 performs stop control of the reel 31. This process is a process for controlling the stop of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected.

If it is determined in step S66 that all the reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S67.
In step S67, first, symbol display determination is performed. Here, the winning determination means 66 determines whether or not the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is stopped on the active line. Then, the symbol combination flag (F04A (H)) is updated in accordance with the stopped symbol combination. For example, when it is determined that the replay symbol combination has stopped at the active line, the D0 bit of the symbol combination flag is set to “1”.

In step S67, secondly, the value of the medal payout number data is updated. For example, when a winning combination of 7 is won and the medal payout number data so far is “0”, the number is updated from “0” to “7”.
In step S68, it is determined whether a symbol display error has occurred. If it is determined that a symbol display error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S73. If it is determined that no display error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S69.

Here, since the stop of the reel 31 is executed based on the stop position determination table, the reel 31 does not normally stop at a position other than the position determined by the stop position determination table. However, as a result of the display determination of the symbol, when a symbol that should not be displayed (a kicked symbol) is displayed on the active line, it is determined that there is an abnormality, and when it proceeds to step S73, it cannot be recovered. Perform error handling. This symbol combination abnormality error is referred to as an “E5” error, and “E5” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 to stop the main process.
In addition, when the unrecoverable error processing is executed, turn off the power once (turn off the power), and turn on the power with the setting key switch on (return the power) (the set value is It is possible to cancel by changing to the changeable setting change mode.
Further, when the unrecoverable error process is executed, all the data in the RWM 53 is set to an initial value (in this embodiment, “0” is cleared) by performing a procedure for shifting to the setting change mode.
Furthermore, when the non-recoverable error processing is not executed and a procedure for shifting to the setting change mode is performed, some data of the RWM 53 is set to the initial value (setting value data, game The history information is not initialized).
Further, when the end condition of the setting change mode is satisfied, the process is started from the main process in step S50.

In step S69, the payout means 67 executes a medal payout process corresponding to the winning combination. This processing includes actual medal payout processing, processing for setting the number of payout signal outputs, and the like. In the next step S70, the main control board 50 executes a game end check process (M_GAME_CHK; FIG. 60). This process is a process of clearing various flags.
In the next step S71, an output request at the end of the game is set. This process is a process of storing information to be transmitted as a control command in the D register and the E register in order to transmit to the sub-control board 80 that one game has been completed. Specifically, “3F (H)” is stored in the D register and “FF (H)” is stored in the E register.

In step S72, the main control board 50 executes the control command set 1. This process is a process of storing control command data to be transmitted to the sub control board 80 in a control command buffer (not shown) provided in the RWM 53.
Then, when the process of step S72 is completed, the process returns to step S50 again.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the game start set (MS_GAME_SET) in step S52 of FIG.
First, in step S101, a game standby display start time is set. This process is a process of setting “26846 (D)” to the game standby display start time of the addresses “F055 (H)” and “F056 (H)”.
Specifically, first, “26846 (D)” is stored in the HL register. Next, the HL register value is stored in addresses “F055 (H)” and “F056 (H)”.
Here, when the game standby display start time is set, “1” is subtracted for each interrupt process from this point.

When the game standby display start time becomes “0”, the acquired number data stored in the predetermined area of the RWM 53 is cleared in the medal insertion waiting of step S55 in FIG. As a result, “00” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. For example, when the number of medals paid out in the previous game is “7” and “07” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78, the player pays out by operating the checkout switch 46 and ends the game. In this case, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 is switched from “07” to “00” after about 1 minute. Thereby, it has the effect that a vacant stand can be reduced by being able to recognize a hall clerk and another player as a vacant stand.
If the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 is not cleared, assuming that the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 is, for example, “07” when the hall is closed, the number of acquisitions is made if the setting is changed. If the display LED 78 is “00” and the setting is not changed, the acquisition number display LED 78 is “07”, and the player knows whether or not the setting has been changed when the hall is opened. End up. Therefore, if the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 is switched to “00” after about one minute, the hall opens after at least about one minute or more after the power is turned on. Can be set to “00” so that it is not possible to know whether or not the setting has been changed.

The acquired number display LED 78 after the game standby display start time elapses is not limited to “00” but may be “* 0” or “**”. Here, “*” indicates light extinction.
When “* 0” is displayed, when the game standby display start time is “0”, the LED display request flag in the upper digits of the acquisition number display LED 78 (a flag for determining which LED is lit) ) To “0”. Thereby, even when the interrupt processing is performed when the acquired number display LED 78 is lit up, it is possible to control so that the segment of the upper digit is not lit.
Similarly, when “**” is displayed, when the game standby display start time is “0”, the LED display request flags for the upper and lower digits of the acquired number display LED 78 may be set to “0”. Can be mentioned. Thereby, even when the interrupt processing is when the upper digit or the lower digit of the acquisition number display LED 78 is lit, it is possible to control so that the upper digit segment and the lower digit segment are not lit.

In the next step S102, the symbol combination display flag data is acquired. This process is a process of storing the symbol combination on the active line after the reel 31 is stopped in the previous game, that is, the data of the symbol combination display flag (“F04A (H)”) in the A register.
In the next step S103, it is determined whether or not an SB or BB action symbol is displayed. Specifically, first, the operating state flag address “F049 (H)” is stored in the HL register. Next, when the D3 bit or D5 bit of the A register value is not “1”, it is determined as “No”.
When “No” is determined in step S103, the process proceeds to step S120, and when “Yes” is determined, the process proceeds to step S104.

In step S104, the operating state flag is stored. Specifically, the following processing is executed.
1) At the time of 1BB operation, the D2 bit (RB) of the A register value is set to “1”, and the A register value is stored in the operation state flag (address indicated by the HL register value).
2) When 1BB is not in operation (when SB is in operation), the A register value is stored in the operation state flag (address indicated by the HL register value).
In the next step S105, it is determined whether or not the SB operation symbol is displayed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D5 bit of the A register value is “1”. If the D5 bit is “1”, it is determined “Yes”. When it is determined that the SB operation symbol is displayed, the process proceeds to step S120. When the SB operation symbol is not displayed (that is, when the 1BB operation symbol is displayed), the process proceeds to step S106.
Therefore, the process of steps S106 to S119 is a process at the time of displaying the BB action symbol (at the start of the BB game).

In step S106, the advantageous section type is updated. Here, the following processing is executed.
1) The advantageous section type (address “F021 (H)”) is stored in the A register.
2) When the value of the A register is “0” or “1”, the value of the A register is maintained. When the A register value is “2”, the A register value is updated to “1” on the condition that the combination of symbols of 1BB is stopped and displayed. This process is a process for making an advantageous section particularly in the case of a standby section.
3) The A register value is stored in the advantageous section type (address “F021 (H)”).

In the next step S107, the maximum instruction generation flag is stored. This process is a process of storing the A register value (“1” when the combination of symbols of 1BB is stopped and displayed) at the address “F028 (H)”.
Here, as a general rule, the maximum instruction generation flag is a flag that is set to “1” when the instruction function is activated for the first time in the small section A group winning in the advantageous section. On the other hand, even if the instruction function is not activated when the small role A group is selected, in the present embodiment, the maximum instruction generation flag can be set to “1” when the 1BB operation symbol is displayed. Therefore, the process of setting the maximum instruction generation flag to “1” is executed when the 1BB operation symbol is displayed. Since the A register value is “1” in the most recent process, the maximum instruction generation flag is set to “1” using this value.

In the next step S108, an accessory condition apparatus number is acquired. This process is a process of storing the value stored in the address “F045 (H)” in the A register. Next, the process proceeds to step S109, and it is determined whether or not the A register value (the accessory condition device number) is less than “3”. When the A register value is “3”, it means that 1 BBC has been won, and when it is “4”, it means that 1 BBD has been won. That is, the fact that the A register value is not less than “3” means “3” or “4”, and therefore means that 1BBC or 1BBD is won. When it is not less than “3”, the process proceeds to step S110, and when it is less than “3”, the process proceeds to step S111.
In step S110, “3” is stored in the A register. In the present embodiment, the information (same number) indicating that the same RB is activated and the same end condition is the same when the 1BBC is activated and when the 1BBD is activated. Remember.

In step S111, the operation type is stored. In this process, the A register value is stored in the operation type of the address “F04B (H)”.
In the next step S112, the accessory condition device number is cleared. This process is a process of clearing ("0") the information stored at the address "F045 (H)". Thereby, the winning information ("1" to "4") of 1BBA to 1BBD is cleared. In other words, the process of step S110 in the game start set process can be executed by making the timing different from the timing of clearing the winning information of the small role or the replay and the winning information of the SB.
In the next step S113, the RT state number is cleared. This process is a process of clearing ("0") the information stored at the address "F046 (H)".
In the next step S114, the BB internal medium flag is cleared. This process is a process of clearing ("0") the information stored in the address "F03E (H)".

In step S115, the BB acquisition number table is set. This process is a process of storing the address of the BB acquisition number table in the HL register.
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a BB acquisition number table of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 53, the BB acquired number table is a table in which three types of acquired number are stored in 2 bytes. Addresses “1300 (H)” and “1301 (H)” indicate the upper limit number of acquisitions in 1 BBA game, and addresses “1302 (H)” and “1303 (H)” indicate the upper limit acquisition number in 1 BBB game. The addresses “1304 (H)” and “1305 (H)” indicate the upper limit number of acquisitions in 1BBC and 1BBD games. Therefore, when the acquired number of games is reached in the BB game, it means that the end condition of the BB game is satisfied. For example, in a 1BBA game, when the number of acquired games is “92” or more, the end condition of the 1BBA game (1BBA operation) is satisfied.

Specifically,
1300 (H): 01011100 (B)
1301 (H): 00000000 (B)
1302 (H): 01101101 (B)
1303 (H): 00000001 (B)
1304 (H): 00111101 (B)
1305 (H): 00000000 (B)
Are stored.
For example, as described above, in the main game state 11 (mission bonus), the first half part 9 game and the second half part 5 game total 14 games. In the mission bonus, 7 payouts per game are obtained, so “7 × 14 = 98”, and the end condition of 1 BBA is satisfied in the 14th game.
In step S115, the HL register stores “12FE (H)”, that is, a value obtained by subtracting “2” from the head address of the BB acquisition number table.

In the next step S116, the designated address 2-byte data is set. Here, the following processing is executed.
1) The result of adding the A register value to the HL register value is stored in the HL register value.
2) The result of adding the A register value to the HL register value is stored in the HL register value.
3) Store the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value in the HL register.
Here, the operation type (“1” to “3”) is stored in the A register as described above.
Therefore, by the above process,
When the A register value is “1”, “92 (D)” is stored in the HL register,
When the A register value is “2”, “349 (D)” is stored in the HL register,
When the A register value is “3”, “61 (D)” is stored in the HL register.

  In the next step S117, the acquirable number at the time of BB operation is stored. In this process, the HL register value is stored in the addresses “F047 (H)” and “F048 (H)”. Since “F048 (H)” is a high-order digit storage area, when the HL register value is “92 (D)” or “61 (D)”, the value of “F048 (H)” is “ 0 ".

  In the mission bonus, the SR winning probability in the first half part is different from the SR winning probability in the second half part. Specifically, the first half part has a higher SR win probability than the second half part. The winning probabilities of the first half part and the second half part are stored in the ROM 54. Then, the main control board 50 determines whether the game is the first half part or the second half part based on the obtainable number at the time of BB operation, and sets the SR winning probability based on that. Specifically, when the address data for storing the number of acquirable sheets at the time of BB operation is not less than “36”, it can be determined as the first half part, and when it is less than “36”, it can be determined as the second half part. Thereby, the BB game end condition and the SR lottery (winning probability) can be managed substantially by one, so that the processing can be simplified and the storage capacity can be reduced. In other words, the first half part and the second half part can be determined without providing a storage area (RWM address) for storing the number of games during BB operation.

  In addition, as described above, even for gaming machines having a plurality of types of 1BB (four types in the present embodiment), the same information (operation) for those having the same end condition (the same number of acquirable sheets) (In this embodiment, 1BBC and 1BBD are combined into information “3”), the process of storing the acquirable number at the time of BB operation in the RWM 53 can be simplified. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the processing based on the BB acquisition number table and the operation type information can simplify the process of storing the acquisition number at the time of BB operation.

In step S118, a timer table at the start of BB operation is set.
Here, the timer table during BB operation will be described.
FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining a timer table during BB operation. In FIG. 54, (A) shows a BB operation start timer table (TBL_BBSTA_TM) and a BB operation end timer table (TBL_BBEND_TM). Moreover, (B) is a figure which shows the kind of BB, and the standby | waiting (wait) time at the time of an accessory operation | movement start and completion | finish.
In the BB timer table, “when BB operation starts” means when the BB operation symbol is displayed (“No” in step S105 in FIG. 52). Therefore, “1BB operation (winning)” in FIG. 34 described above and “1BB condition device operation (winning)” in FIGS. 36 to 39 are different.
Also, “at the end of BB operation” is the end of the game when the acquired number of games reaches the upper limit, and this point is “end of 1BB operation” in FIG. 34 or “1BB in FIGS. 36 to 39”. It is the same as “End of condition device operation”.

As shown in FIG. 54 (B), depending on the type of the winning combination (1BBA, 1BBB, 1BBC or 1BBD) and the main game state at the time of winning, the waiting is executed at the start and end of the BB operation. Time is predetermined. For example, when 1BBA is won in the main game state 0 and a 1BBA action symbol is displayed, a standby process of “799.07 ms” is executed at the start of the 1BBA game, and a standby process of “2999.37 ms” at the end of the 1BBA game. Execute.
During the execution of these standby processes, the effects at the start and end of the BB game by the sub-control board 80 are output. Since it is necessary to output an effect of time according to the type of BB at the time of winning the BB and the main game state at that time, different waiting times are provided.
Since the standby process is executed by the main control board 50, the game cannot proceed during the standby process. Therefore, for example, even if the bet switch 40 is operated, it is ignored (betting processing cannot be performed).

Further, the reason why the waiting time at the start of the BB operation and at the end of the operation is made different according to the type of 1BB is as follows.
For example, when winning 1BBA in the main gaming state 0 and shifting to the mission bonus, the standby time at the start of BB operation is set longer. This is because, in the mission bonus, SR (and hence ART) lottery is executed, so that an effect that expects the player is output via the effect.
On the other hand, when 1BB (1BBA to 1BBD) is won in the main game state 10, the waiting time at the start of the BB operation is set to be extremely short. This is because the main game state 10 is ending and the ending effect is continued even during the 1BB game. This also applies to the standby time at the end of the BB operation in the main gaming state 10.
In addition, when transitioning to 1BB game during ART game, since an effect different from that when transitioning from main game state 0 to mission bonus (1BBA game) is output, the waiting time at the start of both BB operations is made different. ing.
Furthermore, in the main gaming state 1, the waiting time is lengthened at the end of the operation of the 1BBC or 1BBD game because of whether the transition to SR (ART) is made after the 1BBC or 1BBD game is finished. This is to output a stuttering production.

  In FIG. 54 (A), the number of interrupts corresponding to the standby time is stored in the timer table when the BB operates. For example, in the timer table at the start of the BB operation, the smallest value is “672 (D)”, but the time corresponding to the interrupt count “672” is “672 × 2.235 = 1501.92 ms”. Become. Therefore, “672 (D)” stored in the address “141C (H)” substantially stores the standby time “1501.92 ms” at the start of the BB operation. For example, as shown in FIG. 54 (B), when 1BBA is won in the main game state 10, the waiting time at the time of displaying the 1BBA operation symbol is “1501.92 ms”. “672 (D)” stored in “H)” is selected.

As shown in FIG. 54A, each of the BB operation start timer table and the BB operation end timer table has a 2-byte storage area arranged continuously. Each of the BB operation start timer table and the BB operation end timer table includes seven types of data storage areas (for example, in the BB operation start time table, BB operation start waiting times 1 to 7). The address shown in FIG. 54 indicates the lower address of 2 bytes.
At the time of BB operation start, the address of the timer table at the time of BB operation start is specified based on the selected BB and the main game state, the value (number of interrupts) stored in the address is read, and the address “F053 (H) ( "Lower digit)" and "F054 (H) (upper digit)" are stored in the standby time. Then, “1” is subtracted every time the interrupt process is executed. When the standby time becomes “0”, it is determined that the standby time has elapsed. Details of this processing will be described later.

The description returns to FIG. In the BB operation start timer table set in step S118, specifically, a value “2” smaller than the head address value of the BB operation start timer table, that is, “140E (H)” is stored in the DE register.
In step S119, BB timer management (BB_TIME_CTL) is executed. This process is the process of FIG. 55 described later. As described above, the process of setting the waiting time (the value stored in the predetermined address of the timer table at the BB operation start time in FIG. 54A is changed to the address “ F053 (H) (lower digit) ”and“ F054 (H) (upper digit) ”.
As is apparent from the above, when the SB action symbol is displayed, the standby time at the start of the SB game is not set.
In the next step S120, advantageous section setting (M_ADV_SET) is executed. This process is a process of FIG. 57 to be described later, and is a process for updating the advantageous section clear counter.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S121, and it is determined whether or not the standby time set in step S119 has become "0". In this process, the value of the address “F053 (H)” is stored in the L register (lower digit), and the value of the address “F054 (H)” is stored in the H register (upper digit). Then, it is determined whether or not the HL register value is “0”. When it is determined that the value is not “0”, the process of step S121 is continued until “0” is reached. Thereby, the standby process at the time of starting the BB operation is executed. And when it is judged as "0" at Step S121, it progresses to Step S122.

In step S122, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section clear counter is “0”. In this process, the address “F022 (H)” is stored in the L register (lower digit), and “F023 (H)” is stored in the H register (upper digit). Then, it is determined whether or not the HL register value is “0”. When it is determined that the value is “0”, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S123.
In step S123, the advantageous section display flag is stored. This process is a process of storing “10000000 (B)” (lit) in the advantageous section display flag of the address “F04C (H)”. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

  In the above process, the process proceeds to step S123 after the elapse of the standby time in step S121, and the lighting process of the advantageous zone display LED 77 is executed. Therefore, after the 1BB operation symbol is displayed, the advantageous zone display is performed using the standby time. It can be determined whether or not the LED 77 is lit.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing BB timer management (BB_TIME_CTL) in step S119 in FIG.
First, in step S141, a BB timer management table is set. This process is a process of storing, in the HL register, an address “13FF (H)” obtained by subtracting “1” from “1400 (H)” which is a head address (described later) of the BB timer management table (TBL_BBTM_CTL).
When the process proceeds to step S141, the operation type ("1" to "3") is stored in the A register, and the address of the timer table is stored in the DE register when the BB operation starts (or when the operation ends). Has been. In particular, when the process proceeds from step S118 to step S119 in FIG. 52, “140E (H)” is stored in the DE register as described above. On the other hand, when the process proceeds from step S267 in FIG. 62 described later to step S268, a value obtained by subtracting “2” from the start address of the timer table at the end of BB operation, that is, “141E (H)” is stored in the DE register. ing.

Here, the BB timer management table and the 1BB timer table will be described.
FIG. 56 is a diagram illustrating a BB timer management table and a 1BB (1BBA, 1BBB, 1BBC, and 1BBD) timer table.
As shown in FIG. 56, the address of the BB timer management table has “1400 (H)”, “1401 (H)”, and “1402 (H)”, which are respectively for 1BBA operation time, 1BBB This is a storage area for storing values for operation, 1BBC, or 1BBD operation.

As the 1BB timer table, a 1BBA timer table, a 1BBB timer table, a 1BBC, and a 1BBD timer table are provided.
Each 1BB timer table has four addresses, and a predetermined value is stored in each address. For example, the 1BBA timer table is composed of four addresses “1403 (H)” to “1406 (H)”. For example, “1” is stored in “1403 (H)”.
The four addresses of each 1BB timer table correspond to the main gaming state buffer 0, the main gaming state buffer 1, the main gaming state buffers 3 to 9, and the main gaming state buffer 10, respectively.

For example, when the address of the 1BBA timer table is “1403 (H)”, “3 (H)” is stored in “1400 (H)”.
When the address of the 1BBB timer table is “1407 (H)”, “6 (H)” is stored in “1401 (H)”.
Furthermore, when the addresses of the 1BBC and 1BBD timer tables are “140B (H)”, “9 (H)” is stored in “1402 (H)”.

Specify the waiting time (the number of waiting interrupts) at the start and end of the BB operation using the timer table at the start or end of operation shown in FIG. 54 and the BB timer management table and 1BB timer table shown in FIG. Can do.
For example, when “6 (H)” is stored in “1400 (H)” of the BB timer management table, the value “7 (H)” stored in “1406 (H)” of the 1BBA timer table is stored. Select. For example, when the BB operation starts, the value stored in the address advanced by seven (two addresses per one) with respect to “140E (H)”, that is, the address “141C (H)” (waiting when the BB operation starts) “672 (D)” of time 7) is acquired.
Therefore, when the main game state buffer at the start of the operation of 1BBA is 10, the standby time (number of interrupts) at the start of 1BB is “672 (D)”.
The waiting time corresponding to the “672” interrupt is “672 × 2.235 ms = 1501.92 ms”, which is described in FIG.

In FIG. 55, in step S142, a table is selected. Here, the following processing is executed.
1) The value obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is stored in the HL register, and the value stored in the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
2) The value obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is stored in the HL register.
By the processing of 1), the HL register value becomes any one of “1400 (H)” to “1402 (H)”.
The A register value is the value stored at the address of the HL register value.
Furthermore, in the process 2), the HL register
a) Start address of 1BBA timer table (1403 (H))
b) Top address of 1BBB timer table (1407 (H))
c) First address of timer table of 1BBC and 1BBD (140B (H))
Is stored.

In the next step S143, “3” is set as the management number setting value. This process is a process of storing “3” in the C register.
Next, proceeding to step S144, it is determined whether or not the main gaming state buffer is “10”. This process stores the main game state buffer of address “F02C (H)” in the A register, determines whether the A register is “10”, and determines “Yes” when it is “10”. To do.
When it is determined that the main game state buffer is “10”, the process proceeds to step S147, and when it is determined that the main game state buffer is not “10”, the process proceeds to step S145.
In step S145, it is determined whether or not the main game state buffer is less than “2”. In this process, as in step S144, it is determined whether or not the A register value is less than “2”. If it is less than “2”, it is determined as “Yes”. When it is determined that it is less than “2”, the process proceeds to step S148, and when it is determined that it is not less than “2”, the process proceeds to step S146.

In step S146, “2” is set as the management number setting value. This process is a process of subtracting “1” from the previously stored C register value.
In the next step S147, a management number setting value is set. This process is a process of storing the C register value in the A register.
In the next step S148, designated address data is set. In this process, the result of adding the A register value to the HL register value is stored in the HL register, and the value stored in the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
For example, when the 1BBA timer table is selected in the process of step S142, that is, when the HL register value is “1403 (H)”, the following is performed based on the A register value (“0” to “3”). Data is selected and stored in the A register.

For example,
1) When the HL register value is “1403 (H)” and the A register value is “0”, the value “1” of “1403 (H)” in the 1BBA timer table is selected and stored in the A register.
2) When the HL register value is “1403 (H)” and the A register value is “1”, the value “2” of “1404 (H)” in the 1BBA timer table is selected and stored in the A register.
3) When the HL register value is “1403 (H)” and the A register value is “2”, the value “2” of “1405 (H)” in the 1BBA timer table is selected and stored in the A register.
4) When the HL register value is “1403 (H)” and the A register value is “3”, the value “7” of “1406 (H)” in the 1BBA timer table is selected and stored in the A register.

The above is the same when the HL register value is “1407 (H)” of the 1BBB timer table and when the HL register value is “140B (H)” of the 1BBC and 1BBD timer tables.
As described above, in step S143, “3” is first set as the management number setting value, and when the main game state buffer is “10” (when “Yes” in step S144), the management number setting is performed. The value is maintained, and the management number setting value “3” is set in the A register in step S147. Then, since the value stored in the address obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is selected, the value of the address whose main difference in the 1BB timer table in FIG. 56 is “3” (main) The gaming state buffer 10) will be selected.
On the other hand, if the main game state buffer is not less than “2” in step S145, “2” is set as the management number setting value in step S146. Then, since the value stored in the address obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is selected, the value of the address whose main difference is “2” in each 1BB timer table in FIG. 56 (main The game state buffers 3 to 9) are selected.

In FIG. 55, in a step S149, designated address 2-byte data is set. Here, the following processing is executed.
1) Exchange DE register value and HL register value. Here, as described in step S <b> 141, the DE register stores a timer table when the BB operation starts or when the operation ends. Therefore, by this processing, the address of the timer table at the start or end of the BB operation is stored in the HL register.
2) The result of adding the A register value to the HL register value is stored in the HL register value.
3) The result of adding the A register value to the HL register value is stored in the HL register value.
4) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the HL register.
By the process of 4), the number of interrupts corresponding to the waiting time is stored in the HL register (FIG. 54).
In step S150, the standby time is stored. In this process, the HL register value is stored in the standby times of the addresses “F053 (H)” and “F054 (H)”.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing advantageous section setting (M_ADV_SET) in step S120 of FIG.
First, in the advantageous section clear counter RWM address set in step S171, the address of the advantageous section clear counter is stored. Here, the advantageous section clear counter is composed of 2 bytes as described above, and here, the data of the address “F022 (H)” which is the lower byte is stored in the HL register.

In step S172, a 2-byte countdown is executed. Here, a process of subtracting “1” from the value (HL register value) of the advantageous section clear counter is executed.
In the 2-byte countdown, when the calculation result is “0” (that is, when the value before the calculation is “1”), the zero flag is “1”.
In the 2-byte countdown, when a carry occurs as a result of the calculation (that is, when the value before the calculation is “0”), the carry flag is “1”.

Next, proceeding to step S173, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section clear counter before the calculation is “0”. This determination is made when the carry flag described above becomes “1” after the 2-byte countdown calculation, and it is determined that the advantageous section clear counter before the calculation is “0”, and the carry flag is not “1”. Determines that the advantageous section clear counter before the calculation is not “0”.
When it is determined that the advantageous section clear counter before the calculation is “0”, the process proceeds to step S177, and when it is determined that it is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S174. Here, “the advantageous section clear counter before calculation is“ 0 ”” indicates that the previous game is a normal section or a standby section (non-advantage section).

In step S174, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section clear counter after the 2-byte countdown calculation is “0”. This determination is made when the above-described zero flag becomes “1” after the calculation, and it is determined that the advantageous interval clear counter after the calculation is “0”, and when the zero flag is not “1”, the advantage after the calculation is determined. It is determined that the section clear counter is not “0”. Here, “the calculated advantageous section clear counter is not“ 0 ”” indicates that the previous game and the current game are advantageous sections.
When it is determined that the advantageous section clear counter after the calculation is “0”, the process proceeds to step S175, and when it is determined that the advantageous section clear counter is not “0”, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. Here, “the advantageous section clear counter after calculation is“ 0 ”” means that the previous game was an advantageous section, but the current game is a normal section (non-advantageous section) (from an advantageous section to a normal section). To migrate).
In step S175, the number of RWM initialization bytes is set. In this process, the total value of the number of initialization bytes (the number of bytes of the RWM 53 to be cleared when the advantageous interval ends) is stored in the B register. For example, when the number of initialization bytes is “20 (H)”, “20 (H)” is set in the B register value.

  In step S176, RWM initialization is executed. Since this initialization is a process that is performed when the advantageous section clear counter value becomes “0” after subtraction of “1” (that is, when the termination condition of the advantageous section is satisfied), the data in the storage area related to the advantageous section Is a process for initializing (clearing). Here, at least data relating to the advantageous section (for example, counters and flags of addresses “F020 (H)” to “F03E (H)”, “F04C (H)”) are cleared.

Next, proceeding to step S177, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section type flag is “1”. This process determines whether or not the D0 bit of the advantageous section type flag (F021 (H)) is “1”. When it is “1”, it determines “Yes”, and when it is not “1”. It is determined as “No”. That is, this process determines whether or not the transition condition from the normal section or the standby section (non-advantage section) to the advantageous section is satisfied.
When it is determined that the game section type flag is “1” (the condition for transition to the advantageous section is satisfied), the process proceeds to step S178, and it is not “1” (the condition for transition to the advantageous section is not satisfied). When it is determined, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

In step S178, the initial value is stored (stored) in the advantageous section clear counter. The initial value of this embodiment is set to “1500 (D)”. Therefore, a process of storing “1500 (D)” in the addresses “F022 (H)” and “F023 (H)” is executed. Specifically, “DC (H)” is stored in “F022 (H)” (lower address), and “1” is added to “F022 (H)” (F023 (H); upper address). “5 (H)” is stored. Note that “5DC (H)” = “1500 (D)”.
And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

Note that when ART is ended and the advantageous section is also ended, only “1” is stored in the advantageous section clear counter, and thereafter, RWM initialization relating to the advantageous section can be executed.
Specifically, if “1” is stored in the advantageous section clear counter, the advantageous section setting of FIG. 57 is executed at the start of the next game, and “No” is obtained in step S173 and “Yes” in step S174. This is because the RWM initialization in step S176 is executed.

FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the start time control (M_START_CTL) in step S61 in FIG.
First, in step S191, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section type (value stored in the address “F021 (H)”) is “0”. When it is determined that it is “0” (normal section), the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. When it is determined that it is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S192.
In step S192, it is determined whether or not the BB internal flag (value stored in address “F03E (H)”) is “0”. When it is determined that it is “0” (not in the BB), the process proceeds to step S193, and when it is determined that it is not “0” (in the BB), the process proceeds to step S197.

In step S193, a start branch table by main gaming state is set.
Here, the main game state-specific game start branch table (CBL_STS_LEV) and the main game state-specific game end branch table (CBL_STS_END) will be described.
FIG. 59 shows these two tables.
The main game state-specific game start branch table has a range from addresses “1200 (H)” to “121B (H)”, and each has a storage area of 2 bytes. Each storage area stores a program address in which a branch processing module when the start switch 41 is operated is stored in accordance with the main game state. For example, the addresses “1200 (H)” and “1201 (H)” store a program address in which a branch processing module is stored when the start switch 41 is operated in the main gaming state 0.
In the two types of tables shown in FIG. 59, as described above, since the main game state 4 is not provided in the present embodiment, an address corresponding to the main game state 4 (for example, a branch at the start of a game by main game state) In the table, nothing is stored at addresses “1208 (H)” and “1209 (H)”).

Further, the branch table at the end of the game according to the main gaming state has a range from the address “1220 (H)” to “123B (H)”, and each has a storage area of 2 bytes. Each storage area stores a program address in which a branch processing module at the end of the game is stored in accordance with the main game state. For example, the addresses “1222 (H)” and “1223 (H)” store program addresses in which the branch processing modules at the end of the game when in the main game state 1 are stored.
Note that the main game state-specific game end branch table is set in step S237 of FIG. 61 described later.

The description returns to FIG.
In step S193, the head address, that is, “1200 (H)” is stored in the HL register as a set of the start branch table by main gaming state.
Next, it progresses to step S194 and a main game state is acquired. This process is a process of storing the main game state of the address “F020 (H)” in the A register.
In the next step S195, the designated address 2-byte data is set. Here, the following processing is executed.
1) The value obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is stored in the HL register value.
2) The value obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is stored in the HL register value.
3) Store the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value in the HL register.
As mentioned above. Since the first HL register value is “1200 (H)”, for example, when the A register value (main gaming state) is “5 (H)”, the HL register contains “121A (H)” (M_STS5_LEV The address of the main game state 5) is stored.

In step S196, the corresponding conditional branch process is executed. This process is a process (CALL instruction) for calling the module at the address (ROM 54) stored in the HL register. This process executes a predetermined process at the start of the game according to the main game state, and the specific process will be described later.
In the next step S197, it is determined whether or not the winning and replay condition device number is any of “32” to “37”. Here, the winning and replay condition device number of the address “F044 (H)” is stored in the A register, and when the A register value is any of “32 (D)” to “37 (D)” “Yes”. When it is determined “Yes” in step S197, the process proceeds to step S198, and when it is determined “No”, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

In step S198, it is determined whether or not the maximum instruction generation flag (address “F028 (H)”) is “0”. When it is determined that it is “0”, the process proceeds to step S199, and when it is determined that it is not “0”, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
In step S199, the maximum instruction generation flag (address “F028 (H)”) is updated to “1”. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.
By the above processing, the maximum instruction generation flag is not obtained when the advantageous section type is not “0”, not in the BB, and when the small role A group (winning and replay condition device numbers “32” to “37”) is won. When “0” is “0”, since the instruction function is activated in the game, the maximum instruction generation flag is updated to “1”. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

Next, the start process for each main gaming state in step S196 will be described. Hereinafter, “M_STS0_LEV” to “M_STS13_LEV” illustrated in FIG. 59 will be described.
1. M_STS0_LEV (Process at the start of game in main game state 0)
1) Based on the value stored in the accessory condition device number (F045 (H)), it is determined whether or not the special combination is being won. When it is determined that the special role is won, it is next determined whether or not the winning number including 1BBB without setting difference is won. When it is determined that the winning number including 1BBB without setting difference is won, “1” is stored in the SR winning counter (F026 (H)). When other special roles are won, the processing of “M_STS0_LEV” is terminated.
2) If it is determined in 1) above that the special role has not been won, the condition device number is “44” to “46” (based on the value stored in the winning and replay condition device number (F044 (H)). When it is determined whether or not the condition device number is “44” to “46”, “normal mode lottery” is executed. Then, the result of the normal mode lottery (“0” to “3”) is stored in the normal mode (F024 (H)).
Thus, the process of “M_STS0_LEV” is completed.

2. M_STS1_LEV (Processing at the start of the game in the main game state 1)
1) When the SR winning counter is “0” a) When the winning and replay condition device number is “30” (Replay J) When winning the winning number including 1BBA, the winning number without setting difference including 1BBB If it is one of the winning times, the lottery of the SR winning counter is executed. When the lottery is won, “1” is stored in the SR winning counter (F026 (H)).
b) Winning and replay conditions The device number is “31” (Replay K), “42” (Minor role D1), “44” to “46” (Minor role E to Minor role G) In the case of, the regular mode promotion lottery is executed. When the promotion lottery is won, the winning result is stored in the normal mode (F024 (H)). Further, the normal mode guarantee counter lottery is executed, and the winning result is stored in the normal mode guarantee counter (F025 (H)).
Thus, the process of “M_STS1_LEV” is completed.

c) When the above a) is not executed or when the promotion lottery is not won at the above b), the normal mode guarantee counter (F025 (H)) is decremented by “1”.
When the normal mode guarantee counter is “0” as a result of subtracting “1” from the normal mode guarantee counter, it is determined whether or not the maximum instruction generation flag (F028 (H)) is “1”. . If it is determined that the maximum instruction generation flag is “1”, and the winning and replay condition device number is “28” (replay H), a fall flag lottery is executed. When the falling flag lottery is won, the falling flag (F02B (H)) is updated to “1”.
When the maximum instruction generation flag is “0”, even if the winning and replay condition device number is “28”, the falling flag lottery is not executed.
Thus, the process of “M_STS1_LEV” is completed.

2) When the SR winning counter is “1” a) When the winning number without setting difference is won, the following processes a) and a) are executed.
A) The SR fall avoidance counter (F034 (H)) is drawn and the winning result is added to the SR fall avoidance counter.
A) The lottery of the SR guaranteed game number counter (F030 (H)) is executed, and the winning result is added to the SR guaranteed game number counter.
Thus, the process of “M_STS1_LEV” is completed.

3. M_STS2_LEV (Processing at the start of main game state 2 game)
1) When the main game state buffer is “3” a) When a winning number with no setting difference is won, the following processes a) and a) are executed.
A) The SR fall avoidance counter (F034 (H)) is lottery and the winning result is stored in the SR fall avoidance counter.
A) The lottery of the SR guaranteed game number counter (F030 (H)) is executed, and the winning result is stored in the SR guaranteed game number counter.
Thus, the process of “M_STS2_LEV” is completed.

2) When the main game state buffer is “5” a) When the GS counter (F029 (H)) is smaller than “5”, “5” is stored in the GS counter. For example, if 1BB is won when the main game state is “5” and the GS counter is “2”, and the game returns to the main game state “5” after the end of the 1BB game, the game in the main game state 5 is played. 5 games can be played. By doing in this way, at least 5 games can be played as the game of the main game state 5 after the end of 1BB, and when the main game state 5 is returned to the main game state 5, the main game state 5 is prevented from ending immediately. be able to. In addition, although the example which memorize | stores "5" in the GS counter was given, it is not restricted to "5". Further, “5” may be added to the GS counter.
b) When a winning number with no setting difference is won, an SR winning lottery is executed.
When SR is won, “1” is stored in the SR winning counter (F026 (H)), “8” is stored in the SR guaranteed game number counter (F030 (H)), and the SR guaranteed additional counter (F033 ( H)) is stored with “30 (D)”.
Thus, the process of “M_STS2_LEV” is completed.

3) When the main game state buffer is “6” a) When a winning number with no setting difference is won, a bullet lottery is executed. Then, according to the result of the lottery, the value determined by the lottery is added to the blow counter (F02E (H)) and the continuous shot counter (F02F (H)).
Thus, the process of “M_STS2_LEV” is completed.
4) When the main game state buffer is “9” When the M continuation flag (F03B (H)) is “0”, when the winning number without setting difference is won, the M continuation flag lottery is executed. When the lottery is won, “1” is stored in the M continuation flag.
Thus, the process of “M_STS2_LEV” is completed.

4). M_STS3_LEV (Process at the start of game in main game state 3)
1) “1” is subtracted from the SR guaranteed game number counter (F030 (H)).
When the SR guaranteed game number counter is “0” and the SR guaranteed extra counter is “0”, the following a) or b) is executed.
a) When the SR fall avoidance counter (F034 (H)) is not “0”, the SR fall avoidance counter is decremented by “1”.
b) When the SR fall avoidance counter is “0”, the SR fall flag lottery is executed at the time of winning the push order replay (winning numbers “1” to “12”) with no setting difference. When the lottery is won (decided to fall), “1” is stored in the fall flag (F02B (H)).
2) After the above 1), when winning 2 consecutive replays (winning numbers “20” to “27”) with no setting difference, lottery numbers will be drawn from the extra array (F035 (H) to F039 (H)) Determined by On the other hand, if the double replay with no setting difference is not won, the processing of “M_STS3_LEV” is terminated.

Here, the selection of the winning numbers “20” to “27” when winning is performed as in the following a) to c).
a) When a winning number (“20” to “22”) in which one double symbol can appear is selected, one number is selected.
b) When winning numbers (“23” to “25”) in which two double symbols can appear are selected, two numbers are selected.
c) When winning numbers ("26" to "27") in which three double symbols can appear are all selected.
Then, the number of games corresponding to the number selected in a) to c) is stored in the extra counter (F02D (H)).
Then, the addition counter (F02D (H)) and the HP counter (F031 (H)) are compared, and when “HP counter ≧ addition counter”, the addition counter is added to the GS counter (F029 (H)). Subtract the additional counter from the HP counter.
On the other hand, if “HP counter <addition counter”, the value of the HP counter is stored in the addition counter, then the addition counter is added to the GS counter (F029 (H)), and the addition counter is subtracted from the HP counter.

Specifically, for example, when the HP counter is “50” and the addition counter is “30”, “HP counter ≧ addition counter”.
GS counter = +30 (additional counter is added)
HP counter = 50-30 (additional counter is subtracted)
It becomes.
On the other hand, for example, when the HP counter is “30” and the addition counter is “50”, “HP counter <addition counter”.
Additional counter = 30 (correction from “50” to “30”)
HP counter = 0
GS counter = + 30 (when the HP counter is “0”, the GS counter is “200 (D)”)
It becomes.
Thus, the process of “M_STS3_LEV” is completed.

5. M_STS5_LEV (Process at the start of game in main game state 5)
1) "1" is subtracted from the value of the GS counter (F029 (H)).
2) When winning two consecutive replays with no setting difference (winning numbers “20” to “27”), the SR winning lottery is executed.
When SR is won, “1” is stored in the SR winning counter (F026 (H)), and the values are added and stored in the extra array (F035 (H) to F039 (H)) by lottery. “8” is stored in the game number counter (F030 (H)), and “30 (D)” is stored in the SR guarantee addition counter (F033 (H)).
Thus, the process of “M_STS5_LEV” is completed.

6). M_STS6_LEV (Process at the start of game in main game state 6)
1) “1” is subtracted from the GS counter (F029 (H)).
2) When a winning number with no setting difference is won, a bullet lottery is executed. The value corresponding to the lottery result is added to the values of the single shot counter (F02E (H)) and the continuous shot counter (F02F (H)).
Thus, the process of “M_STS6_LEV” is completed.

7). M_STS7_LEV (Process at the start of game in main game state 7)
1) When 1BB is won, the process of “M_STS7_LEV” is terminated.
2) When the continuous shot counter (F02F (H)) is not “0”, the following a) or b) is executed.
a) When the decisive battle introduction counter (F03C (H)) is “1”, the decisive battle introduction counter is set to “0”.
b) When the decisive battle introduction counter is “0”, the SR winning lottery is executed based on the continuous shot counter, and when the SR is won, “1” is stored in the SR winning counter.
This completes the process of “M_STS7_LEV”.
3) When the continuous shot counter (F02F (H)) is “0” and the single shot counter (F02E (H)) is not “0”, “1” is subtracted from the single shot counter and the SR winning lottery is determined. When SR is won and SR is won, “1” is stored in the SR winning counter.
Thus, the process of “M_STS7_LEV” is completed.
4) When the continuous shot counter is “0” and the single shot counter is “0”, if the winning number with no setting difference is won, the SR winning lottery is executed. “1” is stored in the winning counter.
Thus, the process of “M_STS7_LEV” is completed.

8). M_STS8_LEV (Process at the start of game in main game state 8)
“1” is subtracted from the episode counter (F027 (H)).
Thus, the process of “M_STS8_LEV” is completed.

9. M_STS9_LEV (Processing at the start of game in main game state 9)
1) "1" is subtracted from the value of the GS counter (F029 (H)).
2) When the M continuation flag (F03B (H)) is “0”, when a winning number with no setting difference is won, the M continuation flag is drawn, and when this lottery is won, the M continuation is continued. “1” is stored in the flag (F03B (H)).
Thus, the process of “M_STS9_LEV” is completed.

10. M_STS10_LEV (Processing at the start of the game in the main game state 10)
The value of the GS counter (F029 (H)) is decremented by “1”.
Thus, the process of “M_STS10_LEV” is completed.

11. M_STS11_LEV (Processing at the start of the game in the main game state 11)
When the SR winning counter (F026 (H)) is “0” and the winning numbers “48” to “55” that can stop the double symbols are won, the number of winnings when the BB is activated (F047 ( H)), the SR winning lottery is executed. When the SR lottery is won, “1” is stored in the SR winning counter (F026 (H)), “8” is stored in the SR guaranteed game number counter (F030 (H)), and the SR guaranteed extra counter (F033) is stored. (30) is stored in (H)).
Thus, the process of “M_STS11_LEV” is completed.

12 M_STS12_LEV (Processing at the start of the game in the main game state 12)
When winning numbers “48” to “55” that can stop double symbols are won, an SR winning / losing lottery is executed. When the SR winning / losing lottery is won, “1” is stored in the SR winning counter (F026 (H)), “8” is stored in the SR guaranteed game number counter (F030 (H)), and the SR guaranteed extra counter ( F30 (H)) stores “30”.
Thus, the process of “M_STS12_LEV” is completed.

13. M_STS13_LEV (Processing at the start of the game in the main game state 13)
In the present embodiment, the process of “M_STS13_LEV” is terminated without executing any particular process.

FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the game end check process (M_GAME_CHK) in step S70 of FIG.
First, in step S211, processing for clearing a condition device number flag (also referred to as winning information) is performed. This process is a process of clearing other than the condition device number of 1BB. When it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination has stopped on the active line, a process of clearing the accessory condition apparatus number is also executed. Specifically, the clear process of the address “F044 (H)” is executed. In addition, when the SB is won, the clear process of the address “F045 (H)” is also executed.

In the next step S212, the replay display LED is turned off. This process is a process of setting the D3 bit of the medal management flag of the address “F04D (H)” to “0”. Next, the process proceeds to step 213, and the replay operation flag is cleared. This processing is processing for setting the D0 bit of the address “F049 (H)” to “0”.
In the next step S214, game end control (GAME_END_CTL; FIG. 61) is executed. In this process, a predetermined process is executed at the end of the game according to the main game state of the game.
Next, the process proceeds to step S215, and it is determined whether or not the game is in the 1BB operation (in the 1BB game). In this process, the value of the operating state flag at address “F049 (H)” is stored in the HL register. When the D3 bit of the HL register value is “1” (1BB is operating), it is determined that 1BB is operating. to decide. When it is determined that the 1BB operation is in progress, the process proceeds to step S216, and the process proceeds to BB operation management (M_BB_CTL; FIG. 62). On the other hand, when it is determined that the 1BB operation is not being performed, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the game end control (GAME_END_CTL) in step S214 of FIG.
First, in step S231, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section type is “0”. Here, when the value stored in the address “F021 (H)” is “0”, it is determined as “Yes”. When it is determined that the advantageous section type is “0”, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. When it is determined that the advantageous section type is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S232.
In step S232, it is determined whether or not the BB internal medium flag is “0”. Here, when the value stored in the address “F03E (H)” is “0”, it is determined as “Yes”. When it is determined that the BB internal flag is “0”, the process proceeds to step S233. When it is determined that the BB internal flag is not “0” (BB internal), the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

In step S233, it is determined whether or not the main gaming state is “0”. Here, the data of the address “F020 (H)” is stored in the A register, and when it is determined that the value of the A register is “0”, it is determined as “Yes”.
When it is determined that the main game state is “0”, the process proceeds to step S237, and when it is determined that the main game state is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S234.
In step S234, it is determined whether or not the main gaming state is “10”. Here, if it is determined that the A register value is “10 (D)”, it is determined as “Yes”.
When it is determined that the main game state is “10”, the process proceeds to step S237, and when it is determined that the main game state is not “10”, the process proceeds to step S235.

In step S235, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section clear counter value is less than “44”. Here, the data stored in the addresses “F022 (H)” and “F023 (H)” are stored in the HL register, and when the HL register value is less than “44 (D)”, “Yes” is set. to decide.
When it is determined that the advantageous section clear counter is less than “44”, the process proceeds to step S236, and when it is determined that the advantageous section clear counter is not less than “44”, the process proceeds to step S237.
In step S236, a transition process to the main gaming state 10 is performed. Here, the following processing is executed.
a) A process of clearing the RWM 53, specifically, a process of clearing the addresses “F020 (H)” to “F03D (H)”.
b) The main game state of the address “F020 (H)” is updated to “10 (D)”.
c) The initial value “42 (D)” is stored in the GS counter of the addresses “F029 (H)” and “F02A (H)”.
Then, the process proceeds to step S237.
In step S237, a branch table at the end of the game by main game state (CBL_STS_END) is set. The game end branch table according to the main game state is shown in FIG. 59, and here, the process of storing “1220 (H)”, which is the head address, in the HL register is executed.

In the next step S238, a designated address is set. Here, the following processing is executed.
1) The A register value is added to the HL register value, and the value after the addition is stored in the HL register.
2) The A register value is added to the HL register value, and the value after the addition is stored in the HL register.
Here, since the main game state of the address “F020 (H)” is stored in the A register, for example, when the A register value is “6 (H)”,
1) 1220 (H) +6 (H) = 1226 (H)
2) 1226 (H) +6 (H) = 122 C (H)
Thus, the address of the module in the main gaming state 6 is stored in the HL register.
And it progresses to step S239 and performs the corresponding conditional branch process (process at the time of completion | finish by main game state). Here, a process (CALL instruction) for calling the module at the address (ROM 54) stored in the HL register is executed. Detailed processing in step S239 will be described later.

In the next step S240, the additional counter (F02D (H)) is cleared.
Next, proceeding to step S241, it is determined whether or not 1BB is being won. This process is determined as “Yes” when the value of the accessory condition device number (F045 (H)) is any one of “1” to “4”. If it is determined that 1BB is won, the process proceeds to step S242. If it is determined that 1BB is not selected, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
In step S242, "1" is stored in the BB internal medium flag (F03E (H)) (the BB internal medium flag is turned on). And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

Next, the main game state end process in step S239 will be described.
1. M_STS0_END (Process at the end of the game in the main game state 0)
1) When 1BBA is won, “11 (D)” is stored in the main game state (F020 (H)).
2) When a winning number including 1BBB having no setting difference is won, “13 (D)” is stored in the main gaming state (F020 (H)).
3) When the accessory condition device number (F045 (H)) is “0” and the winning and replay condition device numbers (F044 (H)) are “44” to “46”, the main gaming state (F020 (H )) Is stored as “1”.
Thus, the process of “M_STS0_END” is completed.

2. M_STS1_END (Processing at the end of the game in the main game state 1)
1) When 1BB is won a) When a winning number including 1BB is won, “1” which is the current main gaming state is stored in the main gaming state buffer (F02C (H)).
b) After the process a), the following a) or b) is executed.
A) When 1BB other than 1BBA is won, “13 (D)” is stored in the main game state (F020 (H)).
B) When a winning number including 1BBA is won, “11 (D)” is stored in the main gaming state (F020 (H)).
Thus, the process of “M_STS1_END” is completed.
2) When 1BB is not won and the SR winning counter is “0” When the fall flag (F02B (H)) is “1”, the advantageous section clear counter (F022 (H)) is set to “1”. Is memorized.
When “1” is stored in the advantageous section clear counter, “1” is subtracted in the advantageous section setting of FIG. 57 described above, and the advantageous section clear counter after the subtraction becomes “0” (step in FIG. 57). (Yes in S174, RWM initialization is executed).
Note that the above-described advantageous section setting (M_ADV_SET; step S120) is a process that is executed for each game, so that the RWM initialization can be executed using this process.
Thus, the process of “M_STS1_END” is completed.
3) When 1BB is not won, SR winning counter (F026 (H)) is “1”, and RT fluctuation symbol is displayed a) “3” is displayed in episode counter (F027 (H)) Remember.
b) “8” is stored in the main gaming state (F020 (H)).
c) The normal mode (F024 (H)) and the normal mode guarantee counter (F025 (H)) are cleared.
Thus, the process of “M_STS1_END” is completed.
4) If none of the above 1) to 3) applies, the process of “M_STS1_END” is terminated without executing the process.

3. M_STS2_END (Processing at the end of the main game state 2 game)
1) When 1BB is won The main game state (F020 (H)) is stored in the main game state buffer (F02C (H)), and “13 (D)” is stored in the main game state (F020 (H)). .
2) When 1BB is not won The process of “M_STS2_END” is terminated without executing the process until the symbol combination of RT transition is stopped and displayed.
a) When the RT transition symbol combination is stopped and the main game state buffer (F02C (H)) is “3”, “3” is stored in the main game state (F020 (H)). Then, the main game state buffer (F02C (H)) is cleared.
Thus, the process of “M_STS2_END” is completed.

b) When the RT transition symbol combination is stopped and the main game state buffer (F02C (H)) is “5”, the following a) or b) is executed.
A) When the SR winning counter is “1” “3” is stored in the main game state (F020 (H)). Then, the main game state buffer (F020C (H)) is cleared.
B) When the SR winning counter is “0” “5” is stored in the main game state (F020 (H)). Then, the main game state buffer (F020C (H)) is cleared.
Thus, the process of “M_STS2_END” is completed.

c) When the RT transition symbol combination is stopped and the main game state buffer (F02C (H)) is “6”, “6” is stored in the main game state (F020 (H)). Then, the main game state buffer (F02C (H)) is cleared.
Thus, the process of “M_STS2_END” is completed.
d) When the RT transition symbol combination is stopped and the main game state buffer (F02C (H)) is “7” or “8”, “1” is added to the area counter (F032 (H)). Then, the following a) or b) is executed.
A) When the area counter (F032 (H)) is “4”, “9” is stored in the main game state (F020 (H)), and “20” is stored in the GS counter (F029 (H)). . Then, the main game state buffer (F02C (H)) is cleared.
Thus, the process of “M_STS2_END” is completed.

A) When the area counter (F032 (H)) is less than “4”,
“200 (D)” is stored in the HP counter (F031 (H)),
The value determined by lottery is stored in the extra array (F035 (H) to F039 (H)),
“3” is stored in the main game state (F020 (H)),
“30 (D)” is stored in the SR guarantee extra counter (F033 (H)),
“8” is stored in the SR guaranteed game number counter (F030 (H)),
The main game state buffer (F02C (H)) is cleared.
Thus, the process of “M_STS2_END” is completed.
e) When the RT transition symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the main game state buffer (F02C (H)) is “9”, “9” is stored in the main game state (F020 (H)). Then, the main game state buffer (F02C (H)) is cleared.
Thus, the process of “M_STS2_END” is completed.

4). M_STS3_END (Process at the end of the game in the main game state 3)
1) When 1BB is won The value “3” of the main game state (F020 (H)) is stored in the main game state buffer (F02C (H)), and “13 (D) is stored in the main game state (F020 (H)). ) ".
Thus, the process of “M_STS3_END” is completed.
2) When 1BB is not won, execute the following a) or b).
a) When the HP counter (F031 (H)) is “0”, “100 (D)” is added to the GS counter (F029 (H)). As described above, this process corresponds to “100” that is further added as a bonus when the total number of additions in SR becomes “200”.
Further, the fall flag (F02B (H)), the SR guarantee game number counter (F030 (H)), the SR guarantee addition counter (F033 (H)), and the SR fall avoidance counter (F034 (H)) are cleared.
Furthermore, “1” is stored in the continuous shot counter (F02F (H)), and “6” is stored in the main gaming state (F020 (H)).
Thus, the process of “M_STS3_END” is completed.
Note that the SR guaranteed game number counter (F030 (H)), the SR guaranteed extra counter (F033 (H)), and the SR fall avoidance counter (F034 (H)) are predetermined values at the start of SR (main game state 3). Is stored in the “M_STS3_END” process, it is not always necessary to execute the clear process.

b) When the HP counter is not “0” The following processing a) or b) is executed.
A) When the fall flag (F02B (H)) is “0”, the process is not executed.
A) When the fall flag (F02B (H)) is not “0”, the fall flag (F02B (H)), the SR guaranteed game number counter (F030 (H)), the SR guaranteed extra counter (F033 (H)), The SR fall avoidance counter (F034 (H)) is cleared.
Further, “5” is stored in the main game state (F020 (H)).
Thus, the process of “M_STS3_END” is completed.
Similarly to the above, the SR guaranteed game number counter (F030 (H)), the SR guaranteed extra counter (F033 (H)), and the SR fall avoidance counter (F034 (H)) are SR (main game state 3). Since each predetermined value is stored at the start, it is not always necessary to execute the clear process in the “M_STS3_END” process.

5. M_STS5_END (Process at the end of the game in the main game state 5)
1) When 1BB is won a) When a winning number including 1BBA is won, the main game state (F020 (H)) value “5” is stored in the main game state buffer (F02C (H)). Game state ("12 (D)" is stored in F020 (H).
Thus, the process of “M_STS5_END” is completed.
b) When a winning number that does not include 1BBA is won, the value “5” of the main gaming state (F020 (H)) is stored in the main gaming state buffer (F02C (H)), and the main gaming state (F020 (H020)) )) Is stored in "13 (D)".
Thus, the process of “M_STS5_END” is completed.

2) When 1BB is not won a) When “1” is stored in the SR winning counter (F026 (H)), “3” is stored in the main gaming state (F020 (H)).
Thus, the process of “M_STS5_END” is completed.
b) When “1” is not stored in the SR winning counter (F026 (H)), the GS counter (F029 (H)) is “0” and the maximum instruction generation flag (F028 (H)) is “1”. "," Stores "1" in the advantageous section clear counter (F022 (H)).
Thus, the process of “M_STS5_END” is completed.
c) In cases other than a) and b) above, the process of “M_STS5_END” is terminated without executing the process.

6). M_STS6_END (Process at the end of the game in the main game state 6)
1) When 1BB is won The value “6” of the main gaming state (F020 (H)) is stored in the main gaming state buffer (F02C (H)), and “13 (D) is stored in the main gaming state (F020 (H)). ) ".
Thus, the process of “M_STS6_END” is completed.
2) When 1BB is not won a) When the GS counter (F029 (H)) is “0”, “7” is stored in the main game state (F020 (H)), and the battle introduction counter (F03C ( H)) stores “1”.
Thus, the process of “M_STS6_END” is completed.
b) When the GS counter (F029 (H)) is not “0”, the processing of “M_STS6_END” is terminated.

7). M_STS7_END (Process at the end of the game in the main game state 7)
1) When 1BB is won The value “7” of the main game state (F020 (H)) is stored in the main game state buffer (F02C (H)), and “13” is stored in the main game state (F020 (H)). Remember.
Thus, the process of “M_STS7_END” is completed.
2) When 1BB is not won a) When SR winning counter (F026 (H)) is “1” Store “8” in the main gaming state (F020 (H)) and episode counter (F027 (H)) ) Stores “2”.
Thus, the process of “M_STS7_END” is completed.

b1) When the SR winning counter (F026 (H)) is “0” The continuous shot counter (F02F (H)) is “0”, the single shot counter (F02E (H)) is “0”, and the battle end flag ( When “F03D (H))” is “0”, “1” is stored in the battle end flag (F03D (H)).
Thus, the process of “M_STS7_END” is completed.
b2) When the SR winning counter (F026 (H)) is “0” The continuous shot counter (F02F (H)) is “0”, the single shot counter (F02E (H)) is “0”, and the battle finish flag (F03D) When (H)) is “0” and the maximum instruction flag (F028 (H)) is “1”, “1” is stored in the advantageous section clear counter (F022 (H)).
Thus, the process of “M_STS7_END” is completed.
b3) When the SR winning counter (F02F (H)) is “0” and either the continuous shot counter (F02F (H)) or the single shot counter (F02E (H)) is “1” or more , “M_STS7_END” is terminated.

8). M_STS8_END (Process at the end of the game in the main game state 8)
1) When 1BB is won The value “8” of the main gaming state (F020 (H)) is stored in the main gaming state buffer (F02C (H)), and “13 (D) is stored in the main gaming state (F020 (H)). ) ".
Thus, the process of “M_STS8_END” is completed.
2) When 1BB is not won When the episode counter (F027 (H)) is “0”, “1” is added to the area counter (F032 (H)).
And
a) When the area counter (F032 (H)) is “4”, “9” is stored in the main gaming state (F020 (H)), and “20 (in the GS counter (F029 (H))”. D) ".
Thus, the process of “M_STS8_END” is completed.

b) When the area counter (F032 (H)) does not become “4”, “200 (D)” is stored in the HP counter (F031 (H)), and the added arrays (F035 (H) to F039 ( H)), the values are stored by lottery (when five additional arrays are determined at the start of SR).
Further, “3” is stored in the main game state (F020 (H)), “30 (D)” is stored in the SR guarantee addition counter (F033 (H)), and the SR guarantee game number counter (F030 (H)). ) Is stored as “8”.
Thus, the process of “M_STS8_END” is completed.

9. M_STS9_END (Processing at the end of the game in the main game state 9)
1) When 1BB is won The value “9” of the main gaming state (F020 (H)) is stored in the main gaming state buffer (F02C (H)), and “13 (D) is stored in the main gaming state (F020 (H)). ) ".
Thus, the process of “M_STS9_END” is completed.
2) When 1BB is not won a) When the GS counter (F029 (H)) is not “0”, the process of “M_STS9_END” is terminated without executing the process.

b) When the GS counter (F029 (H)) is “0” and the M continuation flag (F03B (H)) is “1”, the following processing a) or b) is executed.
A) When the M destruction counter (F03A (H)) is smaller than “9”, “1” is added to the M destruction counter (F03A (H)) and “20 (D) is added to the GS counter (F029 (H)). ) (Number of games in one set) ".
Thus, the process of “M_STS9_END” is completed.
A) When the M destruction counter (F03A (H)) is “9”, “10 (D)” is stored in the main game state (F020 (H)), and “42” is stored in the GS counter (F029 (H)). (D) (Number of ending games) ”is stored.
Thus, the process of “M_STS9_END” is completed.

c) When the GS counter (F029 (H)) is “0” and the M continuation flag (F03B (H)) is “0” When the maximum instruction generation flag (F028 (H)) is “1” Stores “1” in the advantageous section clear counter (F022 (H)).
On the other hand, when the maximum instruction generation flag (F028 (H)) is “0”, the user stays in the main game state 9.
Thus, the process of “M_STS9_END” is completed.

10. M_STS10_END (Process at the end of the game in the main game state 10)
1) When the GS counter (F029 (H)) is not “0”, the processing of “M_STS10_END” is terminated.
2) When the GS counter (F029 (H)) is “0” and the maximum instruction generation flag (F028 (H)) is “1”, the advantageous section clear counter (F022 (H)) is set to “ 1 ”is stored.
On the other hand, when the maximum instruction generation flag (F028 (H)) is “0”, the user stays in the main game state 10.
Thus, the process of “M_STS10_END” is completed.

11. M_STS11_END (Processing at the end of the game in the main game state 11)
12 M_STS12_END (Process at the end of the game in the main game state 12)
13. M_STS13_END (Process at the end of the game in the main game state 13)
The above three processes are common and will be described together below.
1) When the main game state buffer (F02C (H)) is “2” or more, “2” is stored in the main game state (F020 (H)).
When this processing ends, the processing of “M_STS11_END”, “M_STS12_END”, and “M_STS13_END” ends.
2) When the main game state buffer (F02C (H)) is “1”, the main game state buffer (F02C (H)) is cleared and “1” is stored in the main game state (F020 (H)). .
When this processing ends, the processing of “M_STS11_END”, “M_STS12_END”, and “M_STS13_END” ends.

3) When the main game state buffer (F02C (H)) is “0” and the SR winning counter (F026 (H)) is “1”, the main game state buffer (F02C (H)) is stored. Clear and store “1” in the main gaming state (F020 (H)).
4) When the main game state buffer (F02C (H)) is “0” and the SR winning counter (F026 (H)) is “0”, the advantageous section clear counter (F022 (H)) is set. “1” is stored.

FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing BB operation management (M_BB_CTL) in step S216 in FIG.
First, in step S261, the number of acquirable sheets at the time of BB operation is acquired. This process is a process of storing the values of the addresses “F047 (H)” and “F048 (H)” in the HL register.
In the next step S262, it is determined whether or not the operation of the BB is finished. Here, it is determined whether or not the HL register value is “0”. When it is determined that it is “0”, it is determined that the operation of the BB has ended, and when it is determined that it is not “0”, the BB register value is determined. Judge that the operation has not ended.
When it is determined that the operation of BB has ended, the process proceeds to step S263, and when it is determined that the operation of BB has not ended, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

When it is determined that the operation of BB has ended and the process proceeds to step S263, the operation type is acquired. This process is a process of storing the value of the operation type of the address “F04B (H)” in the A register.
In step S264, the operation type is cleared. This process is a process of clearing the value of the operation type of the address “F04B (H)” (set it to “0”).
In the next step S265, the operating state flag is cleared. This process is a process of clearing the value of the operation state flag of the address “F049 (H)”.
In step S266, the RT state number is stored. This process is a process of storing “2 (D)” in the address “F046 (H)”.
In the next step S267, a timer table (TBL_BBEND_TM) at the end of BB operation is set. The timer table at the end of BB operation is as shown in FIG. 54. When the head address is “1420 (H)” as in this embodiment, in this step, from the head address of the timer table at the end of BB operation. A process of storing “141E (H)” obtained by subtracting “2” in the DE register is executed.
In step S268, BB timer management (BB_TIMER_CTL; FIG. 54) is executed. As described above, when BB timer management is executed, the address of the timer table at the end of BB operation is set according to the value of the main game state buffer, and the number of interrupts stored at that address is the waiting time. (F053 (H) and F054 (H)).
Further, after the process of step S268, a command indicating that the 1BB game has ended is stored in a command buffer of the RWM 53 (not shown; a buffer for storing a command to be transmitted to the sub control board 80).
In the next step S269, as in step S121 of FIG. 52 described above, it is determined whether or not the standby time set in step S268 has become “0”. In this process, the value of the address “F053 (H)” is stored in the L register (lower digit), and the value of the address “F054 (H)” is stored in the H register (upper digit). Then, it is determined whether or not the HL register value is “0”. If it is determined that it is not “0”, the processing in step S269 is continued until “0” is reached. Thereby, the standby process at the end of the BB operation is executed. If it is determined in step S269 that it is “0”, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing (I_INTR) by the main control board 50 (main CPU 55). As described above, the main control board 50 performs the interrupt process shown in FIG. 63 at a period of 2.235 ms in parallel with the main process of FIG. In other words, the interrupt process of FIG. 63 can be executed at a predetermined cycle. In this embodiment, the interrupt cycle is set to 2.235 ms, but is not limited to this cycle.
First, when the process proceeds to the interrupt process in step S601, in step S602, as an initial process, a register value saving process and a duplicate interrupt prohibition process are performed. Here, since the register of the main CPU 55 used in the main process is used in the interrupt process, the current register value is saved in the stack area of the RWM 53. Further, the interrupt prohibition flag is turned on so that the next interrupt process is not started during the interrupt process. This is because, for example, an interrupt process execution request may be made during the power-off process.

In the next step S603, it is determined whether or not power-off is detected. Here, when a power supply voltage becomes a predetermined value or less by a voltage monitoring device (power supply cutoff detection circuit) provided on the main control board 50 (not shown), the power supply is cut off to a predetermined bit of a predetermined input port 51. Since the detection signal is input, it is detected whether or not the signal is input.
When power-off is detected, the process proceeds to power-off processing in step S616. When it is determined that power-off is not detected, the process proceeds to step S604.

In step S604, the interrupt counter value is updated. This process is a process of subtracting “1” from the interrupt counter value.
In the next step S605, timer measurement (I_TIME_CNT; FIG. 64) is performed. This process is a process for updating (subtracting, etc.) all timer values. In particular, in this embodiment, the four timer values (F051 (H) to F056 (H)) illustrated in FIG. 41 are updated.
Next, it progresses to step S606 and LED display control is performed. In this process, the set value, the number of stored sheets, the acquired number of sheets, the error display content (error code), the pressing order instruction information, and the like are turned on using the 7-segment LED according to the state of the slot machine 10. That is, these lightings are performed by the LED display control in step S606 every time interrupt processing is performed.

  In step S607, the input port 51 is read. As a result, whether or not the operation of the bet switch 40, the start switch 41, the stop switch 42, etc. has been performed, the switch signals and the input signals of various sensors are read, and the data (level data, rising data, And the falling data) are generated and stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 53. In the next step S608, a built-in random number check process is performed. In the present embodiment, a flag that is turned on when an error occurs in the internal random number is provided, and it is determined whether or not this flag is on.

  Specifically, for example, when an abnormality in the clock frequency of the random numbers for the lottery (for example, when the random number update is late), the error flag is turned on. More specifically, it is assumed that SCLK (oscillation source: 12 MHz) and RCK (oscillation source: 9 MHz) input to the MPU are provided, and the built-in random number is updated based on RCK. At this time, the error flag is turned on when “RCK <SCLK / 2” is satisfied.

In step S609, it is determined whether an error has occurred in the built-in random number (whether the error flag is on). If it is determined that no error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S610. If it is determined that the error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S617 to shift to a non-recoverable error process.
Note that interrupt processing is not performed if the error recovery processing is performed.
An unrecoverable error is a serious error that cannot occur normally, and executes processing based on abnormal data (data update of the RWM 53 based on data from the input port, transmission of a control command to the sub-control board 80), etc. To prevent it from happening, interrupts themselves are prohibited.
In other words, at the time of an unrecoverable error, transmission of the control command from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80 is not performed, so it is meaningless to execute the control command set 1.
Further, if an untransmitted control command is stored in the control command buffer when an unrecoverable error occurs, the control command is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80. This is because the control command stored in the control buffer may be incorrect.

  In step S610, drive control of the reel 31 is performed. This control is performed in units of 31 reels (left, middle, and right), and includes stop, constant speed, acceleration, deceleration, deceleration start, and standby according to the operation state. When the drive control of the reel 31 is completed, the process proceeds to step S611, and a port output (output from the output port 52) process is performed. In this process, the excitation output of the motor 32 and the hopper motor 36 and the excitation output of the blocker 45 are performed.

In the next step S612, control command transmission is performed. This process is a process of, for example, outputting the control command set in the output request set and the control command set 1 (the untransmitted control command stored in the control command buffer of the RWM 53) from the output port 52.
When a control command is set in the control command buffer in the output request set and control command set 1, an interrupt process after that point (in principle, if the control command buffer is empty, the interrupt process that comes after that point In step S612, a control command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80.

  In the next step S613, an external signal is output. These processes are processes for setting output data of an external signal output from the output port 52 (stored in a register) and transmitting the signal to the external concentrated terminal board 100.

In step S614, random number update processing is performed.
In the next step S615, the register value saved in step S602 is restored, and the next interrupt is permitted. Specifically, the register data stored at the start of interrupt processing is restored and the interrupt prohibition flag is turned off so that the next interrupt processing can be started. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the timer measurement (I_TIME_CNT) shown in step S605 in FIG.
In step S631, a measurement start timer address is set. Here, the measurement start timer address indicates a reference address. In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41, the leading value of the addresses of various timers, that is, “F051 (H)” is the reference address. Accordingly, in step S631, “F051 (H)” is set in the HL register.

  In step S632, the 1-byte timer number is set in the B register. The number of 1-byte timers indicates the number of 1-byte timers. As shown in FIG. 41, there are two 1-byte timers (blocker off monitoring time and blocker on monitoring time). Therefore, “2” is set in the B register here.

  In the next step S633, the 1-byte timer value is updated. In this process, “1” is subtracted from the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value. For example, when “10 (D)” is stored in “F051 (H)”, “9 (D)” is obtained. Further, when a carry occurs as a result of subtracting “1” (that is, when the value before subtraction is “0”), “0” is stored.

In step S634, the next timer address is set. This process is a process of adding “1” to the HL register value. Therefore, in this example, the HL register value is “F052 (H)”.
In the next step S635, it is determined whether or not the 1-byte timer measurement is finished. In this process, “1” is subtracted from the B register value, and it is determined whether or not the B register value after the subtraction is “0”. When the B register value after subtraction is not “0”, it is determined that the 1-byte timer measurement has not ended.
If it is determined that the 1-byte timer measurement has been completed, the process proceeds to step S636. If it is determined that the 1-byte timer measurement has not been completed, the process proceeds to step S633.
By repeating the above steps S633 to S635, all two 1-byte timers are subtracted from “1” (however, as described above, when “0” is stored as the 1-byte timer value, “ 0 "is maintained.).

In step S636, the 2-byte timer number is set in the B register. This process is a process for setting the number of 2-byte timers. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41, since there are two 2-byte timers (standby time and game standby display start time), “2” is stored in the B register.
In the next step S637, the 2-byte timer value is updated. In this processing, “1” is subtracted from 2-byte data with the value stored in the address indicated by the HL register value as the lower digit and the address value indicated by “HL register value + 1” as the upper digit.
A specific example is as follows.
(1) Example 1
HL register value = F053 (H) (hereinafter the same),
F053 (H) = 05 (H)
F054 (H) = 01 (H)
When subtracting "1" when
F053 (H) = 04 (H)
F054 (H) = 01 (H)
It becomes.

(2) Example 2
F053 (H) = 00 (H)
F054 (H) = 01 (H)
When subtracting "1" when
F053 (H) = FF (H)
F054 (H) = 00 (H)
It becomes.
(3) Example 3
F053 (H) = 50 (H)
F054 (H) = 00 (H)
When subtracting "1" when
F053 (H) = 4F (H)
F054 (H) = 00 (H)
It becomes.

(4) Example 4
F053 (H) = 01 (H)
F054 (H) = 00 (H)
When subtracting "1" when
F053 (H) = 00 (H)
F054 (H) = 00 (H)
It becomes.
(5) Example 5
F053 (H) = 00 (H)
F054 (H) = 00 (H)
When subtracting "1" when
F053 (H) = 00 (H)
F054 (H) = 00 (H)
It becomes.

In the next step S638, the next timer address is set. In this process, “1” is added to the HL register value, and “1” is further added to the HL register value. Thereby, “2” is added to the HL register value. In other words, since the address indicated by the HL register value is shifted by two, for example, when “F053 (H)” has been designated until then, “F055 (H)” is designated by the calculation.
In the next step S639, it is determined whether or not the 2-byte timer measurement is finished. In this process, “1” is subtracted from the B register value. When the B register value after the subtraction is not “0”, it is determined that the 2-byte timer measurement is not finished. When it is determined that the 2-byte timer measurement has not been completed, the process returns to step S637. When it is determined that the 2-byte timer measurement has been completed, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
By repeating the above steps S637 to 639, all the two 2-byte timers are decremented by “1” (however, as described above, when “0” is stored as the 2-byte timer value, “ 0 "is maintained.).

As described above, by sequentially arranging the addresses of the 1-byte timers, it is possible to sequentially update the timer values stored in the addresses of the 1-byte timers only by looping the processing of steps S633 to S635.
Similarly, by continuously arranging the addresses of the 2-byte timers, it is possible to sequentially update the timer values stored in the addresses of the 2-byte timers only by looping the processing of steps S637 to S639. As a result, the program capacity can be reduced in the timer update process.
In addition, the storage area of the 1-byte timer (F051 (H) to F052 (H)) and the storage area of the 2-byte timer (F053 (H) to F056 (H)) are stored, so that the address is stored in the HL register. The processing to be performed only needs to be performed once (step S631), and thereafter, the timer value is updated only by “+1” or “+2” the HL register value (repeating the process of “+1” the HL register value twice). Since the target address can be designated, the program capacity can be reduced in the timer update process.
Specifically, a program that stores an address in the HL register is an instruction that requires 3 bytes as a storage area of the ROM 54, but a program that increments the HL register value by “+1” is an instruction that requires only 1 byte as a storage area in the ROM 54. A program for “+2” the HL register value is an instruction that requires only 2 bytes as a storage area of the ROM 54. These effects also apply to a second embodiment (modified example) described later.

Second Embodiment
FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an address arrangement and reference addresses of timer values according to the second embodiment (three types A to C). FIG. 65 also illustrates the timer value address arrangement and the reference address in the first embodiment.
In the second embodiment A, the arrangement of addresses and the contents of each address are the same as in the first embodiment. However, the reference address is different from that of the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, the reference address is set to “F051 (H)”, but in the second embodiment A, the reference address is “F055 (H)”.

In the first embodiment, as shown in the timer measurement flowchart of FIG. 64, the reference address “F051 (H)” (first) is started, and finally “F055 (H)” and “F056 (H)”. The timer value of “1” was subtracted.
On the other hand, in the second embodiment A, starting from the reference address “F055 (H)” (first), the timer value of “F051 (H)” is finally subtracted by “1”.

In FIG. 65, in the second embodiment B, addresses are assigned in order from the 2-byte timer. Therefore, the addresses “F053 (H)” to “F056 (H)” in the first embodiment are the addresses “F051 (H)” to “F054 (H)” in the second embodiment B.
The address of the 1-byte timer is arranged after the 2-byte timer, and is “F055 (H)” and “F056 (H)”.
In FIG. 65, in the second embodiment C, the arrangement and contents of the addresses are the same as those in the second embodiment B, but the second address is that the reference address is “F056 (H)”. Different from Embodiment B.

FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing timer measurement (example 1) based on the address arrangement and the reference address of the second embodiment A in FIG.
First, in step S771, a measurement start timer address is set. This process is a process of storing “F057 (H)” in the HL register. As shown in FIG. 61, the address range of the timer value is “F051 (H)” to “F056 (H)”. Therefore, “F057 (H)” is not the address range of the timer value. However, in step S771, a value obtained by adding “2” to “F055 (H)” which is the lower digit address of the reference address is stored in the HL register.
In step S772, the 2-byte timer number is set. Since the 2-byte timer number is “2” as in the first embodiment, “2” is stored in the B register.

In the next step S773, the next timer address is set. This process is a process of subtracting “1” from the value stored in the HL register and further subtracting “1” from the value stored in the HL register. In other words, “2” is subtracted from the value stored in the HL register.
By this processing, “F057 (H)” is initially stored in the HL register, but “F055 (H)” is stored in the HL register in step S773.
If “F055 (H)” is stored in the HL register before the process of step S773, “F053 (H)” is stored in the HL register by the process of step S773.

In the next step S774, the 2-byte timer value is updated. This process subtracts "1" from the 2-byte value consisting of the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value and the value stored at the address obtained by adding "1" to the address indicated by the HL register value. Execute the process. This process is the same as step S637 in FIG. In the second embodiment, “2-byte timer value update” is all the same as this processing.
Next, proceeding to step S775, it is determined whether or not the measurement of the 2-byte timer has ended. Here, “1” is subtracted from the B register value, and when the B register value after the subtraction is “0”, it is determined that the measurement of the 2-byte timer is finished.
When it is determined that the measurement of the 2-byte timer has ended, the process proceeds to step S776, and when it is determined that measurement has not ended, the process returns to step S773.

In step S776, the 1-byte timer number is set. In this process, “2” corresponding to the number of timer values to be updated is stored in the B register.
In the next step S777, the next timer address is set. This process is a process of subtracting “1” from the HL register value.
Here, when the process proceeds from step S775 to step S776, the HL register value is “F053 (H)”. Therefore, by subtracting “1” from the HL register value, the HL register value becomes “F052 (H)”.

In step S778, the 1-byte timer value is updated. This process is a process of subtracting “1” from the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value. This process is the same as step S633 in FIG. In the second embodiment, “1 byte timer value update” is all the same as this processing.
In the next step S779, it is determined whether or not the measurement of the 1-byte timer is finished. Here, “1” is subtracted from the B register value, and when the B register value after the subtraction is “0”, it is determined that the measurement of the 1-byte timer is finished.
When it is determined that the measurement of the 1-byte timer is finished, the processing according to this flowchart is finished. On the other hand, when it is determined that the measurement has not ended, the process returns to step S777.

FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing timer measurement (example 2) based on the address arrangement and the reference address according to the second embodiment A.
First, in step S791, a measurement start timer address is set. This process is a process of storing “F055 (H)” in the HL register.
Unlike the example 1 of the second embodiment A, this process stores the reference address (lower digit address) value of the 2-byte timer in the HL register.
In the next step S792, the number of 2-byte timers is set. This process is a process of storing “2” in the B register.
In the next step S793, the 2-byte timer value is updated. In this process, “1” is subtracted from a 2-byte value consisting of the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value and the value stored at the address obtained by adding “1” to the address indicated by the HL register value. It is processing.

In step S794, the next timer address is set. This process is a process of subtracting “1” from the value stored in the HL register and further subtracting “1” from the value stored in the HL register.
As a result of this processing, “F055 (H)” is initially stored in the HL register, but “F053 (H)” is stored in the HL register in step S794.

In the next step S795, it is determined whether or not the measurement of the 2-byte timer is finished. Here, “1” is subtracted from the B register value, and when the B register value after the subtraction is “0”, it is determined that the measurement of the 2-byte timer is finished.
If it is determined that the measurement of the 2-byte timer has ended, the process advances to step S796. On the other hand, when it is determined that the measurement has not ended, the process returns to step S793.
In step S796, address correction is executed. This process is a process of adding “1” to the HL register value.
When the process proceeds from step S795 to step S796, the HL register value is “F051 (H)”. In contrast, as shown in FIG. 65, the address at which the 1-byte timer value is first subtracted is the address “F052 (H)”. Therefore, “1” is added to the HL register value so that the address “F052 (H)” at which the subtraction is performed at the beginning of the 1-byte timer value is made.

In the next step S797, a 1-byte timer number is set. This process is a process of storing “2” in the B register.
In step S798, the 1-byte timer value is updated. This process is a process of subtracting “1” from the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value.
In the next step S799, the next timer address is set. This process is a process of subtracting “1” from the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value.
Then, the process proceeds to step S800, and it is determined whether or not the measurement of the 1-byte timer is finished. Here, “1” is subtracted from the B register value, and when the B register value after the subtraction is “0”, it is determined that the measurement of the 1-byte timer is finished.
When it is determined that the measurement of the 1-byte timer is finished, the processing according to this flowchart is finished. On the other hand, when it is determined that the measurement is not finished, the process returns to step S798.

  When Example 1 (FIG. 66) and Example 2 (FIG. 67) of the second embodiment A are compared, Example 1 does not require the processing of Step S796 (address correction) of Example 2, and accordingly, the program Capacity can be reduced. In other words, from the viewpoint of reducing the program capacity, the method of storing (setting) an address other than the original timer value address in step S771 as in Example 1 is preferable.

FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing timer measurement at the address arrangement and reference address of the second embodiment B in FIG.
First, in step S811, a measurement start timer address is set. This process is a process of storing “F051 (H)”, which is the reference address value, in the HL register.
In the next step S812, the 2-byte timer number is set. This process is a process of storing “2” corresponding to the number of 2-byte timers in the B register.
In step S813, the 2-byte timer value is updated. In this process, “1” is subtracted from a 2-byte value consisting of data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value and data stored at the address obtained by adding “1” to the address indicated by the HL register value. It is processing.

In step S814, the next timer address is set. This process is a process of adding “1” to the value stored in the HL register and further adding “1” to the value stored in the HL register. In other words, “2” is added to the value stored in the HL register.
By this processing, “F051 (H)” is initially stored in the HL register, but “F053 (H)” is stored in the HL register by the processing in step S814.

In the next step S815, it is determined whether or not the measurement of the 2-byte timer is finished. Here, “1” is subtracted from the B register value, and when the B register value after the subtraction is “0”, it is determined that the measurement of the 2-byte timer is finished.
When it is determined that the measurement of the 2-byte timer has ended, the process proceeds to step S816, and when it is determined that measurement has not ended, the process returns to step S813.

In step S816, the 1-byte timer number is set. In this process, “2” corresponding to the number of timer values to be updated is stored in the B register.
In the next step S817, the 1-byte timer value is updated. This process is a process of subtracting “1” from the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value. When the process proceeds from step S815 to step S816, the HL register value is “F055 (H)”, which is the address of the tie value that is updated first in the 1-byte timer.
In the next step S818, the next timer address is set. This process is a process of adding “1” to the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value.

Next, proceeding to step S819, it is determined whether or not the measurement of the 1-byte timer has ended. Here, “1” is subtracted from the B register value, and when the B register value after the subtraction is “0”, it is determined that the measurement of the 1-byte timer is finished.
When it is determined that the measurement of the 1-byte timer is finished, the processing according to this flowchart is finished. On the other hand, when it is determined that the measurement has not ended, the process returns to step S817.

FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing the address measurement and timer measurement (example 1) at the reference address in the second embodiment C in FIG.
First, in step S831, a measurement start timer address is set. Here, the measurement start timer address stores “F057 (H)” in the HL register as in Example 1 of the second embodiment A. This address is an address obtained by adding “1” to the address storing the last timer of the 1-byte timer.

  In step S832, the 1-byte timer number is set. Here, “2” is set in the B register.

In the next step S833, the next timer address is set. This process is a process of subtracting “1” from the HL register value. As a result of this processing, “F057 (H)” is stored in the HL register, so “F056 (H)” is stored in the HL register.
Next, proceeding to step S834, the 1-byte timer value is updated. In this process, “1” is subtracted from the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value.

Next, proceeding to step S835, it is determined whether the 1-byte timer measurement has ended. In this process, “1” is subtracted from the B register value. When the B register value after subtraction is not “0”, it is determined that the 1-byte timer measurement has not ended.
If it is determined that the 1-byte timer measurement has been completed, the process proceeds to step S836. If it is determined that the 1-byte timer measurement has not been completed, the process proceeds to step S833.

In step S836, the 2-byte timer number is set. This process is a process of storing the number of 2-byte timers “2” in the B register.
In the next step S837, the next timer address is set. In this process, “1” is subtracted from the HL register value, and further, “1” is subtracted from the HL register value. In other words, “2” is subtracted from the value stored in the HL register.
Here, since the HL register value at the time of proceeding to step S837 is “F055 (H)”, the HL register value becomes “F053 (H)” by the processing of step S837.
In step S838, the 2-byte timer value is updated. This process is a process of subtracting “1” from a 2-byte value with the value stored in the address indicated by the HL register value as the lower digit and the address value indicated by “HL register value + 1” as the upper digit.

  In the next step S839, it is determined whether or not the 2-byte timer measurement is finished. In this process, “1” is subtracted from the B register, and when the B register value after the subtraction is not “0”, it is determined that the 2-byte timer measurement is not finished. When it is determined that the 2-byte timer measurement has not been completed, the process returns to step S837. When it is determined that the 2-byte timer measurement has been completed, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the address arrangement and timer measurement (example 2) at the reference address in the second embodiment C in FIG.
First, in step S851, a measurement start timer address is set. This process is a process of storing “F056 (H)” as the reference address in the HL register.
In step S852, the 1-byte timer number is set. This process is a process of storing “2”, which is the number of 1-byte timers, in the B register.

In the next step S853, the 1-byte timer value is updated. This process is a process of subtracting “1” from the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value.
In step S854, the next timer address is set. This process is a process of subtracting “1” from the HL register value. With this processing, when “F056 (H)” is stored in the HL register, “F055 (H)” is stored in the HL register.

Next, proceeding to step S855, it is determined whether measurement of the 1-byte timer has ended. Here, “1” is subtracted from the B register value, and when the B register value after the subtraction is “0”, it is determined that the measurement of the 1-byte timer is finished.
When it is determined that the measurement of the 1-byte timer is finished, the process proceeds to step S856, and when it is determined that the measurement is not finished, the process returns to step S853.

In step S856, address correction is performed. This process is a process of subtracting “1” from the HL register value. Here, when the process proceeds from step S855 to step S856, the HL register value is “F054 (H)”. This address value is not “F053 (H)”, which is the first address (lower digit) at which subtraction of the 2-byte timer value starts. Therefore, “1” is subtracted from the HL register value, and the HL register value is corrected to be the first address (lower digit) at which the subtraction of the 2-byte timer value is started.
In step S857, the 2-byte timer number is set. This process is a process of storing “2”, which is the number of 2-byte timers, in the B register.
In the next step S858, the next timer address is set. This process is a process of subtracting “1” from the HL register value and further subtracting “1” from the HL register value.

In step S859, the 2-byte timer value is updated. This process subtracts “1” from the 2-byte value consisting of the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value and the data stored at the address obtained by adding “1” to the address indicated by the HL register value. It is processing to do.
Next, proceeding to step S860, it is determined whether measurement of the 2-byte timer has ended. Here, “1” is subtracted from the B register value, and when the B register value after the subtraction is “0”, it is determined that the measurement of the 2-byte timer is finished.
When it is determined that the measurement of the 2-byte timer is finished, the processing according to this flowchart is finished, and when it is judged that the measurement is not finished, the process returns to step S858.

  If Example 1 (FIG. 69) and Example 2 (FIG. 70) of the second embodiment C are compared, Example 1 does not require the processing of Step S856 (address correction) of Example 2, and accordingly, the program Capacity can be reduced. In other words, from the viewpoint of reducing the program capacity, the method of storing (setting) an address other than the original timer value address in step S831 as in Example 1 is preferable.

<Third Embodiment>
In the first embodiment, the effect group number corresponding to the winning and replay condition device number of the game is determined using the effect group number table shown in FIG.
On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the effect group number is determined from the winning and replay condition device numbers by the effect group table shown in FIG. 72 and the program shown in FIG.
In the third embodiment, the effect group numbers corresponding to the winning and replay condition device numbers are the same as the values shown in FIG. 71 (or FIGS. 11 to 16).
FIG. 72 shows an effect group table in the third embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 71, the storage capacity of the production group number table in the first embodiment requires 57 bytes from “1500 (H)” to “1539 (H)”. On the other hand, the effect group table shown in FIG. 72 in the third embodiment is 8 bytes from “1500 (H)” to “1507 (H)”, and the capacity is greatly reduced.
Data shown in FIG. 72 is stored in each address in the third embodiment (in FIG. 72, data at each address is expressed in binary).

FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing a program for determining an effect group number using the effect group table shown in FIG. 72 in the third embodiment.
First, in step S881, an effect group table is set. This process is a process of storing “1500 (H)”, which is the head address value of the effect group table, in the HL register.
In the next step S882, winning and replay condition device numbers are acquired. In this process, the data stored in the address “F044 (H)” in FIG. 41 (in FIG. 51, the winning and replay condition device numbers in the game are stored in the address “F044 (H)” at the time of step S63). Is stored in the E register.

In step S883, the number of inspections is set. This process is a process of adding “1” to the E register. By this processing, the E register value becomes ““ winning and replay condition device number ”+1”.
In the next step S884, an initial value “0” is set. This process is a process of storing “0” in the A register.
In step S885, the number of bit inspections is set. This process is a process of storing “8” in the B register. “8” stored here indicates the number of bits of 1 byte.
Through the above process,
A register value: 0
B register value: 8
E register value: “winning and replay condition device number” +1
HL register value: 1500 (H)
Is memorized.

In the next step S886, table data is acquired. This process is a process for storing the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the D register.
In step S887, data is shifted. This process shifts the data stored in the D register to the right by “1”. in this case,
When the D0 bit data before the “1” shift is “0”, the carry flag = “0”.
When the D0 bit data before the “1” shift is “1”, the carry flag = “1”.
It becomes.
Specifically, for example, when the D register value is “10000010 (B)”, if “1” is shifted to the right, the data overflowing from the right is “0”, so the carry flag = “0”. On the other hand, for example, when the D register value is “01000001 (B)” and the data is shifted to the right by “1”, the data overflowing from the right is “1”, so the carry flag = “1”.

In the next step S888, it is determined whether or not there is a group number update. This process determines that there is an update if the carry flag = “1” as a result of the data shift in step S887. When it is determined that there is an update, the process proceeds to step S 889, and when it is determined that there is no update (carry flag = “0”), the process proceeds to step S 890.
In step S889, the group number is updated. This process is a process of adding “1” to the A register value.
In step S890, “1” is subtracted from the number of inspections. This process is a process of subtracting “1” from the E register value.
In the next step S891, it is determined whether or not the inspection is completed. When the value of the E register is “0” (zero flag = “1”), it is determined that the inspection is finished, and the process proceeds to step S894.

Here, in the E register, ““ winning and replay condition device number ”+1” is first stored. The case where the E register value becomes “0” as a result of subtracting “1” is when the processing of step S890 is executed by the number of “winning and replay condition device numbers”.
When it is determined in step S891 that the inspection has been completed and the process proceeds to step S894, the value stored in the A register at this time is stored in the effect group number (address “F040 (H)” in FIG. 41).
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S891 that the test is not finished, the process proceeds to step S892, and it is determined whether or not the bit test is finished. Here, the following processing is executed.
a) “1” is subtracted from the B register value.
b) When it is determined that the B register value after subtraction of “1” is “0”, it is determined that the bit check is to be ended.

When it is determined in step S892 that the bit check is to be ended, the process proceeds to step S893, and when it is determined that the bit check is not to be ended, the process proceeds to step S887.
In step S893, “1” is added to the table address. This process is a process of adding “1” to the HL register value. Then, the process proceeds to step S885. Here, for example, when the HL register value is “1500 (H)”, when “1” is added to the HL register value, the HL register value becomes “1501 (H)”, and when the process proceeds to step S885, The process of storing “8” in the B register is executed again. In the next step S886, the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value (1501 (H)) is stored in the D register, and thereafter, until the E register value = “0” is determined. Repeat the process.

By executing the above processing, the winning and replay condition device numbers are stored in the E register in step S882, and when this program is executed, the process proceeds to step S894 (when it is determined that the inspection is completed in step S891). ) Is set so that the A register value becomes the value of the effect group number corresponding to the winning and replay condition device number. In other words, the value of each address shown in FIG. 72 is set so as to have such a value.
For example, when the winning and replay condition device number is “7” (replay B1), the process from step S887 to step S891 is repeated eight times, and when the process proceeds to step S894, the A register value is “2 (D ) (Direction group number) ”. This value is the same as that in FIG.
For example, when the winning and replay condition device number is “23” (replay F1), the processing from step S887 to step S891 is repeated 24 times, and when the process proceeds to step S894, the A register value is “8 ( D) (Production group number) ".

In the above third embodiment, the effect group table shown in FIG. 72 and the program shown in FIG. 73 are stored in the ROM 54.
Here, the effect group table of FIG. 72 (third embodiment) is “8” byte data, whereas the effect group table of FIG. 71 (first embodiment) is “57” byte data. Even if the capacity of the program (FIG. 73) for determining the production group number is taken into consideration, if the method of determining the production group number is adopted as in the third embodiment, the storage capacity of the ROM 54 is greatly reduced. be able to.

In the third embodiment, the production group number is updated when the carry flag is “1” by shifting to the right. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to use a program or table that shifts to the right and updates the effect group number when the carry flag is “0”.
Also, a program or table that updates the effect group number when the carry flag is “1” by shifting to the left, or the effect group number is set when the carry flag is “0” by shifting to the left. It is also possible to make a program or table to be updated.

Although the embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described content, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) In this embodiment, the standby time is provided at the start and end of the BB operation, and the standby time is shown in FIG. 54 (B). However, this is only an example, and for example, the standby time that is different for each main gaming state Can also be set. The standby time in FIG. 54B is an example, and is not limited to the time given in FIG.
In the example of FIG. 54 (B), the standby time at the start of the BB operation is set to a time longer than the standby time at the end of the BB operation. It is possible to set longer than the standby time at the start of the BB operation, or to set the standby time at the start of the BB operation and the standby time at the end of the BB operation to the same time.

  (2) As shown in step S121 in FIG. 52 and step S269 in FIG. 62, in this embodiment, when the BB operation starts and ends, the main process is stopped and the standby time has elapsed. Otherwise, it is not possible to proceed to the next process. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the bet switch 40 or the settlement switch 46 is operated, the standby process may be canceled and the next game process may proceed. When the standby process is canceled, the signal is transmitted to the sub-control board 80, and control is performed so as to cancel the effect being output.

(3) In this embodiment, the standby process is executed both at the start and end of the 1BB game, and an effect is output in accordance with this standby process. However, only at the start of the 1BB game or at the end of the 1BB game Only the standby process may be executed.
(4) In this embodiment, the standby time is stored in the addresses “F053 (H)” and “F054 (H)” of the RWM 53. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the standby time is stored in the HL register (in the RWM 53 It is also possible to subtract the HL register value for each interrupt process and determine whether or not it becomes “0”.
However, if the standby time is stored in the RWM 53 as in this embodiment, a command can be transmitted to the sub control board 80 even during the standby time. As a result, the sub-control board 80 can prepare for production to be output to the next game.

(5) In the present embodiment, a double symbol pattern consisting of “upper target” and “lower target” is provided, and when the specific winning number is selected, when the stop switch 42 is in a predetermined operation mode, the dual symbol is stopped. It was possible. Here, the symbols (or combinations of symbols) that can be stopped are not limited to two symbols, but three symbols (“upper”, “middle”, and “lower”) that stop at the upper, middle, and lower levels. Or a symbol consisting of one symbol (for example, “BAR”-“BAR”-“BAR” in the present embodiment).
(6) In this embodiment, when stopping a double symbol, it is on condition that it is a right first stop. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the double symbol may be stopped on the condition that it is the middle first stop.

  (7) In the present embodiment, the SR lottery is executed based on the winning number particularly in the first half part of the mission bonus. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the SR lottery may be performed with a predetermined game in the mission bonus. For example, in the first half part, a lottery of a parameter (for example, a range of “0” to “100”) is executed according to the winning number, and the SR lottery is executed based on the parameter in the final game of the first half part. Can be mentioned.

(8) In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 34, when the SB symbol is displayed, the transition is made to non-RT, and after the transition to non-RT, unless the 1BB is won, the specification cannot be shifted to RT. ing. For this reason, for example, when an SB symbol is displayed during ART, AT progresses in non-RT (a state where the winning probability of replay is not high).
Therefore, in order to prevent this, it is possible to output an effect for preventing the display of the SB symbol when the SB is won.
For example, when SB is won during ART, a display such as “!” (First mode effect) is output, and an operation mode in which the combination of symbols of SB does not stop is reported. Specifically, for example, aim for "" White 7 "-" BAR "-" White 7 "! "(Red 7"-"Blank"-"Red 7", which is a combination of SB symbols), is output.

Next, when the symbols constituting the SB are stopped at the time of the first stop, switching from the display of “!” To the display such as “DANGER” (second mode effect) may be mentioned.
In addition, not only when winning SB during ART, but also when winning 1BB, by outputting the above effects with a predetermined probability, even when “!” Is displayed, 1BB is won. It is preferable to be able to expect (that is, not to deny the winning of 1BB when “!” Is displayed).

(9) The type of timer of the present embodiment is not limited to that shown in FIG. 41, and the gaming machine is provided with other various timers. The timer shown in FIG. 41 is an example, and is not limited to these.
In this embodiment, an example of a 1-byte timer and a 2-byte timer has been described, but a 3-byte timer can be provided. When the initial value of the 2-byte timer is set to “FFFF (H)” and “1” is subtracted by “2.235 ms” every interrupt process, it is possible to count about 146 seconds. Therefore, for example, when counting 3 minutes (180 seconds), a 3-byte timer is required. When a 3-byte timer is provided, a process of adding “3” to the HL register value may be executed when setting the next address of the 3-byte timer.

(10) In the present embodiment, “1” is subtracted from the timer value for each interrupt. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the timer value can be updated at another predetermined cycle. Alternatively, “1” may be subtracted from the timer value by a plurality of interruptions. For example, the timer measurement process may be executed once every five interrupts. Furthermore, the subtraction value of the timer value is not limited to “1”. Further, for example, the timer measurement process may be executed once every 5 interrupts, and the timer value may be subtracted by “2”.
(11) In this embodiment, when the timer value before updating is “0”, the timer value is also set to “0” after updating. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is determined whether or not the timer value is “0” before the update. If it is determined that the timer value before the update is “0”, the timer value is updated from the update processing target. It can also be a program to be excluded. However, as in the present embodiment, regardless of whether or not the timer value before the update is “0” (without determining whether or not it is “0”), the program can be updated if it is updated uniformly. It can be simplified (reduced program capacity).

(12) In this embodiment, the interrupt processing cycle is set to “2.235 ms”, but is not limited to this value, and various settings such as 1 ms and 3.5 ms can be made.
Also, the timing for setting the various timer values shown in FIG. 41 is not limited to those illustrated in the above embodiment, and any timing may be used as long as it is appropriate.
(13) The address of the RWM 53 and the contents corresponding to the address shown in FIGS. 40 and 41 are examples, and can be set as appropriate.
(14) In this embodiment, a slot machine is taken as an example of one of the gaming machines. However, the present invention can also be applied to, for example, a casino machine or an enclosed gaming machine (medalless gaming machine).
Here, the enclosed game machine (medalless game machine) can eliminate, for example, the medal payout device (unit including the hopper 35, the hopper motor 36, and the payout sensor 37) in FIG. Further, the medal slot 43 and the medal selector can be eliminated. And all the electronic medals (electronic game media) awarded by winning the winning combination are stored in the storage number display LED 76. In this case, it is conceivable that the storage number display LED 76 is composed of, for example, 5 digits (maximum “99,999” electronic medals can be stored).
(15) The counter values and address values shown in this embodiment are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited thereto.

<Appendix>
The inventions (initial inventions) described in the initial specification and the like of the present application can include, for example, the following initial inventions 1 to 8, and solve the problems to be solved by the original inventions and the problems related to the initial invention, respectively. Means for achieving this and the effects of the initial invention are as follows. However, the invention described in this specification is not meant to be limited to the original inventions 1 to 8.

1. Initial invention 1
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 1 The initial invention relates to a slot machine that executes a freeze effect for a predetermined time.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that a freeze time is determined by lottery and results in an advantage for a player according to the freeze time (see, for example, JP-A-2006-022039).
In the above-described conventional slot machine, the freeze time is uniformly drawn regardless of the situation, and the freeze effect is executed only for the determined time, which is uniform.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to perform a freeze effect at an optimum time according to various situations.

(B) Means for solving the problem of the first invention 1 (the corresponding embodiment will be described in parentheses)
The original invention was
The gaming state controlled by the main control means (main control board 50) has a first gaming state (for example, main gaming state 0) and a second gaming state (for example, main gaming state 10),
A lottery means (61) for drawing a role is provided,
In the first gaming state, when a special lottery result (winning numbers “58” to “65”) including at least a special combination (for example, 1BBA) is won and the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination is stopped, the first time (When the main game state is 0 and 1 BBA, 7999.07 ms), freeze effect (stop the progress of the game and output a predetermined effect during that time)
When the specific lottery result is obtained in the second game state and the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination is stopped, the second time (the second time is different from the first time) (main game) When the state is 10 and 1 BBA, a freezing effect can be executed at 1501.92 ms).

(C) Effect of the original invention 1 According to the initial invention, the time of the freezing effect when the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination is stopped depends on the gaming state, so the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination is It is possible to output an effect that matches the gaming state when stopped.

2. Initial invention 2
(A) Problem to be solved by the original invention 2 Same as the original invention 1.
(B) Means for Solving the Problem of the Initial Invention 2 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The original invention was
The gaming state controlled by the main control means (main control board 50) has a first gaming state (for example, main gaming state 0) and a second gaming state (for example, main gaming state 10),
A lottery means (61) for drawing a role is provided,
In the first gaming state, when a special lottery result including at least a special combination (for example, 1BBA) is won and the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination is stopped, the special game (1BBA game) is transferred. When the game end condition is satisfied, the freeze effect can be executed for the first time (29.99.37 ms when the main game state is 0 and 1 BBA),
In the second game state, when the special lottery result is obtained and the game is shifted to a special game based on the stop of the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination, the second time is satisfied when the special game end condition is satisfied. (The second time is different from the first time.) (When the main game state is 10 and 1 BBA, 1501.92 ms), a freeze effect can be executed.
(C) Effect of the original invention 2 According to the initial invention, the time of the freezing effect at the end of the special game differs depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the special role, so the effect according to the gaming state at the time of winning the special role Can be output.

3. Initial invention 3
(A) Problem to be solved by the original invention 3 Same as the first invention 1.
(B) Means for Solving the Problem of the Initial Invention 3 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The first solution is
The gaming state controlled by the main control means (main control board 50) has a first gaming state (for example, main gaming state 0) and a second gaming state (for example, main gaming state 10),
A lottery means (61) for drawing a role is provided,
When a specific lottery result including at least a special role (1BBA) win is obtained in the first gaming state, information relating to the first gaming state is stored in a predetermined storage area (address “F02C (H)” of RWM 53)) Can be memorized
When the specific lottery result is obtained in the second gaming state, information relating to the second gaming state can be stored in the predetermined storage area,
When the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination is stopped, it is possible to execute a freeze effect for the time corresponding to the information stored in the predetermined storage area (step S119 in FIG. 52, BB timer management in FIG. 55).
It is characterized by that.

The second solution is
The gaming state controlled by the main control means (main control board 50) has a first gaming state (for example, main gaming state 0) and a second gaming state (for example, main gaming state 10),
A lottery means (61) for drawing a role is provided,
When a specific lottery result including at least a special role (1BBA) win is obtained in the first gaming state, information relating to the first gaming state is stored in a predetermined storage area (address “F02C (H)” of RWM 53)) Can be memorized
When the specific lottery result is obtained in the second gaming state, information relating to the second gaming state can be stored in the predetermined storage area,
When the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination is stopped, it is possible to execute a freeze effect for the time corresponding to the information stored in the predetermined storage area (step S119 in FIG. 52, BB timer management in FIG. 55),
When the special game end condition is satisfied, it is possible to execute a freeze effect for a time corresponding to the information stored in the predetermined storage area (step S216 in FIG. 60, step S268 in FIG. 62, BB in FIG. 55). Timer management)
It is characterized by that.

(C) Effect of the original invention 3 According to the first solving means, the time of the freeze effect when the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role is stopped differs depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the special role. It is possible to output an effect that matches the gaming state when the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination is stopped.
According to the second solution, according to the gaming state at the time of winning the special role, the time for the freezing effect when the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role is stopped, and the time for the freezing effect at the end of the special game. Since they are different, it is possible to output an effect that matches the gaming state when the special role is won.

4). Initial invention 4
(A) Problems to be Solved by the Initial Invention 4 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine having information on whether or not to display information on the total number of acquired game media in a special game.
Conventionally, in a special game such as a BB game, the total number of medals acquired during the special game is displayed as an image (for example, JP 2000-185130 A).
Here, during the special game, for example, it is conceivable to execute an AT lottery. However, there is a problem that the attention of the player tends to be suitable for the number of obtained special games, and it is difficult to draw attention to the effects related to the AT lottery during the special game.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to enable the player's attention to be directed to the production during the special game.

(B) Means for Solving the Problem of the Initial Invention 4 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The original invention was
As the gaming state controlled by the main control means (main control board 50), the first gaming state (for example, main gaming state 0; non-ART, non-favorable section) and the first gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. 2 game states (main game state 5 (ART1) or main game state 3 (SR)),
A lottery means (61) for drawing a role is provided,
In the first game state, a special lottery result including at least a special combination (1BBA) is won, and a special game (main game state 11 (mission bonus)) that is shifted based on the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination is stopped. , It is possible to determine whether or not to shift to the second gaming state (main gaming state 3; SR for shifting to the main gaming state 5), and transition to the second gaming state by the end of the special game The production of whether or not to perform (second part production) can be output,
In the special game that is the result of the specific lottery in the first game state and has shifted based on the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role being stopped, information on the total number of acquired game media is not displayed,
In the second game state (main game state 5 (ART1)), the special lottery result (the main game state 12 (C bonus)) that is based on the result of the specific lottery and the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role is stopped. It is possible to display information on the total number of game media acquired.

(C) Effect of the Initial Invention 4 According to the initial invention, even if it is a substantially identical special game, the player's eyes can be directed to production by not displaying the total number of acquisitions.

5. Initial invention 5
(A) Problem to be solved by the original invention 5 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine that outputs an effect related to a design.
In the conventional technology, for example, during a BB game, when a combination that can stop the symbol combination of “White 7”-“White 7”-“White 7” is drawn and the winning combination is won, Aim! Is known (see, for example, paragraphs “0382” to “0383” of JP2012-016386A).
However, "Aim for" White 7 "! In the game, when the winning combination of “White 7” does not stop in the game, “White 7” does not stop in the display window at the time of the first stop. When stopped, there is a problem that the player cannot have a sense of expectation.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is that, when notifying information (production) for stopping a specific symbol or a specific symbol combination, the player can have a sense of expectation until the final stop. It is to be.

(B) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 5 (note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The first solution is
The gaming state controlled by the main control means (main control board 50) includes a first gaming state (for example, main gaming state 0) and a second gaming state (for example, a main gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. State 3)
A lottery means (61) for drawing a role is provided,
In the special game (1BBA game, main game state 11, mission bonus), the role lottery means performs a lottery so that a predetermined lottery result (winning of winning numbers “48” to “55”) may be obtained,
When any of the predetermined lottery results is obtained by the winning lottery means, a specific symbol (corresponding to the predetermined lottery result) based on the operation mode of the stop switch (the first stop on the right side and the double symbols). “BAR” or double symbols) or a combination of specific symbols (“BAR” aligned, one or more double symbols) can be stopped,
When any one of the predetermined lottery results is selected during the special game, a case in which information regarding the operation mode of the stop switch that can stop the specific symbol or the combination of the specific symbols corresponding to the predetermined lottery result is notified. Have
In the first gaming state, it becomes a specific lottery result including at least a special combination (1BBA) win, and when the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination stops, the game shifts to a special game, and any predetermined lottery result in the special game It is possible to determine whether or not to shift to the second gaming state based on the fact that it has become.

The second solving means is the first solving means,
As the predetermined lottery result, at least the first predetermined lottery result (for example, the small role I3 of the winning number “50”) and the second predetermined lottery result (for example, the winning number “48” having a lower probability than the first predetermined lottery result). A small role I1)
In the game that is the result of the first predetermined lottery, when the stop switch is operated according to the notified information about the operation mode of the stop switch (the first stop on the right and the aim of the two consecutive symbols), the Nth (N is an integer) ) By stopping the reel corresponding to the (third) operated stop switch, a specific symbol or a specific symbol combination (double symbol) can be stopped,
When the stop switch is operated in accordance with the notified information about the operation mode of the stop switch in the game having the second predetermined lottery result, it is operated to the Mth (M is an integer smaller than N) (first). It is possible to stop a specific symbol or a specific symbol combination (double symbol) by stopping the reel corresponding to the stop switch.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 5 According to the initial invention, it is not known until the final stop whether or not a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols (the “double symbol” in the embodiment) is stopped. A player can have a sense of expectation.

6). Initial invention 6
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 6 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine that outputs an effect related to the appearance of symbols.
In the conventional technology, for example, during a BB game, when a combination that can stop the symbol combination of “White 7”-“White 7”-“White 7” is drawn and the winning combination is won, Aim! Is known (see, for example, paragraphs “0382” to “0383” of JP2012-016386A).
However, "Aim for" White 7 "! In the game, when the winning combination of “White 7” does not stop in the game, “White 7” does not stop in the display window at the time of the first stop. When stopped, there is a problem that the player cannot have a sense of expectation.
Further, a predetermined operation mode (push order) for stopping “White 7” is determined in advance, but the player does not want to stop “White 7” and the player presses the stop switch in the predetermined operation mode. When “White 7” stops due to the operation, there is a possibility that the player may misunderstand.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is that it stops when it is desired to stop a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols, and when it is stopped when it is not desired to stop a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols. Therefore, it is necessary to clarify the distinction between the two and reduce the possibility of misidentifying the player.

(B) Means for Solving the Problem of Initial Invention 6 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The original invention was
The gaming state controlled by the main control means (main control board 50) includes a first gaming state (for example, main gaming state 0) and a second gaming state (for example, a main gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. State 3)
A lottery means (61) for drawing a role is provided,
In the special game (1BBA game, main game state 11, mission bonus), the role lottery means performs a lottery so that a predetermined lottery result (winning of winning numbers “48” to “55”) may be obtained,
When a predetermined lottery result is obtained by the winning lottery means, a specific symbol (“BAR”) corresponding to the predetermined lottery result is selected based on the operation mode of the stop switch (first stop on the right side and the double symbols). Or a combination of specific symbols ("BAR" aligned, one or more double symbols) can be stopped,
When it becomes a predetermined lottery result during a special game, it has a case of notifying information about an operation mode of a stop switch that can stop a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols corresponding to the predetermined lottery result,
Information regarding the operation mode of the stop switch that becomes a predetermined lottery result during a special game and that can stop a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols corresponding to the predetermined lottery result, and a specific symbol corresponding to the predetermined lottery result or When a specific symbol combination stops, a specific effect that emphasizes that a specific symbol or a specific symbol combination has stopped is output,
A specific lot corresponding to the predetermined lottery result in the case where the information regarding the operation mode of the stop switch which becomes the predetermined lottery result during the special game and the specific symbol corresponding to the predetermined lottery result or the combination of the specific symbol can be stopped is not notified. When a specific symbol or a specific symbol combination corresponding to a predetermined lottery result is stopped by operating the stop switch so that the symbol or a specific symbol combination stops, the specific symbol or the specific symbol combination It is controlled to not output a specific effect that emphasizes the fact that has stopped.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 6 According to the initial invention, a specific symbol or a specific symbol combination is a game in which information relating to an operation mode of a stop switch that can stop a specific symbol or a specific symbol combination is notified. Since a specific effect that emphasizes a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is output only when the player stops, the player can be shown whether or not that stoppage is advantageous to the player. It is possible to reduce the possibility of misidentification by the player.

7). Initial invention 7
(A) Problems to be Solved by the Initial Invention 7 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine that outputs an effect related to the design of the symbols.
In the conventional technology, for example, during a BB game, when a combination that can stop the symbol combination of “White 7”-“White 7”-“White 7” is drawn and the winning combination is won, Aim! Is known (see, for example, paragraphs “0382” to “0383” of JP2012-016386A).
However, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous because it is a game that only draws a combination that can stop the symbol combination of “White 7”-“White 7”-“White 7” during the special game. is there.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to make the lottery clear when a lottery advantageous to the player is executed during the special game.

(B) Means for Solving the Problem of the Initial Invention 7 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The original invention was
The gaming state controlled by the main control means (main control board 50) includes a first gaming state (for example, main gaming state 0) and a second gaming state (for example, a main gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. State 3)
A lottery means (61) for drawing a role is provided,
In the special game (1BBA game, main game state 11, mission bonus), the role lottery means performs a lottery so that a predetermined lottery result (winning of winning numbers “48” to “55”) may be obtained,
When a predetermined lottery result is obtained by the winning lottery means, a specific symbol (“BAR”) corresponding to the predetermined lottery result is selected based on the operation mode of the stop switch (first stop on the right side and the double symbols). Or a combination of specific symbols ("BAR" aligned, one or more double symbols) can be stopped,
As a special game period, it has a first period (first half part) and a second period (second half part),
A case in which when a predetermined lottery result is obtained in the first period during the special game, information on a stop switch operation mode in which a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols corresponding to the predetermined lottery result can be stopped is notified. Have
When the predetermined lottery result is reached in the second period during the special game, the information regarding the operation mode of the stop switch that can stop the specific symbol or the combination of the specific symbol corresponding to the predetermined lottery result is not notified,
In the first gaming state, the result is a specific lottery result including at least a special combination (1BBA) win. Decide whether or not to migrate,
In a special game that is a result of a specific lottery in the first game state and has shifted based on the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role being stopped, when a predetermined lottery result is obtained in the first period, in the second period It is characterized in that it is determined to shift to the second gaming state with a higher probability than when a predetermined lottery result is obtained.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 7 According to the initial invention, during the special game, a lottery is performed so that a predetermined lottery result is obtained, but in the first period, when the predetermined lottery result is obtained, the stop switch There are cases where information regarding the operation mode is notified, and there is a case where a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is stopped. On the other hand, in the second period, even when a predetermined lottery result is obtained, information regarding the operation mode of the stop switch is not notified, and a specific symbol or a specific symbol combination is not stopped. Thereby, the effect of whether or not to shift to the second gaming state can be executed around the first period.
In the second period, the lottery result executed in the first period (the lottery result indicating whether or not to shift to the second gaming state) is displayed by not stopping the specific symbol or the specific symbol combination. You can specialize in that.

8). Initial invention 8
(A) Problems to be Solved by the Initial Invention 8 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine that outputs an effect related to the appearance of symbols.
In the conventional technology, for example, during a BB game, when a combination that can stop the symbol combination of “White 7”-“White 7”-“White 7” is drawn and the winning combination is won, Aim! Is known (see, for example, paragraphs “0382” to “0383” of JP2012-016386A).
However, there is a problem that the production becomes monotonous because it is a game that only draws a combination that can stop the symbol combination of “White 7”-“White 7”-“White 7” during the special game. is there.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to prevent the production from becoming monotonous when a lottery that is advantageous to the player is executed during the special game.

(B) Means for Solving the Problem of the Initial Invention 8 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The original invention was
The gaming state controlled by the main control means (main control board 50) includes a first gaming state (for example, main gaming state 0) and a second gaming state (for example, a main gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. State 3)
A lottery means (61) for drawing a role is provided,
In the special game (1BBA game, main game state 11, mission bonus), the role lottery means performs a lottery so that a predetermined lottery result (winning of winning numbers “48” to “55”) may be obtained,
In the first gaming state, the result will be a special lottery result including at least a special role (1BBA) win, and when the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role is stopped, the game will shift to a special game, and a predetermined lottery result will be obtained during the special game. Based on that, it is possible to decide whether to shift to the second gaming state,
Both the special game results in a special lottery result and it is decided to shift to the second game state, and the special game results in a special lottery result and it is not decided to enter the second game state. There is a case where the predetermined content (level) is changed (leveled up),
The probability of changing the predetermined production content when it is decided to shift to the second gaming state with the special lottery result in the special game has not been decided to shift to the second gaming state with the special lottery result in the special game It is characterized by the fact that it is sometimes higher than the probability of changing the predetermined production content.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 8 According to the initial invention, whether or not to shift to the second gaming state can be suggested by a change in the predetermined effect contents during the special game.

10 Slot machines (gaming machines)
Reference Signs List 17 Display Window 21 Production Lamp 22 Speaker 23 Image Display Device 23a Overlay Display Area 24 Chance Button 31 Reel 32 Motor 33 Reel Sensor 35 Hopper 36 Hopper Motor 37 Discharge Sensor 40a 1 Bet Switch 40b 3 Bet Switch 41 Start Switch 42 Stop Switch 43 Medal slot 43a Passage sensor 44 Insertion sensor 45 Blocker 46 Checkout switch 50 Main control board (main control means)
51 Input port 52 Output port 53 RWM
54 ROM
55 Main CPU
61 Role lottery means 62 Winning flag control means 63 Push order instruction number selection means 64 Production group number selection means 65 Reel control means 66 Winning judgment means 67 Payout means 68 RT control means 69 Advantageous section control means 70 External signal transmission means 71 Control command Transmission means 75 Display board 76 Storage number display LED
77 Advantageous section display LED
78 Acquisition number display LED
80 Sub-control board (sub-control means)
81 Input port 82 Output port 83 RWM
84 ROM
85 Sub CPU
91 Production output control means 100 External concentration terminal board 200 Hall computer

Claims (1)

The gaming state controlled by the main control means has a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state,
It has a role lottery means to draw a role,
In the special game, the role lottery means performs a lottery so that a predetermined lottery result is obtained,
When the predetermined lottery means results in the predetermined lottery means, based on the operation mode of the stop switch, it is possible to stop a specific symbol or a specific symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined lottery result,
When it becomes a predetermined lottery result during a special game, it has a case of notifying information about an operation mode of a stop switch that can stop a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols corresponding to the predetermined lottery result,
Information regarding the operation mode of the stop switch that becomes a predetermined lottery result during a special game and that can stop a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols corresponding to the predetermined lottery result, and a specific symbol corresponding to the predetermined lottery result or When a specific symbol combination stops, a specific effect that emphasizes that a specific symbol or a specific symbol combination has stopped is output,
A specific lot corresponding to the predetermined lottery result in the case where the information regarding the operation mode of the stop switch which becomes the predetermined lottery result during the special game and the specific symbol corresponding to the predetermined lottery result or the combination of the specific symbol can be stopped is not notified. When a specific symbol or a specific symbol combination corresponding to a predetermined lottery result is stopped by operating the stop switch so that the symbol or a specific symbol combination stops, the specific symbol or the specific symbol combination A game machine that is controlled so as not to output a specific effect that emphasizes that the game has stopped.

Images